TOON BOOM HARMONY 14.0
ADVANCED EDITION

Reference GuideLegal Notices
Toon Boom Animation Inc.
4200 Saint-Laurent, Suite 1020
Montreal, Quebec, Canada
H2W 2R2
Tel: +1 514 278 8666
Fax: +1 514 278 2666
toonboom.com
Disclaimer
The content of this guide is covered by a specific limited warranty and exclusions and limit of liability under theapplicable License Agreement as supplemented by the special terms and conditions for Adobe®Flash® File
Format (SWF). For details, refer to the License Agreement and to those special terms and conditions.
The content of this guide is the property of Toon Boom Animation Inc. and is copyrighted.
Any reproduction in whole or in part is strictly prohibited.
Trademarks
Harmony is a trademark of Toon Boom Animation Inc.
Publication Date
9/12/2019
Copyright © 2017 Toon Boom Animation Inc., a Corus Entertainment Inc. company. All rights reserved.

2

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Contents
Toon Boom Harmony 14.0Advanced EditionReference Guide

1

Contents

3

Chapter 1: Reference

10

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

11

Add Column Dialog Box

14

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box

16

Add Frames Dialog Box

18

Add Prefix or Suffix Dialog Box

19

Add Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

20

Advanced Save Dialog Box

21

File Tab

22

Drawings (Harmony Server only)

22

Palettes Tab

23

Palette Lists Tab

24

Auto-Matte Dialog Box

25

Close Gaps Dialog Box

26

Column Properties Dialog Box

27

Column Types Dialog Box

28

Configure Line Art to Colour Art Dialog Box

29

Convert to Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

30

Create Cycle Dialog Box

31

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection Dialog Box

32

Create Function Step On Dialog Box

33

Create Palette Dialog Box

36

Database Selector Dialog Box

37

Edit Default Paste Preset Dialog Box

38

Edit Exposure Paste Preset Dialog Box

40

Element Manager Dialog Box

42

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box

43

Export to Flash Movie Dialog Box

45

Export to QuickTime Movie Dialog Box

47

3

Contents

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

48

Extend Exposure Dialog Box

51

Fill Cells Randomly Dialog Box

52

Fill Selection Dialog Box

53

Import Images Dialog Box

54

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box

60

Marker Colour Dialog Box

62

Movie Settings Dialog Box

64

New Scene Dialog Box

65

New Tool Preset Dialog Box

67

Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency Dialog Box

68

Palette Browser Dialog Box

69

Palette Operations Dialog Box

71

Paste Preset Dialog Box

72

Paste Special Dialog Box

74

Pose Copier Dialog Box

78

Preferences Dialog Box

80

Remove Dirt Dialog Box

81

Remove Hair Dialog Box

82

Save Dialog Box

83

Scene Settings Dialog Box

84

Resolution Tab

84

Alignment Tab

86

Bitmap Resolution Tab

88

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

89

Select Colour Dialog Box

90

Selection Presets Dialog Box

92

Sequence Fill Dialog Box

94

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box

96

Show Hidden Columns Dialog Box

98

Sound Settings Dialog Box

100

Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box

101

Timeline Scene Marker Dialog Box

103

4

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box

104

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

105

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

106

Options Tab

106

Help Tab

108

Versions Dialog Box

114

Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box

115

Chapter 3: Menus

117

Main Menus

118

Animation Menu

119

Drawing Menu

124

Edit Menu

129

File Menu

132

Help Menu

135

Insert Menu

136

Play Menu

137

Scene Menu

138

View Menu

140

Windows Menu

143

Quick-access Menus

144

View Menus

145

Camera View Menu

146

Colour View Menu

157

Drawing View Menu

159

Function View Menu

167

Library View Menu

169

Model View Menu

171

Perspective View Menu

172

Side View Menu

176

Timeline View Menu

179

Top View Menu

182

Xsheet View Menu

185

Chapter 4: Nodes

191

5

Contents

Combine Nodes

193

Blending Node

194

Cutter Node198

Highlight Node200

Tone Node

202

Deformation Nodes

204

Bone Node

205

Deformation Composite Node207

Game Bone Node

209

Kinematic Output Node211

Filter Nodes

212

Blur - Gaussian Node213

Blur Node215

Colour-Override Node217

Colour-Scale Node221

Glow Node223

Shadow Node

226

Transparency

228

Generator Nodes

230

Colour-Card Node

231

Element / Drawing Node232

Move Nodes

241

Camera Node242

Peg Node243

Transformation Tab

243

Quadmap Node244

Output Nodes

246

Display Node247

Sound Layer Properties

248

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

249

Brush Tool Properties (Vector)

251

Size and Smoothness Tab

252

Paper Texture Tab

253

6

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

255

Tip Tab257

Transparency Tab

262

Dual Tip Tab

265

Paper Texture Tab

269

Close Gap Tool Properties

272

Contour Editor Tool Properties

273

Cutter Tool Properties

275

Drawing Pivot Tool Properties

277

Dropper Tool Properties

279

Ellipse Tool Properties

280

Size and Smoothness Tab

283

Texture Tab

284

Envelope Tool Properties

285

Eraser Tool Properties

287

Size and Smoothness Tab

288

Soft Eraser Tab

289

Ink Tool Properties

290

Line Tool Properties

292

Size and Smoothness Tab

295

Texture Tab

296

Morphing Tool Properties

298

Paint Tool Properties

301

Pencil Tool Properties

305

Size and Smoothness Tab

308

Texture Tab

309

Pencil Editor Tool Properties

311

Perspective Tool Properties

315

Polyline Tool Properties

317

Size and Smoothness Tab

318

Texture Tab

319

Rectangle Tool Properties

321

Size and Smoothness Tab

323

7

Contents

Texture Tab

324

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties

326

Rigging Tool Properties

328

Mode

328

Options

328

Operations

328

Select Tool Properties

329

Smooth Editor Tool Properties

336

Stroke Tool Properties

338

Text Tool Properties

339

Transform Tool Properties

342

Zoom Tool Properties

344

Chapter 6: Toolbars

345

Top Toolbars

346

Advanced Animation Toolbar

347

Art Layer Toolbar

348

Deformation Toolbar

349

Display Toolbar

351

Easy Flipping Toolbar

352

Edit Toolbar

353

File Toolbar

354

Flip Toolbar

355Game Toolbar

356Mark Drawing Toolbar

357

Onion Skin Toolbar

358

Playback Toolbar

359

Scripting Toolbar

360

Tool Presets Toolbar

361

Tools Toolbar

362

Workspace Toolbar

365

View Toolbars

366

Timeline View Toolbar

367

Xsheet View Toolbar

368

8Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Views

369

Camera View

370

Colour View

376

Drawing View

380

Function View

382

Integrated Help View

384

Layer Properties View

385

Library View

387

Message Log View

389

Model View

390

Perspective View

391

Script Editor View

393

Side View

395

Timeline View

397

Tool Properties View

404

Top View

405

Xsheet View

407

9

Chapter 1: Reference

Chapter 1: Reference
Harmony has several commands, dialog boxes, and buttons. The Reference section lists all of them along withthe matching definition. To understand how to use these functions in a production context, read the User guide.
In the Reference guide, you will learn about the various parameters available in dialog boxes, menus, nodes,
toolbars, views, and windows.
The Preferences guide provides additional details about each individual preference.

10Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes
Dialog boxes contain controls such as options and lists through which you can carry out a particular command or
task. For example, in the Scene Settings dialog box, you must indicate the resolution and alignment. A typical dialog
box looks as follows:

Add Column Dialog Box

14

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box

16

Add Frames Dialog Box

18

Add Prefix or Suffix Dialog Box

19

Add Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

20

Advanced Save Dialog Box

21

File Tab

22

Drawings (Harmony Server only)

22

Palettes Tab

23

Palette Lists Tab

24

Auto-Matte Dialog Box

25

Close Gaps Dialog Box

26

Column Properties Dialog Box

27

Column Types Dialog Box

28

Configure Line Art to Colour Art Dialog Box

29

Convert to Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

30

Create Cycle Dialog Box

31

11

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection Dialog Box

32

Create Function Step On Dialog Box

33

Create Palette Dialog Box

36

Database Selector Dialog Box

37

Edit Default Paste Preset Dialog Box

38

Edit Exposure Paste Preset Dialog Box

40

Element Manager Dialog Box

42

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box

43

Export to Flash Movie Dialog Box

45

Export to QuickTime Movie Dialog Box

47

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

48

Extend Exposure Dialog Box

51

Fill Cells Randomly Dialog Box

52

Fill Selection Dialog Box

53

Import Images Dialog Box

54

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box

60

Marker Colour Dialog Box

62

Movie Settings Dialog Box

64

New Scene Dialog Box

65

New Tool Preset Dialog Box

67

Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency Dialog Box

68

Palette Browser Dialog Box

69

Palette Operations Dialog Box

71

Paste Preset Dialog Box

72

Paste Special Dialog Box

74

Pose Copier Dialog Box

78

Preferences Dialog Box

80

Remove Dirt Dialog Box

81

Remove Hair Dialog Box

82

Save Dialog Box

83

Scene Settings Dialog Box

84

Resolution Tab

84

Alignment Tab

86

Bitmap Resolution Tab

88

12

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Scripts Manager Dialog Box

89

Select Colour Dialog Box

90

Selection Presets Dialog Box

92

Sequence Fill Dialog Box

94

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box

96

Show Hidden Columns Dialog Box

98

Sound Settings Dialog Box

100

Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box

101

Timeline Scene Marker Dialog Box

103

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box

104

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box

105

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

106

Options Tab

106

Help Tab

108

Versions Dialog Box

114

Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box

115

13

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Add Column Dialog Box

Add Column Dialog Box
The Add Column dialog box lets you add a column in the Xsheet view.
By default, when you create a new scene, there is one drawing column in the Xsheet view and one corresponding
drawing layer in the Timeline view.
You can add an element for each drawing and it will appear as a column in the Xsheet view, a layer in the Timelineview, and a node in the Node view.

How to access the Add Column dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Xsheet menu, select Columns > Add Columns.

lClick the Add Columns

lPress Shift + C.

button.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new column a meaningful name.

Type

Lets you select a type of column to create. Choices include: Drawing, Timing,
Sound, 3D Path, 3D Rotation, Bezier Curve, Ease Curve, Expression andAnnotation.

Drawing Layer Options
Line Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing column in the Line Art layer.

Colour Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing column in the Colour Art layer.

Element
Create New Element

Creates an independent column with its own drawing folder.

Vector

Select this option if you want the layer to contain vector drawings.
Deselect this option if you want the layer to contain bitmap images.
Most of the time, the Vector option will be enabled.

14

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Bitmap Format

Lets you select the type of bitmap image to insert in the column. Select SCAN
from the list if you are planning to scan drawings using the Toon Boom
Harmony Scan module.

Scan TypeIf you chose SCAN from the Bitmap Format list, select the kind of scanningyou want to achieve.

Field Chart

When importing traditional animation, lets you indicate the size of paper onwhich the animation or background was drawn. If you are not using perforated
animation paper, leave the 12 field default value as is.

Use Existing Element

Uses drawings from an existing column in the new column. Both columns will
be attached to the same set of drawings, but their timing will remain
independent from one another. If you modify one of the drawings, it will be
modified in both columns. This is the same principle as the Clone column.

Name

Lets you select the column to which you want to link your new column.

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding
column in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of thelayers/columns are automatically numbered incrementally.

Add

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding
column in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as
many layers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns areautomatically numbered incrementally.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

15

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box

Add Drawing Layer Dialog Box
The Add Drawing Layer dialog box lets you add a drawing layer to your project.
By default, when you create a new scene, there is one drawing column in the Xsheet view and one corresponding
drawing layer in the Timeline view.
You can add an element for each drawing and it will appear as a column in the Xsheet view, a layer in the Timelineview, and a node in the Node view.

How to access the Add Drawing Layer dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Timeline view, click the Add Drawing Layerbutton.

l

From the top menu, select Insert > Drawing.

l

Press Ctrl + R (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + R (Mac OS X).

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new layer a meaningful name.

Overlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Overlay Art layer.

Line Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Line Art layer.

Colour Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Colour Art layer.

Underlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Underlay Art layer.

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding
column in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of the layers/columns are automatically numbered incrementally.

Add

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding
column in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as
many layers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns areautomatically numbered incrementally.

16Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Close

Closes the dialog box.

17

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Add Frames Dialog Box

Add Frames Dialog Box
The Add Frames dialog box lets you add frames anywhere in the middle of the scene—before or after a selection.
If you select a frame row in the Xsheet view, Harmony will add the new frames before or after the selection,
depending on your choice.
How to access the Add Frames dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

In the Timeline view, select the frame to which you want to add frames before or after.

l

In the Xsheet view, select a frame row.

l

In the Timeline view, select the frame to which you want to add frames before or after.

2. Do one of the following:ll

From the top menu, select Scene > Frame > Add Frames Before Selection or Add
Frames After Selection.
In the Xsheet view, right-click and select Frames > Add Frames Before Selection or Add
Frames After Selection.

l

In the Xsheet toolbar, click the Add Frames

button to add frame after your selection.

lPress Ctrl + G and Ctrl + H (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + G and Ctrl + H (Mac OS X).

The Add Frames dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Number of frames to add

Lets you enter the number of frames needed in the scene.

18Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Add Prefix or Suffix Dialog Box
The Add Prefix or Suffix dialog box lets you add or remove a prefix or suffix for a multi-layer selection.

How to access the Add Prefix or Suffix dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, select all the layers to rename or press Ctrl + A (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + A (Mac OS X).

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click the Add Prefix or Suffix Script
button. If the Scripting toolbar is not visible,
you can display it by selecting Windows > Toolbars > Scripting from the top menu. If the Add Prefix or
Suffix Script
button is not visible in the Scripting toolbar.
The Add Prefix or Suffix dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

SuffixAllows you put a defined set of characters (letters, numbers, symbols) after the
pre-existing layer name.

PrefixAllows you put a defined set of characters (letters, numbers, symbols) before thepre-existing layer name.

Insert Text

Enter a set of characters to be added to the selected layers.

Remove Text

Enter a set of characters to be removed from the selected layers.

19Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Add Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

Add Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box
The Add Synced Drawing Layer dialog box lets you add a drawing layer to your project that will automatically be
synced with the currently selected layer.
Depending on whether the Support Overlay and Underlay Arts option was selected in the Advanced tab of thePreferences panel, the Add Synced Drawing Layer dialog box may look one of two ways.

How to access the Add Synced Drawing Layer dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, right-click on the drawing layer you would like to sync with another layer.
2. From the right-click menu, select Add Synced Drawing Layer.
Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the new layer a meaningful name.

Overlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Overlay Art layer.

Line Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Line Art layer.

Colour Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Colour Art layer.

Underlay Art

Creates a vector or bitmap drawing layer in the Underlay Art layer.

Add and Close

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding
column in the Xsheet view and closes the dialog box. The names of the layers/columns are automatically numbered incrementally.

Add

Adds the selected type of layers to the Timeline view and corresponding
column in the Xsheet view. The dialog box remains open for you to add as
many layers/columns as needed. The names of the layers/columns areautomatically numbered incrementally.

Close

Closes the dialog box.

20

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Advanced Save Dialog Box
In Harmony Server, the Advanced Save dialog box lets you save the scene as a new version, overwrite an existingversion, set a new current version, display a list of modified drawings, colour palettes, and modified colour palettelists.

How to access the Advanced Save dialog Box
1. Make sure that you have the necessary rights to save the current scene version. If you do not, you canacquire the rights by selecting File > Rights to Modify Scene Version or Rights to Modify Scene.
2. From the top menu, select File > Advanced Save.

21

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Advanced Save Dialog Box

File Tab

Parameter

Description‣ Enable this option if you want to save the modifications made to thecurrent scene.
Save‣ Deselect the Save option if you only want to save specific componentsof your scene listed in the Drawings, Palettes or Palette Lists tabs. This
will disable all option in the File tab.

This Version (number)

Saves the current version of the scene. You can rename the current version by
typing a new name into the field.

New Version (number)

Saves the current scene as a new version. You can name this new version by
typing a name into the field.

Overwrite Existing Version

Lets you select an existing version of your scene from the list to overwrite it.

Description

Use this field to add or edit an existing description for the scene version you
want to save.

Mark as Current

Lets you set this scene version as the current one. This version will be automatically selected as the default current version when the scene is selected in
the Database Selector dialog box

Drawings (Harmony Server only)
The Drawings tab lists the modified drawings.

22

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Drawing list

Lets you select the modified drawings to save, and deselect the ones you do notwant to save.

Select All

Selects all modified drawings in list.

Deselect All

Deselects all modified drawings in the list.

Palettes Tab
The Palette tab lists the modified colour palettes.

Parameter

Description

23

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Advanced Save Dialog Box

Colour Palette list

Lets you select the colour palette to save, and deselect the ones you do not wantto save.

Show Recovered

Displays the recovered palettes in the list of modified palettes.

Select All

Selects all modified colour palettes in the palette list.

Deselect All

Deselects all modified colour palettes in the palette list.

Palette Lists Tab
The Palette Lists tab lists all the modified colour palette lists.

Parameter

Description

Palette Lists

Lets you select the modified palette list to save, and deselect the ones you do
not want to save.

Show Recovered

Displays the recovered palettes in the list of modified palettes.

Select All

Selects all modified palette lists in the list.

Deselect All

Deselects all modified palette lists in the list.

24

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Auto-Matte Dialog Box
The Auto-Matte dialog box lets you generate a matte for a drawing.

How to access the Auto Matte dialog box
1. In the Camera or Drawing view, select the drawing you want to create a matte for.
2. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Drawing > Generate Auto-Matte.

l

In the Camera or Drawing menu, select Drawing > Generate Auto-Matte.

Parameter

Description

Settings
Apply to all Drawings

Creates a matte for all the drawings included in layer.

RadiusLets you increase or decrease the radius value depending on the precision orroughness of your line. Use a lower value, the closer to your lines’ contours thematte will be shaped. The higher the value, the looser the matte will be shaped.

Source Art

Lets you select the layer from which you want the matte created: Line ArtColour
Art.

Destination Art

Lets you select the layer on which you want the matte to be created: Line
ArtColour Art.

Clear Destination Art First

Deletes existing artwork on the destination layer before adding a matte to it.

Copy Strokes in Destination

Copies the contour of your lines as invisible lines in the matte drawing. This isuseful if you need to reuse the lines later.

25

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Close Gaps Dialog Box

Close Gaps Dialog Box
The Close Gaps dialog box lets you close up drawing areas that not are closed. This may sometimes happen
when painting. You can close small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes between the two
closest points to close the colour zone. You do not need to trace directly over the gap. You can draw it a few
millimeters away. The two closest points automatically close the gap.

How to access the Close Gaps dialog box
1. Select View > Show > Show Strokes or press K to see a preview of the result.
2. To flatten the strokes you draw, click the Auto-Flatten

button in the Tool Properties view.

3. Select Drawing > Clean Up > Close Gaps or press Shift + F10 (Windows/Linux only).
The Close Gaps dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

Size

Lets you set the size of the gap you want to be closed.

Apply to all drawings

Closes all gaps in the drawing of the selected layer.

26

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Column Properties Dialog Box
The Column Properties dialog box lets you add, delete or modify elements (drawing folders) in your scene.

How to access the Drawing dialog box
1. In the Xsheet view, double-click on a column name. Do not click on the drawing folder name that the column
is linked to (this also appears in the column header just below the column name).
Parameter

Description

Name

Type in a new name in this field to create an element or to rename the selected
element.

Element
Name

Type in a new name in this field to create an element or to rename the selected
element.

Vector

Select this option if the new element is a vector drawing or if you want to enable
the parameters on the selected element in the Elements list.

Bitmap Format

Lets you select the file format of the bitmap layer.

Scan TypeIf you're planning to scan elements with the Toon Boom Harmony Scan module,
select the scan type from the list.

Field Chart

If you're importing traditional animation, select the size of the paper on which theanimation was drawn.

27

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Column Types Dialog Box

Column Types Dialog Box
The Columns Types dialog box lets you show or hide columns in the exposure sheet.

How to access the Columns Types dialog box
1. In the Xsheet view, select View > Column Types Manager.
The Column Types dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

Column Types

Lets you select the types of columns to display in the Xsheet view.

Save as Default

Makes these new settings the default ones used each time you start Harmony.

Restore Default

Returns the settings to their defaults.

28

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Configure Line Art to Colour Art Dialog Box
The Configure Line Art to Colour Art dialog box lets you modify settings for the Line Art and Colour Art layers.

How to access the Configure Line Art to Colour Art dialog box
1. In the Tools toolbar, select the Select tool.
2. In the Tool Properties view, hold down the Shift key and click on the Creatre Colour Art from Line Art button.
Parameter

Description

Use rendered version of thedrawing

Renders the drawing and vectorize it to calculate the position of the centrelinethat will produce the colour art stroke.

Maximum Resolution for
rendered image

The size of the rendered image.

Threshold for rendered image

The value of grey processed to create the rendered vectorized arts.

Fitting error for rendered BeziersThis value represents how precise the fitting of the colour art zone in relation to
the line art will be.

Source layer

Lets you select the layer (Line Art, Colour Art, Underlay or Overlay) you want thecolour art to be created from.

Destination layer

Lets you select the layer (Line Art, Colour Art, Underlay or Overlay) you want thecolour art to be created on.

Clear Destination Art Layer
First

Deletes the content before the colour art is added. This is useful when you
already have artwork on the destination layer.

Perform Line Art to Colour Art
Operation Immediately

Performs the Create Colour Art from Line Art command when you click OK.

29

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Convert to Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box

Convert to Synced Drawing Layer Dialog Box
The Sync Layer feature allows for drawings to be separated on different layers, but to have the same timing.

How to access the Convert to Synced Drawing Layer dialog box
1. Right-click on a drawing layer you would like to sync with another layer.
2. From the right-click menu, select Sync Layers With.
In the Choose the Parent Drawing Layer drop-down list, with the exception of the selected layer, every
layer in your scene is listed.
3. To sync a layer with your currently selected layer, from the drop-down list, select a parent drawing layer
and click OK. The child layer immediately updates to the parent layer's timing.

30

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Create Cycle Dialog Box
The Create Cycle dialog box lets you create cycles from a series of drawings and exposures.
When you create a drawing cycle, all the repeated drawings are linked to the same original files. When modify,
repaint, or correct a drawing named “1” for example, all drawings named “1” are updated simultaneously. In order tomodify a drawing independently from its other exposures, you must duplicate the drawing.

How to access the Create Cycle dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select the cell range to loop.

2. In the Timeline toolbar, click the Create Cycle
it).

button (you may have to customize the toolbar to display

The Create Cycle dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

Number of Cycles

Lets you specify the number of cycles, including the current selection.

31

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection Dialog Box

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection Dialog Box
The Create Drawing from Drawing Selection dialog box lets you cut a part of a drawing and send it to a new orexisting layer.

How to access the Create Drawing from Drawing Selection dialog box
1. From the top menu, select Edit > Create Drawing From Drawing Selection or press F9 (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + F9 (Mac OS X).
The Create Drawing From Drawing Selection dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

Layer Name

Lets you enter a name for the layer using the naming convention you
established.

Cut Artwork From Source

Lets you cut the selected artwork from the model.

32Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Create Function Step On Dialog Box
The Create Function Step On dialog box lets you hold the same value over a selected number of frames for multiple
parameters (pos x, scale y, etc.). This works well when you are animating drawings on 2s or 3s, for example, andyou want to hold the same value for a function over those two or three frames.

How to access the Create Function Step On dialog box
1. Add the Scripting toolbar to your interface:lll

Go to the top menu and select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.
Right-click on the empty space near the top of the interface and from the quick-access menu selecting
Scripting.
Right-click on the empty space near the top of a view and from the quick-access menu selecting
Scripting.

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the Manage Scripts

button to open the Scripts Manager window.

3. In the Scripts Manager, in the Files section, select the file TB_CreateStepsOn.js.
The functions associated with that file appear in the Functions section.
4. In the Functions section, select TB_CreateStepsOn.
The Add script to toolbar

button becomes active.

33

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Create Function Step On Dialog Box

5. Click on the Add script to toolbar
The TB_CreateStepsOn script

button.
button is added to the Scripting toolbar.

6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Timeline view, select the layer whose parameter values you would like to hold.
9. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the TB_CreateStepsOn script

button.

The Create Function Step On dialog box appears.

Parameter

Description

Settings
Every Number of Frames

Enter in the number of frames you would like to hold your functions.

Selection

First Frame

Enter in the frame number of where you would like the stepped holds tostart. The playhead location determines the lowest value you can enterfor the first frame. You need to move the playhead to frame one if you
would like to set frame one as the lowest possible starting value.

34

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Last Frame

Enter in the frame number of where you would like the stepped holds to
stop.

35

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Create Palette Dialog Box

Create Palette Dialog Box
The Create Palette dialog box lets you create a palette in Basic mode. For simple productions, it is recommended
to use the Basic mode. This setting stores the palettes automatically for you and saves them at the Scene level.
When you use the Advanced Palette Lists mode, you can decide at which level you want to store your palettes:
Environment, Job, Scene, or Element.

How to access the Create Palette dialog box
1. From the Colour view menu, select Palettes > New or click the New Palettelbutton.

Make sure you have the rights to modify the palette list. If not, select Edit > Edit Palette
List Mode.

Parameter

Description

New Palette Name

Lets you enter a name for the new palette.

36Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Database Selector Dialog Box
The Database Selector dialog box lets you connect to your studio's central database when working on Harmony
Server.
When you connect to the database, you cannot create new scenes directly from Harmony Advanced. The available
scenes will be the ones that were previously created using the Control Center module.

How to access the Database Selector dialog box
1. Start Harmony Server.
The Database Selector dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

Environments

Lets you select the scene's environment (project, movie).

Jobs

Lets you select the scene's job (episode, sequence).

ScenesLets you select the scene.

Get rights to modify the scene

Allows you to modify the selected version of the scene and access the version
manager during the opened session

Get rights to modify the scene
versionAllows you to modify the currently selected scene version, but locks access tothe version manager during the opened session.

Get rights to modify all scene
assetsAutomatically gets the rights to modify the scene and its assets. The user locking
the scene using this option is the only one that can edit and save the scene
version, all the drawings in that scene, all the palettes in the palette-list, both
palette-lists, but not the library folders.

VersionIf you saved different versions of a scene, this lets you select one to open.

37

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Edit Default Paste Preset Dialog Box

Edit Default Paste Preset Dialog Box
The Edit Default Paste Preset dialog box lets you modify settings for the keyframe and exposure paste presets,
as well as setting the defaults.

How to access the Edit Default Paste Preset dialog box
1. From the Timeline menu, select Edit > Modify Paste Presets > All or Key Frame or Exposure.
Parameter

Description

Drawings
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer,drawing files will not be created.
Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures
Add/Remove Exposure to a drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with thesame name do not already exist in the destination.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.
Enforce Key Exposure

If there are key exposures that exist on copied drawings, they are preserved
when pasting. No key exposures are added. This is the default behavior when
pasting.

Fill Gap with Previous
Drawing

Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view with the previous drawing.

Fill to Next Key
Exposure

Fills selected area till the next key exposure.

Keyframes

Add/Remove
Keyframes

Motion: Copies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the newframe.
Velocity: Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the newframe.

38

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Rotation: Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the newframe.
Scale: Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.
Skew: Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.
Force Keyframes at Function's Beginning and End: Adds a keyframe to thebeginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing the source function.

39

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Edit Exposure Paste Preset Dialog Box

Edit Exposure Paste Preset Dialog Box
The Edit Exposure Paste Preset dialog box lets you reuse key exposures as you animate.

How to access the Edit Exposure Paste Preset dialog box
1. From the Timeline view menu, select Edit > Modify Paste Presets > Exposure.
The Edit Exposure Paste Preset dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

Drawings
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer,drawing files will not be created.
Only create drawing files when do they do not exist: When adding
Add/Remove Exposure exposures to a drawing layer, new drawings will be created only whendrawings with the same name do not already exist in the destination.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.
Enforce Key Exposure

Creates a key exposure on the same drawing.

Fill Gap with Previous Drawing Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view with the previous drawing.
Fill to Next Key Exposure

Fills selected area till the next key exposure.

Keyframes
Motion: Copies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the newframe.
Add/Remove Keyframes

Velocity: Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the newframe.
Rotation: Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the newframe.
Scale: Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.

40Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Skew: Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.
Force Keyframes at Function's Beginning and End: Adds a keyframe to thebeginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing the source function.
Reset to Default

Return all values to their defaults.

41

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Element Manager Dialog Box

Element Manager Dialog Box
The Element Manager window lets you Opens the Element Manager window where you can add, delete or modify
elements (drawing folders) in your scene. If you have drawing folders that are not linked to a column in yourscene, use the Element Manager to delete them if needed. See xref Reference > Windows > Element Manager.

How to access the Element Manager window
1. From the top menu, select Scene > Element Manager.
Parameter

Description

Elements
Delete Elements

Deletes the selected elements.

Delete Elements andDirectories

Deletes the selected layer and its directories (drawing folder).

Add/Modify Element
Name

Type in a new name in this field to create an element or to rename the selected
element.

Vector

Select this option if the new element is a vector drawing or if you want toenable the parameters on the selected element in the Elements list.

Bitmap Format

Lets you select the file format of the bitmap layer.

Scan TypeIf you're planning to scan elements with the Toon Boom Harmony Scan
module, select the scan type from the list.

Field Chart

If you're importing traditional animation, select the size of the paper on which
the animation was drawn.

Add

Creates a new element with the current parameters entered in the Add/Modify
Element section.

ModifyApplies the parameter changes made to the selected element.

42

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box
The Export to Easel JS window lets you flatten an image sequence of your animation. Even if you have a fully rigged
puppet or a single drawing layer with your animation sequence, the outcome will still be a flattened output of eachframe, grouped together in your sprite sheet. This allows for more flexibility and freedom of work as you have accessto any tools or effect modules you want to use. However, this can result in heavier files depending on the length,complexity and export size of your animation.

How to access the Export to Easel JS window
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

2. Click the Export to Easel JS
Parameter

button.

Description

Select Directory
Save Path

The folder path where you want to save your export.

Save Name

The folder name in which you will save your export. This will also be the name ofyour asset in Unity. Your scene file name will be used as the clip name.

Existing Clips in Folder

Displays the clips in the folder.

43

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export to Easel JS Dialog Box

Scene Options

Display

Here, you must select the Display of your character. This is the one that will be
used to render out all of the information attached to that Display node. If the
Unconnected_Display option is selected, all of the visual information in yourscene will be rendered out.

Sprite Sheet Preferences
Max Width
Max HeightThis is a value, in pixels, for the maximum width and height the exported sprite
sheet should be. By default, both values are set to 2048 pixels.

Expand Sprite Sheet

Uses the minimum size necessary up until it reaches the maximum resolution.

Fixed Sprite Sheet

Creates a texture of the specified size (Max Width and Max Height) even if it does
not fill it up completely by all the drawings in your scene.
POT: Exports to sprite sheets with sizes that are a power of 2. For example: 1024
x 1024. This is optimized for many graphics cards, but consumes more memory.

Resolution Type
NPOT: Some game engines are optimized specifically to render to non powers of
two, so that it will avoid those numbers. Example: 1000 x 1000.

Reuse FramesThis option works in tandem with the Threshold option. The export will compare
the drawings in your project to reuse a maximum of similar drawings and reduce
the amount of information found in the sprite sheet, making it lighter. The export
will omit the creation of new drawings if the difference is less than the thresholdpercentage.

ThresholdCalculates the differences between multiple drawings. A 2% threshold will
prevent the creation of a new drawing if the drawing is too similar to an existingdrawing. For instance, with a 2% threshold, and my drawing is 100 pixels big, only
2 of those pixels need to be different from my other drawing in order to create a
new one. The higher the threshold, the fewer similar drawings you will have.

Sprite Resolutions

Size of the render of the individual sprite, when it exports each drawing out.

44Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Export to Flash Movie Dialog Box
The Export to Flash Movie dialog box lets you export your animation as a Flash (.swf) movie.

How to access the Export to Flash Movie dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > SWF.
The Export to Flash Movie (.swf) dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

OutputLets you specify the location in which the file will be exported.

Export Range
All

Exports all the frames of your movie.

FramesExport a frame range which you specify

Options
Frame Rate

Lets you enter a Frame rate (fps). By default, it will be set to match the fps of yourHarmony project. If you choose a lower frame rate, your export playback will befaster than your actual project. The reverse is also true for a higher frame rate.
Lets you select a JPEG quality:

Jpeg Quality‣

100 = Full quality‣

50 = Average quality at about 1/5th of the size.

‣

25 = Medium quality where loss of high image resolution starts tooccur.

‣

10 = Low quality where “macro-blocking” or large pixelation become
obvious.

‣

1 = Lowest quality where there is extreme loss of colour and detail andthe image becomes nearly unrecognizable.
45

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export to Flash Movie Dialog Box

Protect from Import

Prevents the movie from being imported into another application.

Convert Pencil Lines to
Retains the thickness of pencil lines.
Brush Lines
Compress Movie

Compresses the movie for a lighter format. The movie may lose some quality, but
the file will be lighter.
Lets you select the effects you do NOT want to be rendered in the SWF movie.

Do Not Export

NOTE: Certain Harmony effects are not listed in this section as they are notcompatible and therefore not available for SWF export. These effects will notappear in the SWF render.

46

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Export to QuickTime Movie Dialog Box
The Export to QuickTime Movie dialog box lets you export your animation as a QuickTime movie. If you want torender a QuickTime movie with lossless compression and transparency, you can use the Animation video codec
with the colour depth set to Millions of Colours +.

How to access the Export to QuickTime Movie dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
Parameter

Description

OutputBrowseLets you select a folder in which to save your movie and give it a file name for theexport.

Export Range
All

Exports the entire frame range.

FramesLets you enter the frame range to export.

Resolution
Resolution list

Lets you select a resolution ratio. If you select Custom, you can enter the widthand height.

Width and HeightLets you specify the width and height of the resolution.

Options
Movie Options

Opens the Movie Settings dialog box in which you can set the the compression
settings for the movie you will export—see Movie Settings Dialog Box.

47

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box
The Export to Sprite Sheets window export to multiple resolutions, generating multiple .xml files and one or
multiple sprites sheets depending how many sprite resolutions you defined.
This saves different animations of the same character into the same name. For example, if there's an idle, run,and jump animation, these should all share the same Save Name. You can think of it as the overall collection ofanimations. Inside are the different saved scene versions whose drawings you can reuse for all the animations inthat character set. Each scene version will be displayed as an item in the list.
When you export an animation, only the drawings used in that scene are exported. All the drawings are exported
individually first and then atlased together into a sprite sheet.
If you saved multiple animations to the same Save Name (i.e. SpaceDuck: run, idle), then it will reatlas the sprite
sheet to include all the drawings from all the animations in that folder, creating a new animation file, but reusing
the same skeleton.

How to access the Export to Sprite Sheets window
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Game.

48

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

2. Click the Export to Sprite Sheets
Parameter

button.

Description

Select Directory
Asset Path

The folder path where you want to save your export.

Asset Name

The folder name in which you will save your export. This will also be the name ofyour asset in Unity. Your scene file name will be used as the clip name.

Existing Clips in Folder
Preview Window

Displays a list of pre-existing clips in the same export folder location, most likely
exported there from a previous time.

Use Scene Markers to
Export Clips

Uses scene markers to define the export range, instead of exporting the entire
scene.

Project Settings

Unit Scale

Lets you change the scale when exporting to Unity to accommodate the size ofthe export without it affecting the Harmony scene. This helps you resize assets
properly for Unity without having to resize them in Harmony. The basic scale is
one Animation Field for one Unity unit.

PresetLets you select the unit conversion from Harmony to Unity, by selecting one of 4
presets. Note: a field is a unit of measure in traditional animation grid.

Sprite Sheet Preferences
Max Width

This is a value, in pixels, for the maximum width and height the exported sprite
sheet should be. By default, both values are set to 2048 pixels.

Max Height

Makes linear values for interpolation. This increases the amount of memory used
but frees up the calculation so it is not done on the fly.

Expand Sprite Sheet

Uses the minimum size necessary up until it reaches the maximum resolution.

Fixed Sprite Sheet

Creates a texture of the specified size (Max Width and Max Height) even if it does
not fill it up completely by all the drawings in your scene.
POT: Exports to sprite sheets with sizes that are a power of 2. For example: 1024
x 1024. This is optimized for many graphics cards, but consumes more memory.

Resolution Type
NPOT: Some game engines are optimized specifically to render to non powers of
two, so that it will avoid those numbers. Example: 1000 x 1000.

Reuse FramesThis option works in tandem with the Threshold option. The export will compare
the drawings in your project to reuse a maximum of similar drawings and reduce
the amount of information found in the sprite sheet, making it lighter. The export
will omit the creation of new drawings if the difference is less than the thresholdpercentage.

ThresholdCalculates the differences between multiple drawings. A 2% threshold will
prevent the creation of a new drawing if the drawing is too similar to an existing49

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Export to Sprite Sheet Dialog Box

drawing. For instance, with a 2% threshold, and my drawing is 100 pixels big, only
2 of those pixels need to be different from my other drawing in order to create a
new one. The higher the threshold, the fewer similar drawings you will have.
Sprite Resolutions

Size of the render of the individual sprite, when it exports each drawing out.

Delete Existing Clips

Select this option to delete any pre-existing clips in the export location.

Bake Animation Curves

Makes linear values for interpolation. This increases the amount of memory used
but frees up the calculation so it is not done on the fly.

Clear Texture Folder

Removes any information from the texture folder within the Harmony file. This
has no incidence towards the Unity export but contributes to a lighter Harmony
file.

50

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Extend Exposure Dialog Box
The Extend Exposure dialog box lets you extend the exposure of a selected cell in the Timeline or Xsheet.

How to access the Extend Exposure dialog box
1. Select a cell and do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Animation > Cell > Extend Exposure.

lPress F5.

The Extend Exposure dialog box opens.
Parameter

Description

Extend to Frame

Lets you enter the frame up to which you want to extend the exposure. You can
expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings that were originally
there or move the subsequent frames forward in time.

Overwrite

Lets you expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings that wereorginally there.

InsertLets you expose the drawing in the frames and move the subsequent frames
forward in the Timeline view.

51

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Fill Cells Randomly Dialog Box

Fill Cells Randomly Dialog Box
The Fill Cells Randomly dialog box lets you Lets you fill in random values over a selection. You can give amaximum and a minimum value and create a range for Harmony to choose the random values from. The selection
can be over one cell or a cell range in one column or more or an entire column or many entire columns.
How to access the Fill Cells Randomly dialog box
1. Do one of the following:ll

Select Animation > Cell > Fill Cells Randomly.
In the Xsheet view, click the Fill Cells Randomly
toolbar to display it).

button (you may have to customize the

The Fill Cells Randomly dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Minimum Value

The lowest value to be used in the randomized exposure or keyframe value.

Maximum Value

The highest value to be used in the randomized exposure or keyframe value.

Hold

The exposure holding value.

Whole Numbers

If you are applying this to a drawing column, this option lets you avoid having
decimal points.

Add Key Exposure After

Inserts a key exposure on the frame following the last cell of the selection.

52

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Fill Selection Dialog Box
The Fill Selection dialog box lets you Lets you fill the same value over an entire selection. The selection can be over
one cell, a cell range in one column, a cell range over many columns, an entire column, or many columns. You can
use numbers, words, letters, or any alphanumeric value.
How to access the Fill Selection dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select a cell range.

1. Do one of the following:‣

From the top menu, select Animation > Cell > Fill Selection.

‣

In the Xsheet toolbar, click the Fill Selection
it).

‣Press Ctrl + T (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + T (Mac OS X)).

button (you may have to customize the toolbar to display

The Fill Selection dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Value

This is the value to be used in the filled selection.

Add Key Exposure After

Inserts a key exposure on the frame following the last cell of the selection.

53

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Import Images Dialog Box

Import Images Dialog Box
T-HFND-007-011
The Import Images dialog box lets you import bitmap images and vectorize them, making the images editable.
Then you can use a variety of drawing tools to edit the image. Or you can always keep the original bitmap image
as is.
Also, you can choose to import bitmap images on bitmap or vector layers depending on your project..
How to open the Import Images dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select File > Import > Images.

l

In the File toolbar, click the Import Imagesl

In the Xsheet view, right-click anywhere in the frame area and select Import > Images.

button.

The Import Images dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Files
BrowseLets you find and select images on your computer.

Create Layers(s)Create layers for imported images.

Create Single Layer
Named

Creates a new layer with the specified name and imports the images into it.

Create Layer(s) Basedon Filenames

Creates a layer based on each unique filename prefix. For example, if you
import three files named a-1.tga, a-2.tga and b-1.tga, this will create twolayers, one named "a" and one named "b". Layer "a" will contain the two first

Layer

54

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

images and "b" will contain the third one.

Add to Existing Layer

Import Options

Imports the images into the specified layer. Note that you can only import intolayers that are compatible with your import options. For example, if you're
importing images as vector drawings, you can only import them into vector
drawing layers.
Depending on how you choose to import images, the Alignment section offers
different options.

Keep as Original
BitmapRetains an imported image as a bitmap. In the Alignment section, decide on
the size and placement of your image within the camera frame. Depending on
the Scene Settings (the height and width in pixels that you chose for yourproject), an image that you import may get scaled to the point where all its
individual pixels become visible.

Import as Toon Boom
Bitmap Drawing

Imports a drawing into a vector layer where you can edit the image using thedrawing tools.

Convert to Toon Boom
Vector Drawing

Imports a drawing and converts it to a Toon Boom vector drawing.

Alignment (Keep As Original Bitmap)
Fit:
Adjusts the image's size to fit completely within the scene's field, bothvertically and horizontally, making sure the entire image is visible.
If the image's orientation is portrait, then it will adjust the image's height to fit
the field's height, without affecting the image's aspect ratio:

Rules

If the image orientation is landscape, then it will adjust the image's width to fit
the field's width, without affecting the image's aspect ratio:

55

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Import Images Dialog Box

56

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Pan:
This has the opposite effect to the fit parameter. The image's smallest
dimension will be made to fit the scene frame's matching dimension, and theimage's largest dimension will be adjusted proportionally, making the image fill
the entire scene field, and bleed past its boundaries it if its aspect ratio does
not match the field's aspect ratio. This option can be used to import a panningbackground image, also referred to as a pan.
If the image's orientation is portrait, it will adjust the image's width to fit thefield's width, without affecting its aspect ratio:

If the image's orientation is landscape, it will adjust the image's height to fit thefield's height, without affecting its aspect ratio:

This has the opposite effect to the fit parameter. The image's smallest
dimension will be made to fit the scene frame's matching dimension, and theimage's largest dimension will be adjusted proportionally, making the image fill
the entire scene field, and bleed past its boundaries it if its aspect ratio does
not match the field's aspect ratio. This option can be used to import a panningbackground image, also referred to as a pan.
If the image's orientation is portrait, it will adjust the image's width to fit thefield's width, without affecting its aspect ratio:

57

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Import Images Dialog Box

This
hasResolution:
the oppositeScales
effect to
Projectthefitparameter.
The
image's
the image to fit the scene's
smallest
dimensionwill
resolution, making eachbe
pixel
made
to fit thesceneinthe imagetakeone frame's
pixel inmatching
dimension,and thethescene's
field. For example,
image'slargestdimension
if the image's dimensions inwillbeadjusted
proportionally,
pixelsare halfof the scene's
makingtheimage
the entire
resolution in pixels,fillthen
thescene field,
and bleed
past its
image'sdimensions
willboundaries
if itsofaspectratio
appearto beithalf
the scene
does notmatch the field's
field'sdimensions.
aspect ratio. This option can
Alignment (Import as Toon Boom Bitmap Drawing)
be used to import a panningbackground image, also
Horizontal Fit:
referred to as a pan.
Adjusts the image's size so that its width matches the scene's width, without
If the image's orientation isaffecting its aspect ratio.
portrait, it will adjust theimage's width to fit the field's
width, without affecting its
aspect ratio:

Rules

Vertical Fit:
Adjusts the image's size so that its height matches the scene's height, without
affecting its aspect ratio.

If the image's orientation islandscape, it will adjust theimage's height to fit the field'sheight, without affecting its
aspect ratio:

Actual Size: Imports the image in its actual size, without adjusting its size
This has the opposite effect tothe fit parameter. The image's
smallest dimension will bemade to fit the scene frame's
matching dimension, and theimage's largest dimension will

58Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

relative to the scene's resolution. For example, if the image's dimensions in
pixels are half of the scene's resolution in pixels, then the image's dimensions
will appear to be half of the scene field's dimensions.
Transparency
Premultiplied with White: Individual pixels at the edge of an image are
blended with white.
Premultiplied with Black:Pixels at the edge of an image are blended withblack.
Straight: Pixels at the edge of an image are blended with black, white andgreys.
Alpha

Clamp Colour to Alpha:Premultiplies the colour value with the alpha value.
When the colour is clamped to the alpha, the colour value cannot be higher
than the alpha value. It calculates the real colour value faster. When the RGB
values are multiplied with the alpha value, that is to say, if you have a pixel ofvalue R=247, G=188, B=29 and the alpha is 50% or the image has a 50%
transparency, then the actual RGB values that are output would be half of theamounts listed above.

Vectorization
Black and White

Vectorizes drawings with a solid black line. This creates a 100% vector-based
drawing and paints it with the Vectorized Line colour swatch from your scene's
palette.

Grey

Vectorizes the image as a mix of vector contour and greyscale bitmap filling.
Lines keep the texture from the scan, and the white of the paper becomestransparent.

New Preset

Lets you create a new preset.

Delete Preset

Lets you delete any preset in the list.

Edit Preset

Lets you edit the vectorization parameters for the selected preset.

59Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box

Manage Tool Presets Dialog Box
The Tool Presets window lets you create new tool presets and manage them.

How to access the Manage Tool Presets window
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Tool Presets.

l

Right-click an empty area below the top menu and select Tool Presets.

2. In the Tool Presets toolbar, click the Manage Presets button.
Parameter

Description

Icon

Lets you select a preset to manage.

ImportLets you import an existing preset.

ExportLets you export a preset for use in other projects.

DeleteRemoves the preset from the list of tool presets.

Name

Lets you change the name of the preset.

Icon list

Lets you select an icon for the preset.

Folder icon

Lets you select an image for the preset.

ShortcutLets you assign a keyboard shortcut to the new preset.

60Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

ColourSaves the current colour into the tool preset.

Tool

If you disable this option, only the colour will be associated. You could, forexample, set three different colours with shortcuts not associated with any
tool. The colour preset would then work on any selected tool. Selecting thebrush tool was only a vehicle to get into the New Tool Preset dialog box.

UpdateAfter adjusting the settings for a preset, the current properties are applied to thepresets, as well as any other changes you made in the Manage Tool Presets
window.

61

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Marker Colour Dialog Box

Marker Colour Dialog Box
The Marker Colour dialog box lets you set the colour of scene markers that are displayed at the top of the Timelineview (in the frame counter area). Using colours for scene markers helps to differentiate them visually, making
them easy to identify in the Timeline view.
You can select a colour by choosing from a basic set of colours, using the colour wheel or by specifying the HSV
or RGB values. Once you have selected a colour, you can adjust its intensity and save it as a custom colour thatyou can reuse.

How to access the Marker Colour dialog box
1. In the frame counter area of the Timeline view, select a frame range to mark.

2. Right-click and select Create Scene Marker.
The Timeline Scene Marker dialog box opens. The Colour box displays a black colour swatch, or thecolour of the last scene marker you created.

3. Click the colour swatch.
The Marker Colour dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Basic colours

A basic set of colours to choose from.

62

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Custom colours

Displays the custom colours you previously stored using the Add to Custom
Colours button.

Add to custom colours

Lets you add the selected colour to the Custom colours list above.

Colour wheel

Lets you select a colour by dragging the T-shaped pointer.

Value slider

Once you select a colour, you can drag the slider to change the intensity andsee it previewed in the Colour Preview window below..

Colour Preview

Displays the colour you are currently selecting. To apply the colour, click OK.

Hue, Saturation, Value

Lets you set the hue (colour), saturation (amount of colour) and brightness(value) of the colour.

Red, Green, Blue

Lets you set the red, green and blue values.

63Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Movie Settings Dialog Box

Movie Settings Dialog Box
The Movie Settings dialog box lets you set the compression settings for the movie you will export.

How to access the Movie Settings dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
2. In the Export to QuickTime Movie dialog box that opens, click Movie Options.
Parameter

Description

Video
Settings

Opens the Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box. This is where
you can set the video compression settings for the movie you will export—see
Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box on page 101.

FilterOpens the Choose Video Filter dialog box, where you can select from a rangeof filters to apply to your video export.

Size

Opens the Export Size Settings dialog box. The size settings are overridden by
the Harmony's scene settings.

Settings

Opens the Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box. This is where
you can you set the sound compression settings for the movie you will export—
see Sound Settings Dialog Box on page 100.

Sound

64

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

New Scene Dialog Box
The New Scene window lets you create a new scene.

How to access the New Scene window
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select File > New.

l

In the File toolbar, click the NewlPress Ctrl + N (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + N (Mac OS X).

button.

The New Scene dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you type in a name for the new scene.

Location

Lists the locations you used most frequently for storing scenes.

BrowseOpens a browser in which you can specify a location for the new scene that is notlisted in the Location list.

Camera Size

Opens a list of resolutions.

+ (Create Custom Resolution)

Opens the New Resolution window in which you can create a custom resolutionthat is added to the Camera Size list.

- (Delete Custom Resolution)

Lets you remove a custom resolution from the Camera Size list.

Width

Indicates the width of the resolution you chose from the Camera Size list.

65

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Frame Rate

New Scene Dialog Box

Indicates the frame rate of the resolution you chose from the Camera Size list.

66

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

New Tool Preset Dialog Box
The New Tool Preset dialog box lets you create new tool presets and manage them.
Tool presets let you save a variety of settings and are very efficient for accessing the tools you use most often. Thatway, the tool is already set with the desired properties, such as colour, line thickness, whether to enable Draw
Behind or Auto Flatten mode, and so on. You can create presets for these tools and many more: Brush, Pencil,
Eraser, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Line.
The difference between a tool preset and a brush preset is that when you save a tool preset, you have the option ofsaving the colour and assigning a shortcut, which you cannot do with brush presets.

How to access the New Tool Preset dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Toolbars > Tool Presets.

l

Right-click an empty area below the top menu and select Tool Presets.

2. In the Tool Presets toolbar, click the New Tool Preset button.
Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you give the preset a meaningful name.

Icon list

Lets you select an icon for the preset.

Folder icon

Lets you select an image for the preset.

ShortcutLets you assign a keyboard shortcut to the preset.

ColourSaves the current colour into the tool preset.

Tool

If you disable this option, only the colour will be associated. You could, forexample, set three different colours with shortcuts not associated with any tool.
The colour preset would then work on any selected tool. Selecting the brush tool
was only a vehicle to get into the New Tool Preset dialog box.

67

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency Dialog Box

Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency Dialog Box
This dialog box lets you adjust the Onion Skin and Light table transparency parameters.

How to access the Onion Skin and Light Table Transparency dialog boxl

In the Drawing view toolbar, click on the Top Light
parency dialog box.

Commandbutton to open the Onion Skin and Light Table Trans-

Description

Onion Skin Opacity

Sets the maximum opacity value for the onion skin opacity display. Moving
the slider all the way to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way tothe right = 100% opacity.

Lighttable Opacity

Sets the maximum opacity value for the light table display. Moving the slider
all the way to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way to the right= 100% opacity.

LightTable Wash

Sets the washed-out value for the light table display. Moving the slider all theway to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way to the right = 100%
opacity.

Bitmap Background
Wash

Sets the maximum opacity value for the background wash. Moving the slider
all the way to the left = 0% opacity. Moving the slider all the way to the right= 100% opacity. Only works for bitmap layers.

Pencil Lines Opacity

Sets the maximum opacity value for central vector lines (lines made by the
Pencil or Shape tools). Moving the slider all the way to the left = 0% opacity.
Moving the slider all the way to the right = 100% opacity.

68Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Palette Browser Dialog Box
When you start Toon Boom Harmony connected to the database, you can access the Palette Browser dialog box
from the Palette Operations dialog box when you want to clone palettes.
In Harmony, palettes are individual *.plt files that can be copied, transferred and stored. When a palette is createdfrom Harmony, it needs to be stored somewhere. By default, the palette file is stored in the scene directory in apalette-library folder unless you specify a different location.

How to access the Palette Browser dialog box
1. Start and log in.
2. Close the Database Selector dialog box.
3. From the top menu, select Tools > Palette Operations.
1. In the Palette Operations dialog box that opens, select the palette you want to clone at the location and level
in which it was stored.
2. Click Clone.
Parameter

Description

Palette Location
Environment

The production, project, feature film or series.

Job

The episode and sequence from each environment.

Scene

The scenes from each job.

Element

The layers and columns in each scene.

PaletteThe scene palettes.

New Palette Name

Lets you enter a name for the new palette. There is no need to add the suffix"palette" to the name as it is always recognized as a palette file.

69

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Palette Browser Dialog Box

Palette List
The Scene Palette List is mainly used with cut-out animation. A cut-out character
will often be divided in twenty to thirty different drawing elements that use thecharacter's master palette.
Scene Palette List
The palette list is stored at the scene level instead of the Element directory. Thisway, all palettes linked to this list will appear in every drawing element created in
the scene. There is no need to manually load the palette in each element.

Element Palette List

The Element Palette List is mainly used with traditional and paperless animation.
Unlike cut-out animation, all columns (drawing elements) contain different
characters, props, backgrounds and effects. The Element Palette List is usedbecause you do not necessarily want all of the palettes for all of your elements
linked in every column.
The palette list is stored in the drawing element's directory instead of directly in
the Scene level. This ensures that the links to the palettes appear only in theappropriate element. If you prefer to access a global palette list, link your palettes
to the Scene Palette List.

70

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Palette Operations Dialog Box
When you start Toon Boom Harmony connected to the database, you can access the Palette Operations dialog box
which lets you clone, rename, or delete palettes.
In Harmony, palettes are individual *.plt files that can be copied, transferred and stored. When a palette is createdfrom Harmony, it needs to be stored somewhere. By default, the palette file is stored in the scene directory in apalette-library folder unless you specify a different location.
There are four locations where you can find palette-library folders: Element, Scene, Job and Environment.

How to access the Palette Operations dialog box
1. Start and log in.
2. Close the Database Selector dialog box.
3. From the top menu, select Tools > Palette Operations.
Parameter

Description

Environment

The production, project, feature film or series.

Job

The episode and sequence from each environment.

Scene

The scenes from each job.

Element

The layers and columns in each scene.

PaletteThe scene palettes.

Description

Notes, if any, of the project.

Clone

Opens the Palette Browser dialog box from which you can select the level inwhich to store the palette file.

RenameLets you rename a palette.
Lets you delete a palette.

DeleteClose

NOTE: It is not recommended to disable the warning message that appears
when you are attempting to delete a palette as this operation cannot be
undone.
Closes the Palette Operations dialog box.

71

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Paste Preset Dialog Box

Paste Preset Dialog Box
When pasting key frames and exposures, you can modify the existing presets to your liking. There are threepresets you can modify: the default presets for both key frames and exposures, key frames only and exposures
only.

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer,drawing files will not be created.
Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures
Add/Remove Exposure to a drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with thesame name do not already exist in the destination.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.
Enforce Key Exposure

If there are key exposures that exist on copied drawings, they are preserved
when pasting. No key exposures are added. This is the default behavior when
pasting.

Fill Gap with Previous
Drawing

Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timeline view with the previous drawing.

Fill to Next Key
Exposure

Fills selected area till the next key exposure.

Keyframes
Motion: Copies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the newframe.
Add/Remove
Keyframes

Velocity: Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the newframe.
Rotation: Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the newframe.
Scale: Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.

72Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Skew: Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.
Force Keyframes at Function's Beginning and End: Adds a keyframe to thebeginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing the source function.

73

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Paste Special Dialog Box

Paste Special Dialog Box
The Paste Special dialog box lets you determine how templates and symbols are imported in the Timeline view.
When you import a template in the Timeline view, all layers are created as well as drawings and keyframes. You
can choose to import only the keyframes without the drawings or import only the drawings that are not already inyour layers. You can adjust the behaviour using the Paste Special dialog box.When you import a symbol in yourscene, its full length is exposed by default. If you import a symbol in the Timeline view’s left side, all the frames
will be exposed. However, if you import it into an existing layer, you can use the Paste Special dialog box toadjust the import behaviour to fit your requirements.Once you set the parameters, Harmony will reuse them eachtime you import a symbol in the Timeline view’s right side until you set new parameters.
How to access the Paste Special dialog box
1. In the Library view, select the symbol or template to import.
2. Press Ctrl + B (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + B (Mac OS X) and drag the selection to the Timeline view.

NOTE: Drop the selection in the Timeline view before releasing the keyboard shortcut key.

The Paste Special dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Drawings
Do Nothing

Does not create or overwrite drawings.

Update Drawing Pivot

Revises the drawing pivot in the destination to use the same drawing pivot as
the first drawing in the template. If you have a range of drawings selected in thedestination, the pivot points of all selected drawings will be updated.

74Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Never create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, drawing files will not be created.
Only create drawing files when they do not exist: When adding exposures
to a drawing layer, new drawings will be created only when drawings with thesame name do not already exist in the destination.
Replace existing drawings. Create drawing files when they do not exist:
Replace drawings with the same names to update a scene with new modified
drawings and preserve the animation.

Add/Remove Exposure

Tip: If you don't want to lose the existing animation when pastinga template, such as when placing new drawings after the
animation, then delete the template's animation. It will still haveupdated the drawings but not override the existing animation.
Always create drawing files: When adding exposures to a drawing layer, newdrawings will always be created. If drawing files with the same name alreadyexist, Harmony will create a new name for the drawing.
Enforce Key Exposure: If there are key exposures that exist on copied drawings, they are preserved when pasting. No key exposures are added. This is
the default behavior when pasting.
Fill Gap with Previous Drawing: Fills selected area in the Xsheet or Timelineview with the previous drawing.
Fill to Next Key Exposure: Fills selected area till the next key exposure.
Paste all frames of the symbol (full movie): When enabled, the Paste Special command exposes all the symbol's frames instead of only the first one.

Symbols
Copy symbols if they
do not exist

This is the default setting for this operation and will prevent Symbols in an
Action template from being copied.

Duplicate symbols

Creates a duplicate of the symbol instead of linking the Symbol instance to theoriginal one. The new Symbol is created in the Library.

Paste all Frames of thesymbol (full movie)

When enabled, the Paste Special command exposes all the symbol's frames
instead of only the first one.

Add Remove/Keyframes
MotionCopies the properties of the selected motion keyframe to the new frame.

Velocity

Copies the properties of the selected velocity keyframe to the new frame.

Rotation

Copies the properties of the selected rotation keyframe to the new frame.

Scale

Copies the properties of the selected scale keyframe to the new frame.

Skew

Copies the properties of the selected skew keyframe to the new frame.

Force Keyframes at
Function's Beginningand EndAdds a keyframe to the beginning and end of the pasted function, reproducing
the source function.

Offset Keyframes

When pasting functions, offsets keyframes from the function's last frame
value by the values in the pasted function. This will continue the progression ofa function instead of repeating the values.

75Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Paste Special Dialog Box

Options
Do nothing: Does not create, overwrite, merge or link palettes.
Reuse palettes. Copy palettes if they do not exist: Palettes in thedestination drawings are left as they are.
Copy and overwrite existing palettes: Overwrites destination palettes withthe palettes from the source drawings.
Copy and create new palette files: Creates new palette files, placing themat the same relative environment and scene level as the source. If the palettes
in the templates were stored at the environment level of the source scene, thepaste operation will place the palettes in the environment level of thedestination scene.
Copy and create new palette files in element folder: Creates new palettefiles in the element folders of the destination scene, rather than in the same
relative job or environment.
Palettes

Copy palette and merge colours. Add new colours only: Adds new colours
to the destination palettes and ignores colours that are the same in the two
palettes.
Copy palettes and update existing colours: Adds new colours to thedestination palette and updates duplicate colours in the destination with colour
values from the source.
Link to original palettes (colour model): Links the colour palettes in thedestination scene to the palettes in the source. Use this to link drawings to thepalettes in a colour model.
Copy scene palettes and merge colours. Add new colours only: Adds
new colours to the destination scene palettes and ignores colours that are thesame in the two palettes.
Copy scene palettes and update existing colours: Adds new colours to thedestination scene palette and updates duplicate colours in the destination withthe colour values from the source.
Normal (forward):Pastes your selection as is, starting with the first cell andending with the last.
Reverse: Pastes your selection in reverse, starting with the last cell and ending with the first.

CyclesForward > Reverse:Pastes your selection as a yo-yo, starting with the firstcell, going to the last one and ending with the first cell.
Reverse > Forward: Pastes your selection as a reverse yo-yo, starting withthe last cell, going to the first one and ending with the last cell.
Nodes

Create New Columns: A new column is created when you copy and paste
nodes from the layer in the Timeline view. If the layers are linked to function
curves, the function curves, drawings and timing will be duplicated.

Elements

Reuse existing elements: Lets you paste existing elements without creating
new ones. This should be used only when pasting within versions of the same
scene.

76

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Validation

Match by Node/Layer Name: When pasting a template with a hierarchy onto
another hierarchy, this option looks to match the pasting elements with thesame layer or node name, rather than the same hierarchical structure. Thismeans that even if the two hierarchies are different, a new pose of acharacter's body part will still be pasted on the correct body part layer, as longas both layers are named the same.

77

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Pose Copier Dialog Box

Pose Copier Dialog Box
The pose copier contains many buttons and other information to facilitate the insertion of poses in the animation.

Parameter

Description

Preview Window

Based on master template's generated thumbnails, previews currently selected frames.

UPD

Updates the template with the newly selected template.

RST

Reset the template's cache, getting rid of default destination information andexcluded modules.

Template Name

Name of the currently selected template.

Vertical Slider (SLV)

Linked to the slv- node of the node system.

Horizontal Slider 1 (SLH)

Linked to the slh- node of the node system. Default slider for the pose copier
if no guide layers are created.

Horizontal Slider 2 (SLX)

Linked to the slx- node of the node system.

Fill to Next Key Exposure

Having this option checked will automatically extend the exposure of thepasted frame up to the next key.

Use Default Destination Module

When enabled, the pasted keys will automatically refer to the destination
defined in the option Set Default Destination Module.

Paste by Layer Name

When this option is checked the pasted layers will look for the individual78Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

layer name instead of matching the hierarchy of the template.
Set Default Destination Module

Instead of selecting the destination every time, the layer set as default destination will automatically paste the keys onto those layers.

Find

This will center on the default destination in the timeline.

Paste

Paste the current position of the pose copier onto the destination.

VerticalCurrently selected frame on the vertical slider. (based on frame name in slvnode)

Horizontal 1

Currently selected frame on the horizontal slider 1. (based on frame name inslh-node)

Horizontal 2

Currently selected frame on the horizontal slider 2. (based on frame name inslx-node)

Frame

Frame number of the selected frame within the master template.

79

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Preferences Dialog Box

Preferences Dialog Box
The Preferences dialog box lets you adjust preferences to suit your work style, allowing you to work more
efficiently.

NOTE: To learn more about the individual preferences, refer to the Preferences guide.

NOTE: Some preferences require you to exit and restart the application, or close a view and reopen it.

How to access the Preferences dialog box
Do one of the following:lSelect Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or Harmony Advanced > Preferences (Mac OS X).

lPress Ctrl + U (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + U (Mac OS X).

80

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Remove Dirt Dialog Box
The Remove Dirt dialog box lets you select small dots and hairs on a drawing for removal.

When paper drawings are passed through a scanner, there can be some hair and dirt scattered across them. Theselines and dots need to be cleaned. Harmony provides different tools to help get rid of them quickly.
How to access the Remove Dirt dialog box
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Drawing > Clean Up > Remove Dirt.

l

From the Camera or Drawing View menu, select Drawing > Clean Up > Remove Dirt.

l

Press Shift + D.

Parameter

Description
Lets you adjust the amount of detail removed from the layer.

SliderRaising the Remove Dirt level will select bigger dots. When selecting larger dots,
be careful not to lose small details like pupils and nostrils. Once you have chosen
the level, you can apply it to the current drawing or the entire animation sequence.
This is a quick way to get rid of most dirt and dust.
During this process, the dirt that will be removed is highlighted in red.

Apply to all drawings

Applies the operation to all drawings in the layer.

81

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Remove Hair Dialog Box

Remove Hair Dialog Box
The Remove Hair dialog box lets you remove any small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very thicklines or filled zones. Increasing the Remove Hair level value will select larger strokes for removal from thedrawing.

When paper drawings are passed through a scanner, there can be some hair and dirt scattered across them.
These lines and dots need to be cleaned. Harmony provides different tools to help get rid of them quickly.
How to access the Remove Hair dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select the drawing containing the drawing to clean.
2. From the top menu, select View > Show > Show Strokes to display the invisible lines or press K.
3. In the top menu, select Drawing > Clean Up > Remove Hair.
Parameter

Description

SliderLets you adjust the number of length of hairs selected.

Apply to all drawings

Applies the operation to all drawings in the layer.

82

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Save Dialog Box
The Save dialog box lets you save a scene for the first time in Harmony Server.

How to access the Save dialog Box
1. Make sure you have the necessary rights to save the current scene version. If you do not, you can acquire
the rights by selecting File > Rights to Modify Scene Version or Rights to Modify Scene.
2. From the top menu, select File > Save or press Ctrl + S (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + S (Mac OS X).
When saving the scene for the first time, the Save dialog box opens, prompting you to name the version.

Parameter

Description

This Version

Lets you enter a relevant name for the current version.

New Version

Lets you enter a relevant name to save your scene as a new version. Note thatthe drawing files are shared between versions. Only a new version of the timing,
Xsheet, and Node view are saved (information contained in the xstage file).

Overwrite Existing Version

Allows you to save the current state of your scene over an existing scene version.

Description

Enter a short description of the current version.

Mark as Current

After selecting an existing version of your scene, you can make that version thecurrent one that will open by default.

83

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Scene Settings Dialog Box

Scene Settings Dialog Box
The Scene Settings dialog box lets you parameters for your scene.
When you created your new scene, you set up the resolution and the alignment. However, if you want to changethese initial settings later, you can do it using the Scene Settings dialog box. The different Scene Settings options
are separated into four tabs.

How to access the Scene Settings dialog box
1. Select Scene > Scene Settings.
The Scene Settings dialog box opens.

Resolution Tab
Parameter

Description
You can select your project’s resolution (camera frame size) from this preset
list.

‣ HDTV: High definition television delivers a higher quality image than
Resolution Presets

standard television (4:3) does, because it has a greater number of linesof resolution. To take advantage of the superior quality your output
device must be compatible with HDTV technology to make thisresolution setting useful.

‣ HDTV_Vertical: The "vertical resolution" of HDTV_Vertical refers to
how the images will be aligned in relation to the actual scene frame(default 4:3 grid). Note that the camera resolution and the scene frame
are not the same. When working with 12 or 16 field drawing grids, the84Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

grid is a different aspect ratio from the camera frame. When you fit
vertically, you fit the images with the top and bottom of the scene grid.

‣ film-1.33: Use this resolution setting for the academy film format that
conforms to the standard 4:3 aspect ratio.

‣ film-1.66: Use this resolution setting for the widescreen film format that
conforms to the 16:9 aspect ratio.

‣ film-1.66_Vertical: This is essentially the same as film-1.66. Refers to
how the drawing is fit into the scene frame. When working with 12 or 16
field drawing grids, the grid is a different aspect ratio from the camera
frame. When you fit vertically, you fit the images with the top andbottom of the scene frame.

‣ NTSC: This is the standard analogue television broadcasting systemused in North America and conforms to the North American standards
on how rectangular pixels are displayed for computer and televisionscreens.

‣ PAL: This resolution works best with the European format for televisionand computer screens, as the rectangular pixels are displayed at adifferent orientation.

‣ Low: This format is ideal for videos destined for the web, where sizeand fast download of a video file might take precedence over quality.

‣ Cloud Preview: This is the resolution used by Web Control Center tocreate its preview.
Selected Resolution Preset

Displays the selected resolution preset.
Click the Save Resolution button after you define your new resolution to save it
as a preset.
If you are working in Harmony Server, you will be prompter a dialog box asking
you to name the new resolution as well as the level at which you want to savethe resolution,conf file.

Save Resolution Setting

Displays the pixel dimensions for your project resolution.
Pixel Dimensions

Aspect Ratio

If you decide to type in the pixel dimensions, or use the up and down arrows tochange the pixel increments, you will have to save your custom selection inorder to save it as a new preset. It will then appear in the resolution selection
list. It doesn't modify the current resolution preset.
Displays the ratio between the horizontal and vertical dimensions of thecamera framing. Each resolution setting has a preset aspect ratio that cannot
be changed.

85

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Frame per second

Scene Settings Dialog Box

Sets the frame rate for your project. The higher the frame rate, for example 30
fps, the faster the animation will play. The lower the frame rate, for example 12
fps, the slower your animation will play. Avoid going under 12 frames per
second as your animation will have a choppy playback. The human eye
requires a minimum of 12 frames per second to perceive a fluid animation.
Use these options to define the FOV (field of view) of the camera (angle of thecamera cone) and how the drawing elements (and drawing grid) align to thescene grid. The drawing grid is always scaled proportionally to a 4:3 ratio(unless you change the scene alignment), therefore changing the Field of View
setting may not show a visible difference if your project resolution is also 4:3,
such as NTSC.
l

Horizontal Fit: The camera resolution is set to fit the left and rightedges of the scene grid.

Field of Viewl

Vertical Fit: The camera resolution is set to fit the top and bottom edgesof the scene grid.

Alignment Tab

86

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Parameter

Description
The Alignment presets give you two preset options:‣ 4:3 12 Fields: Defines the units of your project to have a 4:3 ratio and sets
Alignment

up 12 of these units to run both vertically and horizontally in four cardinalquarters (NW, NE, SW, SE). This Alignment preset is visible in the FOV
and drawing grids.

‣ Square 12 Fields: Defines the units of your project to have a 1:1 orsquare ratio and sets up 12 units to run both vertically and horizontally infour cardinal quarters (NW, NE, SW, SE). This Alignment preset is NOT
visible in the FOV and drawing grids.
In the Units Aspect Ratio fields, enter the aspect ratio of the grid you will use. The
aspect ratio describes the shape of the grid unit. A square grid unit would have theratio 1:1, whereas a grid unit of aspect ratio 4:3 is a unit with one side 1.33 times
as big as the other side.

Units Aspect Ratio

If the aspect ratio you want to use is 1:1, enter 1 in the Left/Right field (X-axis)
and 1 in the Up/Down field (Y-axis). The default Aspect Ratio is set to 4:3 as it is
the one used by traditional animators, who are accustomed to working with thegrid system described above.
In the Number of Units fields, enter the number of horizontal, vertical and depth
units for your scene’s grid.

Number of Units

Animators who prefer to work traditionally will understand the default setting of 24
units horizontal by 24 units vertical as it, once again, corresponds to the grid
above. Twelve is a common setting for the field depth.
Those who prefer to work in pixels should enter the pixel dimensions (3) of theirproject. This way if you want to move something over 600 pixels you just need totype in 600 units.

Coordinates at Centre

In the Coordinates at Centre, you can enter a new coordinate for the centre ofyour scene.

87Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Scene Settings Dialog Box

By default, the (0,0) centre is set in the middle of the grid as shown in the grid
above. If you want to change the centre of your grid, for example to the upper left
corner, you would enter (-12, 12), -12 units across and 12 units up. That is ofcourse unless you changed the number of units to match the pixel dimensions ofyour scene. Then you would enter negative half the width and positive half theheight.
Save

Saves your current Alignment settings and be able to select them later from thelist.

NOTE: If you change your scene‘s alignment from 4:3 12 Fields to Square 12 Fields part way though your project, you may find that the animation grid becomes offset. To correct this, choose the following setting fromthe Layer Properties panel‘s Advanced tab: Alignment > Alignment Rule > Centre First Page.

Bitmap Resolution Tab
Parameter

Description

Scene Resolution

This is the scene resolution preset name and size in pixels.

Width

This is the width of the resolution for the bitmap that will be created. This is not
the actual size of the bitmap. TVG drawings (Toon Boom drawing native
format) have an infinite size. Bitmap TVGs are composed of small tiles. Therefore it does not mean that because you have artwork at the four corners of yourcamera frame or even quite far outside of your drawing that your bitmap image
will be very large and heavy. By default, it is set to the same width as thescene resolution.

HeightThis is the height of the resolution for the bitmap that will be created. By
default, it is set to the same height as the scene resolution.

Resolution Factor

This is the size of the bitmap resolution in relation to the scene resolution. If
you increase the percentage, the width and height fields will increase accordingly. If you plan to animate the camera and zoom into your background, youwill need to set a higher resolution so that the smaller area in which you willzoom will be 100% of the scene resolution.

88Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Scripts Manager Dialog Box
The Scripts Manager dialog box lets you link a script to a toolbar button for quick and easy access. Once you selecta script, you can add it to the toolbar, load a custom icon and add a tooltip.

How to access the Scripts Manager Dialog Box
1. In the Scripting toolbar, click the Manage Scripts

button.

The Scripts Manager dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Files

A list of the available JavaScript files.

Functions

A list of the available functions for the selected script.

In Toolbar

Adds the selected script to the toolbar.

ExecuteRuns the script you selected. Press Esc to interrupt the execution of the script.

Customize Icon

Lets you load a custom icon for the function. You can browse for a *.png, *.jpg
or *.xpm file.

Customize Tooltip

Lets you type in a tooltip for the function. When you hover over the button in the
toolbar, your tooltip will appear.

89

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Select Colour Dialog Box

Select Colour Dialog Box
The Select Colour dialog box lets you set the colour of layers and columns. Using colours for layers and columns
helps to differentiate them visually, making them easy to identify. The colours you choose will be reflected in the
Node view.
You can select a colour by choosing from a basic set of colours, using the colour wheel or by specifying the HSV
or RGB values. Once you have selected a colour, you can adjust its intensity and save it as a custom colour thatyou can reuse.

How to access the Select Colour dialog box in the Timeline view
1. In the Timeline view, click the Change Track Colour

button of the layer you want to modify.

The Select Colour dialog box opens.
How to access the Select Colour dialog box in the Xsheet view
1. In the Xsheet view, select one or more columns to modify.
2. Right-click on the column’s header and select Colour > Change Columns Colour.
The Select Colour dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Basic colours

A basic set of colours to choose from.

Custom colours

Displays the custom colours you previously stored using the Add to Custom
Colours button.

Add to custom colours

Lets you add the selected colour to the Custom colours list above.

Colour wheel

Lets you select a colour by dragging the T-shaped pointer.

90

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Value slider

Once you select a colour, you can drag the slider to change the intensity andsee it previewed in the Colour Preview window below..

Colour Preview

Displays the colour you are currently selecting. To apply the colour, click OK.

Hue, Saturation, Value

Lets you set the hue (colour), saturation (amount of colour) and brightness(value) of the colour.

Red, Green, Blue

Lets you set the red, green and blue values.

91Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Selection Presets Dialog Box

Selection Presets Dialog Box
As you're animating, you might find that you are constantly selecting the same pegs, drawing layers, bezier
points on a deformation envelope, part of a character rig, etc. You can create a preset that automatically selects
any defined element or group of elements.

How to access the Selection Presets dialog box

1. Add the Scripting toolbar to your interface:lll

Go to the top menu and select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.
Right-click on the empty space near the top of the interface and from the quick-access menu selecting Scripting.
Right-click on the empty space near the top of a view and from the quick-access menu selecting
Scripting.

2. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the Manage Scripts

button to open the Scripts Manager window.

3. In the Scripts Manager, in the Files section, select the file TB_SelectionPreset.js.
The functions associated with that file appear in the Functions section.
4. In the Functions section, select TB_SelectionPreset.
The Add script to toolbar

button becomes active.

92

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

5. Click on the Add script to toolbar
The TB_SelectionPreset script

button.
button is added to the Scripting toolbar.

6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Scripting toolbar, click on the TB_SelectionPreset

button.

The Selection Presets window opens.
Parameter

Description

RefreshRemoves any highlighted zones from the Group column.

Add Selection Preset

Opens the Save Selection As Preset dialog box. After entering a name for the
new preset and clicking OK, a new Selection Preset is added to the Selection
Presets list. Note: before clicking on the Add button, make a selection in yourscene of the elements for which you wish to create a Selection Preset.

Delete Selection Preset

Deletes the selected Selection Preset from the list.

Group

Double-click in this area, next to the Selection Preset you wish to use, to selectthe elements defined by the preset.

Name

Displays the name of the preset.

Apply to Selection

Selects the elements defined by the selected preset from the Name list.

Close

Closes the Selection Presets window.

93Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Sequence Fill Dialog Box

Sequence Fill Dialog Box
The Sequence Fill dialog box lets you Lets you create a numbered sequence over a selection. The sequence canbe forward, backward, single, double or higher increment, as a cycle, and so on. The selection can be over one
cell or a cell range in one column or more or an entire column or many entire columns.

How to access the Sequence Fill dialog box
1. In the Timeline or Xsheet view, select a cell range.

2. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Animation > Cell > Sequence Fill.

l

In the Timeline view, right-click and select Exposure > Sequence Fill.

ll

In the Xsheet toolbar, click the Sequence Fillbar to display it).

button (you may have to customize the tool-

Press Ctrl + M (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + M (Mac OS X)).

The Sequence Fill dialog box opens.

94Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Starting Value

The first number in the sequence.

Increment

Lets you type the number by which the drawing number will increase from frame
to frame. For example, an increment of 1 gives you: 1-2-3-4; an increment of 2
gives you: 1-3-5-7; and -2 gives you this: 8-6-4-2.

Hold

The exposure holding value.

Cycle

Enable this option to cycle the values and enter the number of cycles in the Cycle
field.

End Frame

Enable this option to stop the fill at a specific frame within the selection. Indicate
the frame number in the End Frame field.

Padding

Enable this option to add a 0 padding before the drawing name. In the Padding
field, enter as many hash symbols (#) as digit you want in your drawing name,including the value itself.

Add Key Exposure After

Inserts a key exposure on the frame following the last cell of the new fill selection.

95

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box

Set Ease for Multiple Parameters Dialog Box
The Edit Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box lets you apply ease to multiple functions and keyframes.
You can display the function curve and modify the Bezier or Ease curve.

How to access the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box
1. In the Timeline view, select a keyframe on one or more layers.

2. Do one of the following:l

In the Timeline view, right-click and select Set Ease For Multiple Parameters.

l

In the Timeline toolbar, click the Set Ease For Multiple Parameters

button.

The Set Ease For Multiple Parameters dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Filters
Motion: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Position X, Position Y,
Position Z and 3D Path functions.
Rotation: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Angle functions.
MotionScale: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Scale functions.
Skew: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Skew functions.
Morphing: Applies the easing parameters to the selected Morphing Velocity
functions. Note that it applies to the Morphing velocity function found in theLayer Properties window, not the basic morphing ease in the Tool Properties
view.

96

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Other: Applies the easing parameters to all the other the selected functions,such as all functions created to animate effect parameters.
Left and Right Time Ratio

Lets you type the percentage value corresponding to the length of time youwant the easing to last. Stay between 0% and 100%. If you go beyond 100%,
your motion will overshoot.

Left and Right Value Ratio

Lets you type the percentage value of how strong you want the easing out tobe. Stay between 0% and 100%. If you go beyond 100%, your motion willovershoot.

Apply/Previous

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes and then selects theprevious keyframe in the timeline.

Apply

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes.

Apply/Next

Applies the easing parameters to the selected keyframes and then selects thenext keyframe in the timeline.

Close

Close the dialog box. If you did not apply the modifications, they will becancelled.

97Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Show Hidden Columns Dialog Box

Show Hidden Columns Dialog Box
The Show Hidden Columns dialog box lets you display all the columns contained in the exposure sheet. It can beused to hide individual columns.

How to access the Show Hidden Columns dialog box
1. In the Xsheet view, do one of the following:lClick the thick grey line that represents a hidden column.

lRight-click on the column header and select Show Hidden Columns.

lPress Alt + Shift + H.

The Show Hidden Columns dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Show

Lets you select the hiddens columns to display in the Xsheet view.

Name

Name of the drawing.

98Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Type

Indicates the column type such as column, timing, and expression.

Check

Selects all columns.

Uncheck

Deselects all selected columns.

99

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Sound Settings Dialog Box

Sound Settings Dialog Box
The Sound Settings dialog box lets you set the compression settings for the movie you will export.

How to access the Sound Settings Dialog Box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
2. In the Export to QuickTime Movie dialog box that opens, click Movie Options.
3. In the Movie Setting dialog box that opens, click Settings in the Sound section.

Parameter

Description

Compressor

Lets you select a compression type. The default setting is None. This exports
your audio as is without performing any lossy compression or conversion,preserving its fidelity. Other compressors can be used if you need your movie'saudio track to be exported in a specific format, or if disk space or download
speed is critical, but they may impact the quality of your movie's soundtracknegatively.

Rate

Lets you select the audio rate at which to export. It is best to export your audio
at a rate that matches the rate of your original sound files. For example, if yourfile has an audio sample rate of 48 kHz and you choose a conversion rate of
22.05 kHz, the sound will play at the same speed, but higher frequencies will
be missing, making it sound muffled. For reference, the standard sound quality
is 44.1 kHz for films, and 48 kHz for DVD. Lower rates are liable to impact thequality of your movie's soundtrack negatively, but they can be useful if disk
space or download speed is critical.

Size

Lets you select the encoding size. Also known as Bit Depth, this determines
the amount of precision used to record each wavelength in the soundtrack. The
standard size is 16-bit. If you choose 8-bit, the amount of disk space yoursound track requires is halved, but the audio will sound muffled.

Use

Lets you decide whether to use the Mono or Stereo channel mode. Stereo
sound has a separate sound track for the left and the right speakers, allowing
to make the origin of each sound realistically match the origin of their corresponding action. If you choose Mono, your sound track may use less disk
space, but both the left and right channels will be merged into a single track.

100Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box
The Standard Video Compression Settings dialog box lets you set the compression settings for the movie you will
export.

How to access the Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box
1. From the top menu, select File > Export > Movie.
2. In the Export to QuickTime Movie dialog box that opens, click Movie Options.
3. In the Movie Setting dialog box that opens, click Settings in the Video section.

Parameter

Description

Compression Type

Lets you select a codec. The availability of certain compression settings depends
on the Compression Type selected. For example, Animation is the default
compression type and as a result the Data Rate option is greyed out.

MotionFrame Rate

Lets you select a frame rate. By default, it is set to match the frames-per-second(fps) of your Harmony project. If you choose a lower frame rate, your export
playback will be faster than your actual project. The reverse is also true for ahigher frame rate.
Automatic:
Every: Inserts keyframes. This is the option is recommended by QuickTime. For
further details, refer to the QuickTime documentation.

Key Frames

All:
Frame Rendering:
Frames: Lets you set the number of keyframes to insert.
101

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Standard Video Compression Settings Dialog Box

Compressor
Depth

Lets you select a depth based on your movie’s needs. For example, Millions ofColours+ houses an alpha channel.

Quality

Lets you choose a quality setting. The higher the quality of the export, the larger
the resulting file.

Data Rate
Automatic: Lets the system automatically select the most optimal bit rate.
Date Rate

Restrict To: Lets you enter a rate to save space and allow for faster downloading
at a cost to the quality of the export.
Optimized For: Lets you select the intended viewing method.

Preview

Displays a preview of the movie to be exported.

102Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Timeline Scene Marker Dialog Box
The Timeline Scene Marker dialog box lets you create and manage scene markers in the Timeline view. Scene
markers are visual indicators displayed at the top of the Timeline view in the frame counter area. You can use it todenote anything relevant to your work. You can indicate the frames you want to clean up, a change in action, an
impact, or where you intend to apply an effect. You can also add a note to a scene marker, which is displayed when
you hover over the scene marker.
How to access the Timeline Scene Marker dialog box
1. In the frame counter area of the Timeline view, do one of the following:‣

Drag to select the frame range to mark.

‣

Right-click and select Scene Markers > Mark Current Frame.

Parameter

Description

Colour swatch

Opens the Mark Colour dialog box where you can select a colour for the scene
marker.

Note (Tooltip)

Lets you type in a name for your scene marker. Making the name meaningful will
help you to quickly identify scene markers especially when there are many ofthem in the frame counter area of the Timeline view.

103Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box

Tint Offset/Blend Dialog Box
You can offset, blend, or mix the colours in a colour palette using the sliders and increasing the Amount value.

How to access the Tint Offset/Blend dialog box
1. From the Colour View menu, select Palettes > Tint Panel or right-click and select Tint Panel.
The Blend/Offset Tint panel opens.

Parameter

Description

OffsetOffsets the selected colours by the adjustments made using the HSB and
RGB sliders. Use the Amount slider to adjust the degree of offset. Use theAlpha slider to adjust the opacity of the selected colour.

Blend

Blends the selected colours with the colour swatch in the top-right corner. Use
the Amount slider to adjust the degree of blend. A blend of 100% turns theselected colours into the same colour as the swatch. Adjusting the HSB and
RGB sliders affect the swatch colour, which in turn affects the selected colours on the left. Use the Alpha slider to adjust the opacity of the swatch.

Mixer

Select a Base and Tint colour to form a third colour swatch. Use the slider justbeneath to mix the Base and Tint colours by different amounts. This will affectthe mixed swatch whether it is selected or not. Select either the Tint or Baseswatch and use the HSB and RGB sliders to adjust its colour. This will affectthe mixed swatch colour, which in turn affects the selected colours on the left.

104Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Toolbar Manager Dialog Box
The Toolbar Manager dialog box lets you customize the toolbar in any of the views. You can add your favourite tools
to a toolbar for an efficient workflow.

How to access the Toolbar Manager dialog box
1. Right-click on a toolbar in any view and select Customize. Note that the menu will not appear if you rightclick on a disabled icon.

Parameter

Description

Available Tools

Displays the complete list of tools available for customizing a toolbar.

Toolbar

Displays a list of the tools currently available on the toolbar.

Default

Restores the toolbar with its default items.

105

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box
The Vectorization Parameters dialog box lets you vectorize pencil drawings, along with any red, blue or green
pencil marks you may have used to indicate highlights and shadows. The drawing will be vectorized into pure red,
blue, green and black (RGB values), while creating colour art zones wherever lines connect. After painting in yourtones and highlights, change your pure RGB colours to transparent (0 Alpha) in the Colour Picker window and
watch the indicator colour zone lines disappear.

How to open the Vectorization Parameters dialog box
1. From the top menu, select File > Import > From Scanner.
You can also open it from any other import option that allows you to customize the vectorization parameters (i.e. from the scanner).
2. In the Scan Drawings window, do the following:l

In the Layer section, decide on the layer options.

l

In the Import Options section, select the Convert to Toon Boom Vector Drawing optionlClick Preview.

3. In the Vectorization section, click the Vectorization Parameters

Options Tab
106

button.

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

The Options tab contains the main vectorization settings. More settings are available in the Help tab.

Parameter

Description

Input

The input filters are applied to the bitmap image before it is vectorized.
One Pass

One threshold value is applied to both the Line and Colour Art. For drawings with
distinct vector-style lines of mattes, you only need one pass.

Two Passes

Applies a different threshold value to each layer. For greyscale drawings, you
may want to perform the vectorization process twice to apply different thresholdvalues to the Line and Colour Art layers.

Threshold

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Lineand Colour Art layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0%
is white and 100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

Expand Bitmap

Lets you enter a value to scale the bitmap to detect small variations in the line.
Use this option if you scanned a greyscale image and want to preserve small
variations in the texture to apply to the line art.

Jag Filter

Lets you enter a value to scale back the bitmap to remove some of the line’sroughness. This is useless when you have a drawing that appears quite rough;the Jag filter will eliminate excess strokes in the final drawing.

Line Art Threshold (%)

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Line Art
layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0% is white and100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

Colour Art Threshold(%)

Determines which values in the scanned image are considered part of the Colour
Art layer and what will be eliminated from the vectorized drawing; 0% is white and100% is black. The threshold is between these two values.

OutputThe output filters are applied during the vectorization process.
No Colour Art

Does not generate filling zones in the Colour Art layer.

No Texture

Does not generate texture in the Line Art layer in the final images. Select thisoption to create solid lines in the final line art.

Generate Matte in
Underlay Layer

Creates an opaque zone behind your drawing’s lines to avoid seeing through thelayers.

Colour as Texture

Converts colour values into a texture layer.

Optical Registration

The optical registration options are used to automatically align drawings based on107Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

the position of the peg holes on the animation paper. The peg holes must appear
in the scanned drawings for the optical registration to work.
DPI

Lets you enter the dots-per-inch value of your image. You must enter the samevalue as the DPI used to scan the image.

Peg Side

Lets you select the position of the peg holes on your drawings. Identify whether
they are on the top, bottom, left or right.
Determines how exact the location of the peg holes must be for the software torecognize them. There are two values to choose from:

Strictness

Strict: The peg holes must be in a tightly defined area to be recognized.
Loose: The peg holes can be recognized somewhere in a larger area. This is therecommended setting.

Field Chart
Post Processing

Lets you indicate the size of the animation paper, 12 or 16.
The Post Processing filters are applied to the final vector images.

Remove Holes

Removes holes of a specified value that might make painting difficult.

Remove Dirt

Removes stray marks and dirt of a specified value. Try a value around 500.

Remove Hair Size

Removes small strokes that have no line art.

Remove Hair: Number
of Passes

The number of times the drawing will be analyzed to identify hair marks.

Miscellaneous
Close Gaps

Closes gaps in the Colour Art so you can paint it.

Smooth Passes for Line The number of times the smoothing operation runs before creating the triangles
Art Before Breaking
that break lines in the drawing. If unnecessary triangles are appearing in the
Triangles
drawing, increase this value.
Smooth Passes for Line The number of times the smoothing operation is performed after the triangles haveArt
been created. This further smooths the line art.
Preview
Show Strokes

Shows the strokes in the Vectorized Image panel.

Stroke Thickness

Shows the size of the strokes.

Help Tab
The Help tab contains the most advanced vectorization settings which you type in the Advanced Option fields atthe bottom of the Vectorization Parameters dialog box.

108Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

File IO Options-file <filename (including extension)> [ options ]-infile <filename (including extension)>; same as -file-outfile <filename>; alternate output file-informat <format>; the input format. Used if reading from stdin-debug; turn on debug mode
-noforce; don't force output if image is inconsistent-version; print version information and quit
-output_version <version>; output files of this version. Valid versions can be: 0 or 604-force_unamed_palette_for_texture; will generate a texture in TVG's internal palette

Registration Options-register <dpi side strictness>; perform optical registration.
•

Side can be one of left, right, top, bottom or l, r, t, b.

•

Strictness can be either loose, strict or l, s.

-register_center_peg_holes; will use only round holes in 16 fields page-rcph; short form of register_center_peg_holes-registration_looseness_factor <factor>; registration looseness factor (default 2.000000)-rlf; short form of registration_looseness_factor-rdebug; output registration debug messages-pegpitch <inch (default 8.000000)>; distance between peg bars
-threshr < (default 0.500000)>; threshold for optical registration; range 0.0 to 1.0-rmargin <inch (default 1)>; region size where to look for peg bars
-peg_distance_from_center <inch (default 5.25)>; peg distance from centre of the image

109

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box-pdfc; short form of -peg_distance_from_center-out_peg_position <side (default same)>; wanted position of the peg on the drawing.
•

Can be one of right, left, top, bottom (or r, l, t, b) or same.

•

A rotation will be performed if it is different from the side passed to -register.

-output_peg_matrix; output the peg transformation matrix on standard output.
-scanner_calibrate; < (default 1.0000 1.0000) > x and y scale factors to be applied to scanner image.

Filtering Options-pixel <pixel_shape (default '4x3')>; Valid values: 4x3-gap <worldUnits (default 10)>; close gaps up to this big-pencil; generate line art only
-keep_dirt; don't filter out dirt
-thresh <threshold (default 0.2)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-rmv_hairs <worldUnits (default 1)> <passes (default 1)>•

remove hairs of size smaller than "size" in "passes" passes-rmv_holes <area (default 7)>; remove holes smaller than "area"-rmv_dirt <area (default 1)>; remove dirt smaller than "area"•

try values between 100 and 500 for rmv_holes and rmv_dirt. The area is in world units squared-rmv_triangles <worldUnits (default 30.000000)>; remove triangles at "pixels"•

distance from each other. Use -no_break to remove all triangles-no_texture; don't generate textured strokes-color_as_texture; will vectorize the alpha channel and put the RGB colour in a textured colour-noclosegap; disable all gap closing algorithms-no_break; disable the breaking of line art-jag_filter <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap-expand_bitmap <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap-fit_errorc <error (default 1.000000>; fitting error for the colour art-fit_errorl <error (default 1.000000>; fitting error for the line art-smoothl <passes (default 1>; number of smooth passes for line art-smoothc <passes (default 1>; number of smooth passes for colour art-first_smooth <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art before breaking triangles-first_smoothl <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art before breaking triangles-first_smoothc <passes (default 0>; number of smooth passes for line art in colour art pass (needs -2pass)-2pass; specify two sets of parameters; one for line art "l", one for colour art "c"110

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide(-thresh, -rmv_holes and -rmv_dirt will be overridden by -threshl, threshc, -rmv_holesl,-rmv_holesc, -rmv_dirtl and -rmv_dirtc)-threshl <threshold for line art (default 0.5)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-threshc <threshold for color art (default 0.5)>; range 0.0 to 1.0-jag_filterl <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for line art-jag_filterc <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for colour art-expand_bitmapl <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for line art-expand_bitmapc <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for colour art-rmv_holesl <area (default 7)>; remove line art holes smaller than "area"-rmv_holesc <area (default 7)>; remove colour art holes smaller than "area"-rmv_dirtl <area (default 1)>; remove line art dirt smaller than "area"-rmv_dirtc <area (default 1)>; remove colour art dirt smaller than "area"
try values between 100 and 500 for rmv_holesl, rmv_holesc, rmv_dirtl and rmv_dirtc. The values are in world
units squared-margins <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin around bitmap-top_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at top of bitmap-bottom_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at bottom of bitmap-left_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at left of bitmap-right_margin <inch (default 0.25)>; remove margin at right of bitmap-remove_peg_bars; remove the peg bar holes-field_size <fields (default 12 or use value in scan file)>; set the drawing to this field size
-fs; short hand for -field_size-peg_bar_size <inch (default 1)>; the size of the peg bar region-noframe; do not put a frame around the colour art-frame_fields <default -1.000000>; put a frame of the specified dimension around the colour art-downscale_input <default 1>; downscale the raw input by this integer factor-downscale_texture <default 1>; downscale the output texture by this integer factor-buildmatte; generate a matte on underlay for line test
-buildmatte_colourart; generate a matte on colour art for line test

NOTE: -buildmatte and -buildmatte_colourart are mutually exclusive-copystrokes; copy original strokes when building matte.

111Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Vectorization Parameters Dialog Box

Options for bitmap that has no registration information-pixel_margins <inch (default 0)>; remove margin around bitmap-top_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at top of bitmap-bottom_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at bottom of bitmap-left_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at left of bitmap-right_pixel_margin <inch (default 0)>; remove margin at right of bitmap-dpi <(default -1)>; dpi information of input bitmap

RGB Keying Options-rgb; generate separate zones for red, green and blue lines-rgb_alpha <value (default 255)>; generate red, green and blue colour with alpha of this value-no_red; ignore red colour in vectorization-no_green; ignore green colour in vectorization-no_blue; ignore blue colour in vectorization-flatten; flatten the drawing after generating colours-rmv_rgb_dirt <threshold area default 0.0>; remove red, green and blue regions smaller than area
-expand_bitmap_rgb <pixels (default 0>; expand the pixels in the vectorization bitmap for rgb-threshrgb <value> <threshold for rgb vectorization default 0.200000>;-threshsv <saturation threshold default 0.500000> <value threshold default 0.500000>; thresholds on saturationand value to consider a pixel to be grey

Colour Vectorization Options-color_vectorize; perform a colour vectorization-file2 <colour art filename>; specify the colour art bitmap-penstyle <center alpha (0.0-20.0)> <edge alpha (0.0-20.0)> <gamma (0-10)><centre pressure effect (0.0-1.0)><edge pressure effect (0.0-1.0)><texture bitmap downscaling (0.2-20)> <texture bitmap file (valid filename or "" ifno file)>; generate brush texture for the line art-pressure_variation <strategy (0, 1 or 2)> <min pressure (0.0-1.0)> <max pressure (0.0-1.0)> <max variation(0.0-1.0)>; specify a pressure strategy for the centre line.
-blur_radius <pixels (default 0)>; blur the penstyle texture generated-color_contour_smooth_passes <times (default 3)>; perform number of smooth passes on contour before
computing texture-ccsp <times (default 3)>; short for -color_contour_smooth_passes-color_rmv_holesl <world units (default 0.000000)>; remove holes of this size when computing texture-color_fill_holesl <world units (default 0.000000)>; fill holes of this size for colour line art

112

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Bubble Usage (implemented only for colour vectorization's line art)-create_bubbles; add bubbles into the LineArt. Implemented for colour vectorization only
-bubble_gap <value (default 3)>; max number of colour art points between 2 bubbles-bubble_length <value (default 10)>; max number of circles in a bubble-min_radius <value (default 1.5000)>; min radius of a circle in a bubble relative to the line thickness (must be >=1.0)-max_radius <value (default 3.5000)>; max radius of a circle in a bubble relative to the line thickness (must be >=1.0)-uniform_gap; the space between bubbles is constant

4 Colour Vectorization-4colours [key:value] ... [key:value] ; The key value list can be empty. The list of keys is:
rgbdiff:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
dark:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
grey:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
white:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
dirt:value ; dirt area. 200 is a good value
rt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
gt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]
bt:value ; between [0.0-1.0] or [0-255]

NOTE: There must be no space between the colon and the key/value. For example: -4colours rgbdiff:20 dark:20
grey:120 white:250 dirt:200 rt:240 gt:240 bt:240

113

Chapter 2: Dialog Boxes

Versions Dialog Box

Versions Dialog Box
The Versions window lets you delete any unnecessary versions of scenes when working with Harmony Server.
When working with multiple versions of a scene, you may to clean up the database by deleting the ones you nolonger need.
How to access the Versions window
1. Make sure you have the necessary rights. If you do not, select File > Rights to Modify Scene.
2. Select File > Manage Versions.

Parameter

Description

Existing Versions

Displays the different versions of a scene that you can delete.

Description

Displays information about the selected version.
Removes the selected version of a scene.

DeleteIMPORTANT: This operation cannot be undone.

114Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box
The Xsheet Column Width dialog box lets modify the width of a column in the Xsheet view and use it as the default
column width.

How to access the Xsheet Column Width Dialog Box
1. In the Xsheet view, select a column.
2. From the Xsheet menu, select View > Set Columns Width.
The Xsheet Column Width dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Columns Width (pixels)

Lets you set the width of the selected columns (in pixels).

Apply

Applies the value you entered to the selected column without closing the dialog
box.

Set As Default

Uses the value you entered as the default for all columns in the Xsheet.

115Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

116

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Chapter 3: Menus
The Menus section covers all the menu entries available in Harmony. There are several types of menus in Harmony:main menus, quick-access menus and view menus. Menus contains most of the functions available. They may also
have a toolbar button or keyboard shortcut equivalent.
Main Menus

118

Animation Menu

119

Drawing Menu

124

Edit Menu

129

File Menu

132

Help Menu

135

Insert Menu

136

Play Menu

137

Scene Menu

138

View Menu

140

Windows Menu

143

Quick-access Menus

144

View Menus

145

Camera View Menu

146

Colour View Menu

157

Drawing View Menu

159

Function View Menu

167

Library View Menu

169

Model View Menu

171

Perspective View Menu

172

Side View Menu

176

Timeline View Menu

179

Top View Menu

182

Xsheet View Menu

185

117

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

Main Menus
The main menu contain most of the commands. Depending on the view you're working in and the element, somecommands are available and others not. The main menu is always located at the very top of the interface.

On Mac OS X, there is also a Harmony Advanced category that contains the following commands: Preferences,
About, and Quit.
Animation Menu

119

Drawing Menu

124

Edit Menu

129

File Menu

132

Help Menu

135

Insert Menu

136

Play Menu

137

Scene Menu

138

View Menu

140

Windows Menu

143

118

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Animation Menu
The Animation menu lets you access tools, adjust animation timing, set morphing and parameters, lock or unlock
layers, and select elements in the Xsheet and Timeline views.
How to access the Animation menulAt the top of the interface, select Animation.

Command

Description

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale,skew, etc. of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off theAnimate mode to reposition objects for the entire scene. When the
Animate mode is disabled, keyframes are not created when an object's
parameters change.

Stop-Motion Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated
motion between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The
drawing remains still until the playback reaches the next keyframe,then the drawing pops to its new location.

Delete Keyframe

Deletes the selected keyframes.

Tools
Transform

Lets you create a global selection so you can reposition, scale, rotateand skew as one unit, which is useful for cut-out characters.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale
an object up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift toscale the element while maintaining its proportions.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you
move them towards or away from the camera.

Spline Offset

Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying
your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If
your elements were drawn in a different location than the centre of thedrawing area, it will look like the trajectory is not aligned with yourdrawing. Also, if you have several elements attached to one trajectory,
you might want your trajectory to be at a different location to represent
the group's motion better.

Increase Exposure

Adds one more exposure to a selected cell; repeating this action adds
an extra cell each time. This is an efficient way to extend a drawing's
exposure and is always set in Insert mode. Increasing an exposure
pushes the existing exposure forward.

Decrease Exposure

Decreases exposure of a selected cell by one; repeating this action
decreases one exposure adds an extra cell each time. This is an

Cell

119

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

efficient way to shorten a drawing's exposure. Decreasing an exposure
pulls in the existing exposure.
Set Exposure toLets you set the exposure to 1, 2, 3 or a custom exposure.

Extend Exposure

Lets you enter the frame up to which you want to extend the exposure.
You can expose the drawing in the frames and replace the drawings
that were originally there or move the subsequent frames forward intime.

Add Key Exposure

Adds a key exposure to the selected cell.

Remove Key Exposure

Removes only the key exposure (key frames) not all the exposures.
The existing key exposure is replaced by the preceding exposure.

Remove Duplicate Key Exposure

When working with drawings to adjust the timing of a mouth in alipsync, for example, and forcing the use of specific key exposures,
unnecessary key exposures will be created. You can delete these
duplicates without affecting the rest of the drawing. The first drawing of
the selection will be used for the range.

NOTE: Duplicate key exposures may occur when pasting with the
Enforce Key Exposure option selected.

Fill Empty Cells

Lets you fill empty cells to extend the exposure of single frame
drawings to fill the range of empty cells after each one.When creatingdrawings on cells that are not side-by-side, the exposure of the firstdrawing no longer fills automatically. You must select the frame range
where you want your drawings to hold their exposure up to the next
drawing and use the Fill Empty Cells command.

Insert Blank Cell

Adds an empty cell between other cells.

Clear Exposure

Removes the exposure from the selected cell.

Clear Exposure and Pull

Replaces the exposure from the selected cell with exposures that
follow it.

Fill Selection

Lets you fill the same value over an entire selection. The selection canbe over one cell, a cell range in one column, a cell range over manycolumns, an entire column, or many columns. You can use numbers,
words, letters, or any alphanumeric value.

Sequence Fill

Lets you create a numbered sequence over a selection. The sequencecan be forward, backward, single, double or higher increment, as acycle, and so on. The selection can be over one cell or a cell range in
one column or more or an entire column or many entire columns.

Fill Cells Randomly

Lets you fill in random values over a selection. You can give amaximum and a minimum value and create a range for Harmony tochoose the random values from. The selection can be over one cell or acell range in one column or more or an entire column or many entire
columns.

Hold Exposure

Lets you expose a drawing for three, four, or five cells and so on.

Morphing

120

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Create MorphingLets you control a morphing sequence by placing different types ofhints to help Harmony morph the animation the way you want it.

Insert Morphing Key Drawing

Creates a morphing keyframe from a selected morphing frame.

Delete Morphing

Once a cell is selected in a morphing sequence, deletes the entire
sequence between the two keyframes.

Convert Morphing to Drawing

Lets you convert your morphing inbetweens to real drawings you can
edit. This is useful when manually editing a morphing sequence or if
you prefer to have animation timing in double frame (on twos) instead of
single frame (on ones).

Contour Hint

The Contour Hint point is used on the colour fill zone and brush lines; inother words, on Contour vectors. It allows you to control the line
thickness and contour position. Also, if a contour is not animatedcorrectly, you can use hints to correct the animation. For example, if aflag is not waving properly.
When adding a Contour Hint point, make sure to place it far enoughaway from the contour so you can see it snap to the contour.
Contour Hint points are yellow.

Zone Hint

The Zone Hint point is used on a colour zone to control the proximity
rule. The Zone Hint is placed in the centre of the colour zone.
Sometimes a colour zone is not associated with the corresponding one
by default. For example, in a splash animation there are many water
droplets that are the same colour. Harmony automatically morphs thedroplet to the nearest one. This is not always the one you may havepredicted. A Zone Hint will force a colour zone to morph with anotherone.
Zone Hint points are cyan in colour.

Pencil Hint

A Pencil Hint point is used to control a pencil line, also known ascentral vector. It can be used on drawings that were done using thePencil, Polyline, Ellipse, Line and Rectangle tools. Like the Contour
Hint, the Pencil Hint snaps to the central vector. Make sure to place it
far enough away from the line so you will see it snap when you move it.
Pencil Hint points are magenta in colour.

Appearing Point Hint

An Appearing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of an appearing
shape. A shape will appear in the destination drawing when there is nocorresponding shape in the source drawing. If you do not place an
Appearing Point Hint to control the point of appearance, the shape willappear from its centre and expand outwards.
Appearing Point Hint points are violet in colour.

Vanishing Point Hint

A Vanishing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of a vanishing
shape. A shape will vanish from the source drawing when there is nocorresponding shape in the destination drawing. If you do not place a
Vanishing Point Hint to control the point of disappearance, the shapewill vanish into its centre.
Vanishing Point Hint points are green in colour.

121

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

Switch Between Morphing Key
Drawings

Toggles between the two key drawings in your morphing sequence.
This option is useful while setting hints. You can use the default
keyboard shortcut F4 to toggle between your drawings.

Go to First Frame

Goes to the first frame of your morphing sequence.

Go to Previous Frame

Goes to the previous frame of the selected frame in the morphing
sequence.

Go to Next Frame

Goes to the next frame of the selected frame in the morphing
sequence.

Go to Last Frame

Goes to the last frame of your morphing sequence.

Suggest Hints

Automatically sets hint points on key drawings as a help tool. If you're
not sure where to set hints, you can use this option. It will set the main
hints which you can then fine tune.

Hide Hints

Temporarily hides the hint points from the key drawings. Use thisoption when you have a series of hint points hiding some lines you
would like to see.

Lip-Sync
Change Mouth Shape toLets you change the mouth shape to one of the following: A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, X.

Auto Lip-Sync Detection

Generates a sound detection for lip-sync.

Map Lip-Sync

Automatically maps drawings in an element to the mouth chart you
have generated for a sound. This can save time when you are lipsynching a voice track.

Flip Horizontal

Flips the selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the selection vertically.

Flip Scale X

Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal and verticalaxes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on
your drawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original Xaxis of the layer and flips the element following it.

Flip Scale Y

Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element following it.

Flip

Linear Motion

Switches between a linear and curved corner.

Lock in Time

Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it
freely as other points are being added, moved, or adjusted (control
point).

No Z Dragging

Keeps the Z value constant when you drag a character using theTransform or Translate tool.

Substitute Drawing Previous

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by theprevious drawing.

Substitute Drawing Next

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next
drawing.

122

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Go to Previous Keyframe

Goes to the previous keyframe.

Go to Next Keyframe

Goes to the next keyframe.

Select Previous Keyframe /Point

Select the previous keyframe/point.

Select Next Keyframe /Point

Select the next keyframe/point.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg elementin the Timeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in
the Timeline view.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in theTimeline view.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in theTimeline view.

Lock
Lock

Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.

UnlockUnlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.

Lock All

Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.

Unlock All

Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.

Lock All Others

Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation
angle will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all thetransformation values will be reset.

Reset All

Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer.
Your keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting
value. All transformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position.
This is useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often
have a particular Z ordering for the different views of a character. Youmight want to reset the transformation, but not necessarily the Z
position.

123

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

Drawing Menu
The Drawing menu lets you access many tools related to drawing, painting, dirt removal, optimizing strokes, andmore.
How to access the Drawing menulAt the top of the interface, select Drawing.

Command

Description
Activates a drawing tool including:Drawing Tools

Select, Contour Editor, Pencil Editor, Cutter, Smooth Editor,
Perspective, Envelope, Reposition All Drawings, Drawing Pivot,
Brush, Pencil, Text, Eraser, Dropper, Morphing, Line, Rectangle,
Ellipse, Polyline, Paint, Ink, Repaint Brush, Close Gap, Stroke, Edit
Gradient/Texture, Hand, Zoom and Rotate View.
These drawing tools are available on the Tools toolbar.

Clean Up

Paint

Remove Dirt

Opens the Remove Dirt dialog box where you can specify the
number and size of dots removal from a selected drawing.

Remove Hair

Opens the Remove Hair dialog box where you can specify the
number and length of hairs for removal from a selected drawing. This
removes any small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very
thick lines or filled zones. Increase the value to select larger strokes
for removal from the drawing.

Close Gaps

Closes small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes
between the two closest points to close the colour zone. You do notneed to trace directly over the gap. You can draw it a few millimeters
away. The two closest points automatically close the gap.

Remove Art Inside Selection

Removes any art inside a selection. It is recommended that you
clean your Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files,
especially if you work in high definition resolutions.

Remove Art Inside Selection on
All Drawings

Removes any art inside all drawings selected with the Permanent
Selection option in the Select tool.

Remove Art Outside Selection

Removes any art existing outside a selection. It is recommended
that you clean the Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files,
especially if you work in high-definition resolutions.

Remove Art Outside Selection on
All Drawings

Removes any art outside all drawings selected with the Permanent
Selection option in the Select tool.
NOTE: The Paint commands require you to use the Permanent
Selection option in the Select tool so you can maintain a selection over multiple drawings.

124

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Unpaint Selection

Unpaints any art existing inside a selection.

Unpaint Selection on All Drawings

Unpaints all art contained inside a selection on all the drawings
within the same layer.

Unpaint Outside Selection

Unpaints any art existing outside a selection. If no selection havebeen drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be
unpainted.

Unpaint Outside Selection on All
Drawings

Unpaints all art outside a selection on all the drawings within thesame layer.

Repaint Selection

Repaints any art inside a selection.

Repaint Selection on All Drawings

Repaints any art inside a selection on all the drawings contained
within the same layer.

Repaint Outside Selection

Repaints any art outside a selection. If no selection has been drawn
using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be repainted.

Repaint Outside Selection on All
Drawings

Repaints any art outside a selection on all the drawings contained
within the same layer.

ConvertPencil Lines to Brush Strokes

Converts the selected centreline pencil strokes into contour strokes
brush lines.

Brush Strokes to Pencil Lines

Converts selected contour strokes into centreline pencil strokes.
The brush stroke thickness will be lost.

Strokes to Pencil Lines

Converts the selected invisible line to a pencil line.

Break Apart Text Layers

Text is treated as a single drawing object. This separates the text soeach character becomes an individual drawing object you can selectand modify independently.

Optimize

FlattenMerges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If you
draw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it
can be useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines
are drawn one on top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines
or modify their shape, it will be easier if they are flattened.

SmoothSmooths selected drawing strokes and removes extra points.

Create Contour Strokes

Adds a permanent invisible line around a shape that was drawn
directly in Harmony. This allows you to unpaint lines with the Paint
tool but maintain the shape of the lines, should you need to repaintlater.

Remove Contour Strokes

Remove any permanently invisible lines that were created while
scanning and vectorizing drawings or manually adding contour
strokes. This is useful for removing the intersection triangles createdduring vectorization.

Remove Extra Strokes

Removes strokes inside painted area. This option only works after
the painted drawing is flattened.

Optimize

Reduces the number of layers, such as overlapping brush strokes,
in the selected drawing objects. Drawing objects will only be

125Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

flattened and optimized if the selected objects do not change theappearance of the final image when they are merged.

Crop Brush Textures

Crops an unnecessarily large texture bitmap that lies unseen
beneath the vector contour of a textured line. This often occurs when
you cut and paste textured lines from one drawing into another. If
you cut a portion from a textured line and paste it into a different
drawing, Harmony pastes the entire unseen texture bitmap from thesource drawing into the new one, even if you only took a small portion of the source drawing. Using the Crop Brush Texture command
will crop away extraneous texture that does not touch the vector
area. If there are many textured lines in your scene, this will greatly
reduce the file size.

Reduce Drawing Texture
Resolution

When you import and vectorize as texture (colour) a high resolution
image, the size of your drawing can be heavy. You can reduce thesize and resolution of the textures in a drawing.

Transform
Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

Rotate 180

Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

Arrange
Bring to Front

Moves the selected art to the front (on top).

Bring Forward

Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).

Send Backward

Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).

Send to Back

Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).

Create Empty Drawing

Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that
may already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until itmeets another drawing, key exposure or a blank cell.

Duplicate Drawings

Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets
you modify an existing drawing but retain the original. When
duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new
drawing. The exposure of the original drawing that was on thecurrent cell is removed. The original drawing is not deleted from the
project folder or other cells in which it is exposed.

Delete Selected Drawings

Permanently removes selected drawings. Once you save yourproject, these drawings cannot be recovered.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.

Rename Drawing with Prefix

Lets you rename a drawing sequence with a prefix, which can bequite useful for cut-out puppet breakdown and deformation
animation. This applies to any deformation work done in preHarmony 12 versions.

Rename by Frame

Lets you rename a series of drawings relative to their frame position.
This is useful in hand-drawn animation.

126Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Select Strokes with Current Colour

Distribute to Layers

Lets you select drawing elements and painted areas with the same
colour as the currently selected colour in your colour palette.
Every selected stroke in the Camera view is placed on separate
layers; one layer per stroke. If artwork is composed of several
strokes, you must group them to put them on the same layer.
This operation cannot be done in the Drawing view.

Create Colour Art from Line Art

Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded
layers (line art, colour art, overlay, underlay) and create invisible
strokes to paint your drawings on separate layers. This provides
more inking and painting flexibility.
You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on
any of the four embedded layers.

Create Breaking Triangles

Useful for brush strokes, creates triangular breaks at natural line
intersections. These intersections are the probable locations wherecolour line breaks may occur, such as where a sleeve meets a hand.
This makes it easier to soft trace lines in different colours when
there are flattened or unflattened clean brush strokes.

Generate Auto-Matte
Adjust Line Texture Opacity

Fills colour based on currently selected colour swatch on different
drawing layers (overlay, underlay) so overlapping lines are more
visible during a line test.
Lets you adjust the contrast and opacity of textured lines in a drawing.
This feature is very useful when you need to have a full resolution ofa bitmap image (such as imported bitmaps as .psd or .tga for the
background) for tracing to create a matte directly in Harmony.
By default, Harmony creates small thumbnail images when imported
as bitmap in order to increase performance by using a small
thumbnail image instead of using the original large size bitmap foranimation work in Harmony. This will make difficult to view details or
trace due to the low resolution (blurry). This option temporary
increases the resolution of bitmaps up to their original bitmap
resolution to make tracing easier.

Change Bitmap Drawing Resolution
NOTE: Regardless of using small thumbnails in Harmony, thefinal render will use the real image resolution so there is no lossof quality in the final render.

NOTE: The small thumbnail size can be changed in Preferences (Camera tab).

Previous Drawing

When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays theprevious drawing.

127

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

Next Drawing

When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays thenext drawing.

Previous Layer

When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays theprevious layer.

Next Layer

Once a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, you cannavigate between the drawings, frames, and layers. Displays theprevious drawing, next drawing, previous layer or next layer.
When a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, displays thenext layer.

Colour Protection
Toggle Current Colour Protection

Temporarily enables/disables the Colour Protection feature so you
can quickly correct wrongly inked or painted areas under protectedcolour without readjusting the Current Colour Protection option.

Respect Colour Protection

In the Colour view, you can protect a colour swatch to avoid repainting or unpainting the zones linked to that swatch. If you using the
Paint tool and this option is deselected, you will repaint or unpaintthe protected colours on your drawings until you enable the option
again.

128

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Edit Menu
The Edit menu lets you repeat and undo actions, cut/copy/paste selected objects, select and manipulate objects,
work with symbols, and access the Preferences dialog box.
How to access the Edit menulFrom the top menu, select Edit.

Command

Description

Undo

Removes the last change made to your project. Harmony supports
multiple undo, so you can undo changes you made in the order you
made them.

Redo

Redoes an operation you have undone. This command is active only
after you use the Undo command.

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a
view.
Opens the Paste Special dialog box which lets you determine howtemplates and symbols are imported in the Timeline view.

Paste Special
There are advanced paste options for drawings, timings, keyframes,
layers, as well as palettes and symbols.
Paste Special Again

Pastes new drawings with the previous Paste Special settings.

Paste Cycle

Cycles a portion of an animation. You can increase or decrease thenumber of cycles to paste and select a type of cycle: Normal, Reverse,
Forward-Reverse and Reverse-Forward.

Paste Reverse

Reverses the timing of drawings or keyframes in range of selection
after copying.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the
Drawing, Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple
objects as one when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items thatwere not selected. For example, if some lines are selected in a
drawing, this command will deselect them and select any other lines inthe drawing that were not selected.

Auto-Apply

Automatically applies changes you make to a property window or dialog box. Harmony applies the modification automatically and displays
the result in the Camera view. When working on a heavy scene, it isuseful to turn off this option.If you want to always work in Auto-Applymode, you can deselect the Auto-Apply option in the Preferences dia-129

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

log box (General tab). Then, each time you start Harmony, the AutoApply mode will be off. You must click the Apply button to see any
modifications.
Create Symbol

Creates a symbol from selected drawing elements in the Drawing or
Camera view or a layer or cells in the Timeline view.
Extracts a symbol's contents and places it on the root timeline. Its
contents will be copied and inserted into the root timeline. The symbol
will not be removed from the Timeline view once it is expanded.

Expand Symbol

The symbol's layers will be parented to it in case you created motions
and transformations on the drawing layer that contain the symbol.
Breaking the hierarchy could result in the loss of any scaling andanimation you may have created.

Duplicate Selected Symbol

Creates a duplicate of a selected symbol. If other symbols are nested
inside the new symbol, they are not duplicated. If you modify them, theoriginal and other instances will also be modified.

Create Drawing from Drawing Selection

Breaks a character into its main body parts. There is no need to create
any layers prior to this process. Make sure your model is well centeredand sized in the Camera view.

Clone: Drawings Only

Creates a copy of the drawings in the selected layer in the Timelineview or column in the Xsheet view. The timing it not copied.

Clone: Drawings and Timing

Creates a copy of the drawings and their timings in the selected layer in
the Timeline view or column in the Xsheet view.

Duplicate

Duplicates a layer to have a copy of the drawings that are independent
from the original ones, as well as an independent timing (exposure).
When you need the drawings to be modified independently, you will
want to duplicate the layer instead of cloning it.
There are two methods of merging drawings.
•

You can merge selected drawings in adjacent elements. The
columns and layers will be left intact, and each new merged
drawing will reside in the frames of the left-most column or lower
layer.

•

You can merge elements. All drawings will be merged. Unused
columns and layers will be deleted, but the original drawing files
are still accessible.

Merge

Group
Group

Groups selected drawing objects in the Camera or Drawing view.

Ungroup

Ungroups a selected group of drawing objects in the Camera or
Drawing view.

Edit Drawing Mode

When the Auto-Get Rights to Modify Drawings option is selected in the
Preferences dialog box (General tab), the system automatically getsthe rights to modify drawings when you select a drawing. Otherwise,
you must manually get the rights to modify drawings.

Edit Palette List Mode

When the Auto-Get Rights to Modify Palette option is selected in the
Preferences dialog box (General tab), the system automatically getsthe rights to modify palettes and palette lists when you select a colour

130Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

from a palette. Otherwise, you must manually get the rights to modify apalette or palette list.
Get Rights to Modify Drawing

Manually releases the rights to modify a selected drawing.

Release Rights to Modify Drawing

Manually releases rights to modify a selected drawing.

This option is always available even if the Get Rights to Modify All
Force Release Rights to Modify Drawing Scene Assets option is not selected in the Database Selector dialog
box.
Preferences

Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can set your preferencesfor Harmony.

131

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

File Menu
The File menu lets you open, close, save, scan, print, and import and export files.
How to access the File menulFrom the top menu, select File.

Command

Description

New

Creates a new scene while closing any scene already open. The
New Scene dialog box opens, asking for directory, name, andresolution information.

Open

Displays the Open Scene dialog box where you can browse for ascene file. You can open a new scene from the current one and theprevious scene will close.

Open Recent

Displays a list of the most recently opened scenes.

Clear

Clears the list of recently opened scenes.

Close

Closes the currently opened scene, but does not close the Harmony
application.

Save

Saves all changes made to the opened scene, drawings, palettes,
and palette lists.
Lets you do the following:llAdvanced Savell

Save the scene as the current version.
Save different versions representing different stages of the
production of your scene.
Save different versions representing different scene setups.
Choose specific assets that you want to save, such as drawings or palettes.

Rights to Modify Scene Version

Allows you to modify the selected version of the scene and accessthe version manager during the opened session

Rights to Modify Scene

Allows you to modify the currently selected scene version, but locks
access to the version manager during the opened session.
Determines which drawing files have been modified on disk since
you loaded them. All updated drawings will be reloaded.

Read Changed Drawings
NOTE: Reloading a locked drawing will discard unsavedchanges.
Manage Versions

Allows you to manage all the versions of the current scene.

Save As

Saves the current file with a different name and at a different
location.
Saves the current state of a scene as another scene. The Save As

132

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

window prompts you for a new name and a different location for thisscene before saving it. This will create a complete scene directory
for the new scene.

NOTE: The scene name cannot exceed 23 characters.

Save as New Version

Saves the current scene as another version. The Save Version
dialog box prompts you to give a name for this new version. This will
create a new .xstage file in your current project directory.

Back Up Scene

Backs up the current scene to a location you choose.

Update Database Scene

Updates your database with only the changes you made to thescene. To do this, you must enter your host name and host port in
the Preferences dialog box, General tab.

Download Database Changes

If any changes were made to the scene you downloaded, you canperform an update by downloading these changes, which will be
integrated into your scene.

Remove Unused Files

Removes the unused palettes from the scene list.

ImportFrom Scanner

Imports drawings from a TWAIN scanner.

ImagesImports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.

Movie

Lets you convert a QuickTime movie to an image sequence andaudio file.

Sound

Lets you import sound files into your project.

Colour Model

Lets you import TVG drawing file into your project. Once imported, it
is display in the Model view for use as a colour model which you canload into any Harmony scene.

SWF, Illustrator Files to LibraryLets you import SWF files into your project.

ImagesExports a scene as a bitmap image sequence. If there is sound inyour scene, it will not be exported with the images.

Movie

Exports animation as a QuickTime movie.

ExportExports a Flash movie file.
SWF

The SWF export supports some bitmap effects (which can bepreviewed in Render View mode) and SWF Blend Modes (vector
effects which can be previewed in OpenGL View mode).

OpenGL Frames

Exports OpenGL frames (fast display mode) for a quick screen
renders of a scene that contain no transparency channel. Heavier
scenes containing 3D, multiple effects and camera moves can be
fairly long to export.

XsheetPrints the exposure sheet so you can take it to your animation table,
provide a copy to the animator, or create your Xsheet skeleton

Print

133

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

directly in Harmony.
Quit

Closes the application.

134

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Help Menu
The Help menu lets you display the Harmony documentation, Welcome screen and end user license agreement, as
well as access the Toon Boom website, and identify the product name and version number.
How to access the Help menulAt the top of the interface, select Help.

Command

Description

Online Help

Opens the Harmony Help system, complete with instructions on how
to use the system. This requires an internet connection.

Getting Started

Opens the Harmony Getting Started Guide (in PDF format) in a browser
window. Requires Acrobat Reader.

Toon Boom on the Web

Opens the Toon Boom website, which features a Support andCommunity > Forum section.

Customer Experience Improvement
Program

The Customer Experience Improvement Program allows Toon Boom tocollect usage information. The data does not contain any personallyidentifiable information and cannot be used to identify you. The data willconsist of a basic hardware description, a project summary and usage
information. The information is used only for software improvement
purposes, as well as for sharing with third parties for the same reason.
This program is enabled by default but is voluntary. If you prefer not toparticipate, you can opt out when you first launch the software, byusing a global preference, or by a command line argument.

About

Identifies the product name and version number.

Show Welcome Screen

Displays the Harmony Welcome screen.

Show End User License Agreement

Displays the End User License Agreement.

Debug Mode

Enables the Debug mode for gathering and displaying precise
information about each rendering frame, such as the nodes
encountered and action taken. You can view this information in the
Message Log view.

135Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

Insert Menu
The Insert menu lets you create empty symbols in the Library view, different types of layers in the Timeline view,
keyframes and control points.
How to access the Insert menulAt the top of the interface, select Insert.

Command

Description

Create Empty Symbol in Library

Creates an empty symbol in the Library view to which you can edit
(add content).

Bone

Adds a new Bone layer to the Timeline view.

CameraAdds a new Camera layer to the Timeline view.

Colour-Card

Adds a new Colour-Card layer to the Timeline view.

Drawing

Adds a new Drawing layer to the Timeline view and a column in the
Xsheet view.

Game Bone

Adds a new Game Bone layer to the Timeline view.

Kinematic Output

Adds dd a new Kinematic Output layer to the Timeline view.

Peg

Adds a new Peg layer to the Timeline view.

Quadmap

Adds a new Quadmap layer to the Timeline view.

Effects

Adds a new layer in the Timeline view with the effect you select:
Blending, Blur, Blur-Gaussian, Brightness-Contrast, ColourOverride, Colour-Scale, Cutter, Glow, Highlight, Shadow, Tone, orTransparency.

Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Keyframe and Duplicate Drawing

Adds a keyframe to the selected drawing layer cell in the Timelineview and creates a duplicate of the drawing, which sits on top of theoriginal drawing.

Position Keyframe

Adds a position keyframe whereby keyframes will only be added on
the X, Y and Z parameters of the selected layer. Keyframes are notadded on the Angle, Scale and Skew parameters.

Control Point

Adds a control point to the trajectory of the selected element or peg
in the Camera view when the element or peg is in a 3D path. Notethat you must have a 3D path in the peg portion in order to add acontrol point.

136

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Play Menu
The Play menu lets you play back animation and sound. Use it to scrub the sound to create your lip-sync, loop theplayback, navigate through frames, and change the playback range and speed.
How to access the Play menulAt the top of the interface, select Play.

Command

Description

Play

Plays and stops the animation.

Render and Play

Creates a render of your scene to play back the final result including theeffects.

Test SWF Movie

Creates a SWF format movie and a report to test your result before
proceeding to the final movie.

Stop

Stops playback.

Playback Speed

Opens the Set New Frame Rate dialog box where you can set theframe rate at which the playback plays.

Loop

Repeatedly plays back your animation indefinitely.

Enable Sound

Turns on sound during playback.

Enable Sound Scrubbing

Turns on sound scrubbing during playback.

Start Frame

Opens the Set Playback Start Frame dialog box where you can set theframe number on which to start playback.

Stop Frame

Opens the Set Playback Stop Frame dialog box where you can set theframe number on which to stop playback.

First Frame

Moves the red playhead to the first frame.

Previous Frame

Moves the red playhead to the previous frame.

Next Frame

Moves the red playhead to the next frame.

Last Frame

Moves the red playhead to the last frame.

Go to Frame

Opens the Go to Frame dialog box where you can enter the frame
number on which the red playhead to be positioned in the Timeline
view.

Enable Playback
Top View

Plays back your animation in the Top view.

Side View

Plays back your animation in the Side view.

Perspective View

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

137Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

Scene Menu
The Scene menu lets you set the scene length, add frames to the scene, view different displays of the scene, setrender options, access the Scene Settings dialog box and Elements Manager window, and verify the drawing andpalette files in your project.
How to access the Scene menulAt the top of the interface, select Scene.

Command

Description

Scene Length

Lets you set the length of the scene in frames.

Frame
Add Frames at Start

Adds the number of frames you specify to the beginning of thescene.

Add Frames at End

Adds the number of frames you specify to the end of the scene.

Add Frames Before Selection
Add Frames After Selection

Adds the number of frames you specify before or after your selection.

Remove Selected Frames

Deletes the selected frames from your scene.

CameraDefault Camera

Lets you select a camera. If you only add one camera to your scene,
you will only see Default Camera in your list.

Default Display
Display All
Display
Scene Settings

Shows the contents of a specific Display node, updating thecontents of the Camera, Top, Side, and Timeline views.
Opens the Scene Settings dialog box where you can set theresolution, alignment, bitmap resolution and many other parameters.

RenderAuto Render

Automatically recalculates the preview image whenever you modify
a parameter. If your scene is heavy and you do not want the preview
rendered automatically, deselect the Auto-Render option and do thepreview update manually.Note that this will slow down Harmony as
it takes resources to update every frame.
Renders a frame each time the current frame is changed.

Auto Render Write

You must have a Write node in your node structure to use thiscommand.

Cancel Preview Render

Cancels a render that was started.

Element Manager

Opens the Element Manager window where you can add, delete or
modify elements (drawing folders) in your scene. If you have drawing folders that are not linked to a column in your scene, use the Element Manager to delete them if needed. See xref Reference >Windows > Element Manager.

138

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Check Files

Verifies the integrity of the drawing and palette files in your project.

139

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

View Menu
The View menu lets you manipulate the view by zooming, panning, or rotating. You can also display the grid andchange its size, use the onion skin feature to help with drawing, and set the preview resolution.
How to access the View menulAt the top of the interface, select View.

Command

Description
Cycles through the following display modes:lToggle Full ScreenllNormal Full-Screen: The main application window becomesfull screen.
View Full-Screen: The selected view becomes full screen
and all other views are collapsed.
Normal: The main application window is restored to its original size and collapsed views are expanded.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animationtable.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like ananimation table.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Next Colour

Goes to the next colour in the Colour view.

Previous Colour

Goes to the previous colour in the Colour view.

Grid
Show Grid

Displays the grid.

Grid Outline Only

Displays the outline of the grid only.

Underlay

Displays the grid under the drawing elements.

Overlay

Displays the grid over the drawing elements.

Square Grid

Displays a standard square grid.

12 Field Grid

Displays a 12-field size grid.

16 Field Grid

Displays a 16-field size grid.

Onion Skin
Show Onion Skin

Lets you preview the previous and next drawings. By default, the previous drawings appear in a shade of red and the next drawings are

140Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

displayed with a shade of green. You can change these colours in
the Preferences dialog box.
Add to Onion Skin

Adds a series of selected elements to the onion skin preview.

Remove from Onion Skin

Removes a series of selected elements from the onion skin preview.

Remove Unselected from Onion
Skin

Removes all elements except the ones selected from the onion skinpreview.

Add All to Onion Skin

Adds all of the scene's elements to the onion skin preview.

Remove All from Onion Skin

Removes all of the scene's elements from the onion skin preview.

Onion Skinning by Drawing

In Camera view, the onion skin by default is per frame, this option
lets you set it by drawing so you don't see any exposure's onion skinfrom the same drawing.

No Previous Drawing

Removes the previous drawing's onion skin and displays only thenext drawing.

Previous Drawing

Displays the previous drawing.

Previous Two Drawings

Displays the previous two drawings.

Previous Three Drawings

Displays the previous three drawings.

No Next Drawing

Do not show the onion skin for all of the next drawings.

Next Drawing

Show the onion skin for the next drawing.

Next Two Drawings

Show the onion skin for the next two drawings.

Next Three Drawings

Show the onion skin for the next three drawings.

Reduce One Previous Drawing

Reduces the number of previous visible drawings by one.

Add One Previous Drawing

Adds one drawing to the number of previous visible drawings.

Reduce One Next Drawing

Reduces the number of next visible drawings by one.

Add One Next Drawing

Adds one drawing to the number of next visible drawings.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see the previous and subsequent
active layers in washed-out colours. It is useful for seeing the otherlayers when designing, animating or cleaning up your animation.

Backlight

Produces a silhouette effect by changing the drawing’s coloured
areas into a single dark, solid colour. Use this to verify the completeness of the ink and paint process. Any unpainted zones can beseen as the light shows through the unpainted areas of the silhouetted drawing.

Show

Symbol Pivot

Displays a symbol's pivot. The Symbol pivot is similar to the Drawing pivot. Each symbol cell can have its own pivot and act the sameas the Drawing pivot. The Symbol pivot can also be referred to asembedded pivot. Inside a symbol, each drawing can have its own
pivot.

Safe Area

Displays the TV safety zone and the centre of the camera frame.
The safe area adapts to the scene resolution, as well as the safetyzone and frame’s centre.

141

Chapter 3: Menus

Main Menus

Camera Mask

Displays a black mask around the scene’s frame to avoid seeing theunnecessary artwork. This option is handy when you're animating
and setting up the scene. It allows you to see your scene’s composition better.

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Current Drawing on Top

Displays the selected drawing on top of everything while you draw.
By enabling this option, each time you select a drawing tool, theselected drawing is displayed in front of everything in the Camera
view. The Timeline view ordering remain unchanged.You only needto enable this option once, it is not necessary to do it each time you
select a drawing tool.

Outline Locked Drawings

Displays drawing that are locked in the Timeline view (cannot be
selected in the Camera view) as wireframes.

Show Strokes

Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines
stand out.

Show Strokes with Colour Wash

Displays strokes with washed-out colours.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Preview Manager

Opens the Preview Manager where you can set options for the quality of previews, and clearing and updating the cache.

Preview Resolution
Same as Scene Resolution
3/4 of Scene Resolution
1/2 of Scene Resolution

Lets you choose a resolution for previewing a scene.

1/3 of Scene Resolution
1/4 of Scene Resolution
CustomLets you select a resolution from a list of presets or enter X and Y
values for a custom preview resolution.

Bitmap File Quality

Lets you change the quality of the preview of the bitmap file in the
Camera view. It will not affect the final render.

142

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Windows Menu
The Windows menu lets you customize your workspace to suit your working style, save it as a new workspace, andload it from the Workspace toolbar. You can also show or hide the different toolbars and views in Harmony.
How to access the Windows menulFrom the top menu, select Windows.

Command

Description

Restore Default Workspace

Returns modified workspaces to their original default layout if you do
not like the current modifications or inadvertently closed some
windows.

Workspace
Workspace Manager

Opens the Workspace Manager where you can modify, create, delete,rename and reorder your workspaces.

Workspace

Lets you open workspaces designed specifically for animating,compositing, hand drawing, scripting and the default workspace.

Toolbars

Lets you show or hide these toolbars: Playback, File, Edit, Advanced
Animation, Scripting, Tools, Workspace, Deformation, Camera View,
Xsheet View and Timeline View.

CameraShows or hides the Camera view.

ColourShows or hides the Colour view.

Drawing

Shows or hides the Drawing view.

FunctionShows or hides the Function view.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Library

Shows or hides the Library view.

Message Log

Shows or hides the Message Log view.

Side

Shows or hides the Side view.

Timeline

Shows or hides the Timeline view.

Tool Properties

Shows or hides the Tool Properties view.

Top

Shows or hides the Top view.

XsheetShows or hides the Xsheet view.

Integrated Help

Shows or hides the Integrated Help view.

Metadata Editor

Shows or Hides the Metadata Editor view.

Script Editor

Shows or hides the Script Editor view.

143Chapter 3: Menus

Quick-access Menus

Quick-access Menus
A quick-access menu lets you open a list of the commands you will use most often.
How to access a quick-access menu
1. Right-click anywhere in a view.

144Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

View Menus
A view menu contains commands specifically related to that view.
How to access a view menu
1. In the top-left corner of a view, click the Menu

button.

Camera View Menu

146

Colour View Menu

157

Drawing View Menu

159

Function View Menu

167

Library View Menu

169

Model View Menu

171

Perspective View Menu

172

Side View Menu

176

Timeline View Menu

179

Top View Menu

182

Xsheet View Menu

185

145

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Camera View Menu
The Camera View menu lets you do many things in the Camera view, including selecting and editing objects indifferent views, changing the display, setting morphing parameters, accessing tools and many more.
How to access the Camera menul

In the upper-left corner of the Camera view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit
Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one
when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Select Stroke With
Current Colour

Select the strokes that contain the currently selected colour.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command
will deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were notselected.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Parent Skipping Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view skipping
Effects
effects in the hierarchy.
Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timelineview.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.
Group: Groups selected drawing objects in the Camera or Drawing view.

Group

Ungroup: Ungroups a selected group of drawing objects in the Camera or
Drawing view.

View

146

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Zoom In: Zooms in the view.
Zoom Out: Zooms out the view.
Reset Zoom: Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Navigation

Rotate View CW: Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like ananimation table.
Rotate View CCW: Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise,
like an animation table.
Reset Rotation: Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.
Reset Pan: Resets the view’s pan to its default position.
Reset View: Resets the view to its default position.

Switch to Colour Art

Displays the Colour Art layer. When switching art layers, you can edit the
selected layer without affecting the other one.

Preview Line Art
and Colour Art

Displays all Art layers.

Open GL View

Switches the Camera view to fast display, letting you see your animation playin real time. The OpenGL display requires less memory. The final look of youreffects is not shown in the OpenGL View Mode. You must switch to the RenderView Mode to see your effects.

Render View

Switches the Camera view to a fully rendered display showing the final imageof the current frame. If a modification is done to your current frame or if you
move to a different frame, click the Update Preview button to update thedisplay if your preview does not update automatically.The Render View Modedisplay lets you see the final look of your frames including effects andantialiasing. You cannot play back your scene in Render View Mode. To see
your scene fully rendered and to play it back, you must press the Render andPlay button in the Playback toolbar.

Matte View

Switches the Camera view to a matte display showing the alpha channel of theelements in your scene. The transparency level ranges from 0 to 100 percent.
Zero percent is completely transparent and represented by black and 100 percent is completely opaque and represented by white. Everything in between
these extremes has a transparency level somewhere between 1 and 99 percent
and is represented in various shades of grey.
Show Grid: Displays the grid.
Grid Outline Only: Displays the outline of the grid only.
Underlay: Displays the grid under the drawing elements.

Grid

Overlay: Displays the grid over the drawing elements.
Square Grid: Displays a standard square grid.
12 Field Grid: Displays a 12-field size grid.
16 Field Grid: Displays a 16-field size grid.

Onion Skin

Show Onion Skin: Lets Lets you preview the previous and next drawings. By
default, the previous drawings appear in a shade of red and the next drawings
are displayed with a shade of green. You can change these colours in the
Preferences dialog box.

147

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Add to Onion Skin: Adds Adds a series of selected elements to the onion skinpreview.
Remove from Onion Skin: Removes Removes a series of selected elementsfrom the onion skin preview.
Remove Unselected from Onion Skin: Removes Removes all elements
except the ones selected from the onion skin preview.
Add All to Onion Skin: Adds Adds all of the scene's elements to the onion skinpreview.
Remove All from Onion Skin: Removes Removes all of the scene's elementsfrom the onion skin preview.
Onion Skinning by Drawing:
No Previous Drawing:
Previous Drawing: Displays the previous drawing.
Previous Two Drawings: Displays the previous two drawings.
Previous Three Drawings: Displays the previous three drawings.
No Next Drawing: Displays no next drawing.
Next Drawing: Displays the next drawing.
Next Two Drawings: Displays the next two drawings.
Next Three Drawings: Displays the next three drawings.
Reduce One Previous Drawing: Reduces the number of previous visible
drawings by one.
Add One Previous Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of previous
visible drawings.
Reduce One Next Drawing: Reduces the number of next visible drawings byone.
Add One Next Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of next visible
drawings.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see Turns on the light table so you can see
the previous and subsequent active layers in washed-out colours. It is usefulfor seeing the other layers when designing, animating or cleaning up youranimation.

Backlight

Produces Produces a silhouette effect by changing the drawing’s coloured
areas into a single dark, solid colour. Use this to verify the completeness of the
ink and paint process. Any unpainted zones can be seen as the light shows
through the unpainted areas of the silhouetted drawing.

Show

Symbol Pivot: Displays a symbol's pivot. The Symbol pivot is similar to the
Drawing pivot. Each symbol cell can have its own pivot and act the same as
the Drawing pivot. The Symbol pivot can also be referred to as embedded pivot.
Inside a symbol, each drawing can have its own pivot.
Safe Area: Displays Displays the TV safety zone and the centre of the camera
frame. The safe area adapts to the scene resolution, as well as the safety zone
and frame’s centre.

148

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Camera Mask: Displays Displays a black mask around the scene’s frame to
avoid seeing the unnecessary artwork. This option is handy when you're animating and setting up the scene. It allows you to see your scene’s composition
better.
Control: Displays the controls of the selected element.
BBox Selection Style: Lets you change the display style of selected elements
to a bounding box style. This removes the default overlay highlight and leaves
only the bounding box around the selected element.
Outline Locked Drawings: Drawings that are locked in the Timeline view(cannot be selected in the Camera view) are displayed as wireframes.
Show Current Drawing on Top: Displays Displays the selected drawing on
top of everything while you draw. By enabling this option, each time you selecta drawing tool, the selected drawing is displayed in front of everything in the
Camera view. The Timeline view ordering remain unchanged.You only need toenable this option once, it is not necessary to do it each time you select adrawing tool.
Show Strokes: Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines
stand out.
Show Strokes with Colour Wash: Displays strokes with washed-out colours.
Highlight Selected Colour:
Show Scan Information: Displays a status bar showing the scanning information at the bottom of the Drawing and Camera view.
Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Render Current Frame

Renders only the current frame.

Auto Render

Automatically recalculates the preview image whenever you modify a parameter. If your scene is heavy and you do not want the preview rendered automatically, deselect the Auto-Render option and do the preview update
manually.Note that this will slow down Harmony as it takes resources to
update every frame.

Layer Properties

Displays the Layer Properties window of the selected layer in the Timelineview.

Preview Manager

Opens the Preview Manager where you can set options for the quality of previews, and clearing and updating the cache.

Bitmap File Quality

Lets you change the quality of the preview of the bitmap file in the Camera
view. It will not affect the final render.

Drawing
Remove Dirt: Opens the Remove Dirt dialog box where you can specify the
number and size of dots removal from a selected drawing.

Clean Up

Remove Hair: Opens the Remove Hair dialog box where you can specify the
number and length of hairs for removal from a selected drawing. This removes
any small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very thick lines or filledzones. Increase the value to select larger strokes for removal from the drawing.
Close Gaps: Closes small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible
strokes between the two closest points to close the colour zone. You do not149Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

need to trace directly over the gap. You can draw it a few millimeters away. The
two closest points automatically close the gap.
Remove Art Inside Selection: Removes any art inside a selection. It is
recommended that you clean your Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if
you work in high definition resolutions.
Remove Art Inside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art inside all
drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Remove Art Outside Selection: Removes any art existing outside aselection. It is recommended that you clean the Colour Art level as well. If you
have a stroke accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files,
especially if you work in high-definition resolutions.
Remove Art Outside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art outside
all drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Unpaint Selection: Unpaints any art existing inside a selection.
Unpaint Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art contained inside aselection on all the drawings within the same layer.
Unpaint Outside Selection: Unpaints any art existing outside a selection. If
no selection have been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be
unpainted.

Paint

Unpaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art outside aselection on all the drawings within the same layer.
Repaint Selection: Repaints any art inside a selection.
Repaint Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art inside a selection on all
the drawings contained within the same layer.
Repaint Outside Selection: Repaints any art outside a selection. If noselection has been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be
repainted.
Repaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art outside aselection on all the drawings contained within the same layer.
Pencil Lines to Brush Strokes: Converts the selected centreline pencil
strokes into contour strokes brush lines.

ConvertBrush Strokes to Pencil Lines: Converts selected contour strokes into
centreline pencil strokes. The brush stroke thickness will be lost.
Strokes to Pencil Lines: Converts the selected invisible line to a pencil line.
Brush Apart Text Layers: Text is treated as a single drawing object. This
separates the text so each character becomes an individual drawing object you
can select and modify independently.

Optimize

Flatten: Merges Merges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer.
If you draw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it can be
useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines are drawn one on
top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines or modify their shape, it will
be easier if they are flattened.
Smooth: Smooths selected drawing strokes and removes extra points.

150

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Create Contour Strokes: Adds a permanent invisible line around a shape thatwas drawn directly in Harmony. This allows you to unpaint lines with the Paint
tool but maintain the shape of the lines, should you need to repaint later.
Remove Contour Strokes: Remove any permanently invisible lines that werecreated while scanning and vectorizing drawings or manually adding contour
strokes. This is useful for removing the intersection triangles created during vectorization.
Remove Extra Strokes: Removes strokes inside painted area. This option
only works after the painted drawing is flattened.
Optimize: Reduces Reduces the number of layers, such as overlapping brushstrokes, in the selected drawing objects. Drawing objects will only be flattened
and optimized if the selected objects do not change the appearance of the final
image when they are merged.
Crop Brush Textures: Crops Crops an unnecessarily large texture bitmap thatlies unseen beneath the vector contour of a textured line. This often occurs
when you cut and paste textured lines from one drawing into another. If you cut
a portion from a textured line and paste it into a different drawing, Harmony
pastes the entire unseen texture bitmap from the source drawing into the newone, even if you only took a small portion of the source drawing. Using the Crop
Brush Texture command will crop away extraneous texture that does not touch
the vector area. If there are many textured lines in your scene, this will greatly
reduce the file size.
Reduce Drawing Texture Resolution:
When you import and vectorize as texture (colour) a high resolution image, thesize of your drawing can be heavy. You can reduce the size and resolution of
the textures in a drawing.
Bring to Front: Moves the selected art to the front (on top).
Arrange

Bring Forward: Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).
Send Backward: Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).
Send to Back: Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.

Transform

Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Rotate 180: Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

Creates Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
Create Empty Drawing already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets anotherdrawing, key exposure or a blank cell.

Duplicate Drawings

Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets you modify anexisting drawing but retain the original. When duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing. The exposure of the original drawingthat was on the current cell is removed. The original drawing is not deleted fromthe project folder or other cells in which it is exposed.
When duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing.

151

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

The exposure of the original drawing that was on the current cell is removed.
The original drawing is not deleted from the project folder or other cells in which
it is exposed.
Delete Selected
Drawings

Permanently removes selected drawings. Once you save your project, thesedrawings cannot be recovered.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.

Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded layers (line art,
colour art, overlay, underlay) and create invisible strokes to paint your drawings
Create Colour Art From on separate layers. This provides more inking and painting flexibility.
Line Art
You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on any of thefour embedded layers.
Automatically creates a matte from a selected drawing or all drawings on alayer.
Generate Auto-Matte

Opens the auto-Matte dialog box where you can set the radius of the lines
depending on how precise or rough your line is.
You can also select the source and destinatin layers from which the matte willbe created.

Adjust Line Texture
Opacity

Lets you adjust the contrast and opacity of textured lines in a drawing.

Change Bitmap
Drawing Resolution

Lets you Lets you change the resolution of bitmap art for individual drawings.
You can reduce the resolution of your bitmap file as well as increase it. Be
careful because enlarging the bitmap resolution on an existing drawing will
result in a loss of quality.Harmony will perform a pixel smoothing pass(resampling) and create additional pixels to avoid losing too much quality, but
only to a certain extent. This feature is very useful when you need to have a full
resolution of a bitmap image (such as imported bitmaps as .psd or .tga for the
background) for tracing to create a matte directly in Harmony.By default,
Harmony creates small thumbnail images when imported as bitmap in order toincrease performance by using a small thumbnail image instead of using theoriginal large size bitmap for animation work in Harmony. This will makedifficult to view details or trace due to the low resolution (blurry). This option
temporary increases the resolution of bitmaps up to their original bitmap
resolution to make tracing easier.

Previous Drawing
Next Drawing
Previous Layer
Next Layer

Once a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, you can navigate
between the drawings, frames, and layers. Displays the previous drawing, next
drawing, previous layer or next layer.
Displays the previous drawing, next drawing, previous layer or next layer.
Toggle Current Colour Protection: Temporarily enables/disables the Colour
Protection feature so you can quickly correct wrongly inked or painted areas
under protected colour without readjusting the Current Colour Protection option.

Colour Protection

Respect Colour Protection: In the Colour view, you can protect a colour
swatch to avoid repainting or unpainting the zones linked to that swatch. If you
using the Paint tool and this option is deselected, you will repaint or unpaint theprotected colours on your drawings until you enable the option again.

152

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Drawing Tools
SelectLets you select elements from the Camera and Drawing views.

Contour Editor

Lets you add, remove or modify points on a vector line and control them.

Pencil Editor

Lets you modify the thick and thin contour of a pencil line (basically a central
vector shape). Shape control points along the central spine allow you to adjust
the stroke curve and position.

CutterLets you cut a drawing area to move, copy, cut or delete it.

Smooth Editor

Lets you optimize contours and reduce the number of points on a line.

Perspective

Lets you deform a drawing selection and alter its perspective.

Envelope

Lets you deform and warp part of a drawing using a grid envelope and Bezier
handles.

Reposition All
Drawings

Lets you reposition, scale, rotate or skew all drawing strokes on every drawing
included in a layer.

Drawing Pivot

Lets you set pivots on a characters, drawings and symbols.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick and thin line
effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing the final images, such as character
nodes, cut-out puppet and clean animation. Creates a central vector shape.

Text

Lets you type text in your project using various fonts and text attributes.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for precisely erasing parts of a drawing.

Dropper

Lets you pick a colour directly from a drawing.

Morphing

Lets you control a morphing sequence by placing different types of hints to help
Harmony morph the animation the way you want it.

Line
Rectangle
Lets you draw straight lines which you can then edit.
EllipsePolyline
Paint

Lets you paint both empty and filled zones.

Ink

Lets you paint only the segment you clicked on between two intersections to be
painted.

Repaint Brush
Close Gap

Lets you close small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes
between the two closest points.

StrokeLets you draw stokes, connect line ends and flatten lines.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Lets you modify the position of a gradient or texture colour within a specific
zone.

Hand

Lets you pan the Drawing or Camera view.

Zoom

Lets you zoom in and out of the Drawing or Camera view.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Drawing or Camera view just like with a real animation disc.

153

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Can also be used in Perspective view.
Animation
Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe on the selected cell in the Timeline view. If the Animate modeis enabled in the Camera view, a keyframe is automatically created on thecurrent frame.

Insert Control Point

Adds a control point to a 3D path function.

Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. In motion keyframes, there is no automaticinterpolation created between the selected point and the next one. The layer will
maintain its position until the animation reaches the frame of the next point andwill then jump to the new position. Deselect this option to generate interpolationand get the layer to progressively move to the next position.

Flip

Flips the position of an element on its axis.

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Lets you set the ease in and ease out on multiple functions and keyframes.
This opens the Set Ease For Multiple Parameters where you can modify the
Bezier or Ease curve. You can apply easing parameters to a certain type offunction only, such as rotation or scale.

Linear Motion

Transforms a curved path to a linear path removing tension, bias, andcontinuity.

Lock in Time

Indicates Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or
only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely asother points are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging

Keeps the Z value constant when you drag a character using the Transform orTranslate tool.

Substitute Drawing
Previous
Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.
Substitute Drawing
Next
Select Previous
Keyframe/Point
Select the previous keyframe/point.
Select Next
Keyframe/Point
Lock

Locks a layer so it cannot be selected in the Camera view.

Reset

Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation angle
will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all the transformation
values will be reset.

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer.
Your keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value. Alltransformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position.

154

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

This is useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often have aparticular Z ordering for the different views of a character. You might want toreset the transformation, but not necessarily the Z position.
Animation Tools
Transform

Lets you create a global selection so you can reposition, scale, rotate and skew
as one unit, which is useful for cut-out characters.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an object
up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale the element
while maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you movethem towards or away from the camera.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Reposition Drawing

Lets you reposition, scale, rotate or skew all drawing strokes on every drawing
included in a layer.

Spline Offset

Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying
your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If yourelements were drawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area,
it will look like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing. Also, if you haveseveral elements attached to one trajectory, you might want your trajectory to
be at a different location to represent the group's motion better.

Lets you pull on a character's extremities, such as the hands and feet, andInverse Kinematic Tool have the rest of the body follow. Can be used on any piece connected in ahierarchy.
IK Constraints
Set IK Nail

Blocks the X, Y and Z positions.

Set IK Hold Orientation Blocks the angle.
Set IK Hold X

Blocks only the X position.

Set IK Hold Y

Blocks only the Y position.

Set IK Min Angle

Sets limitations on the angle parameter to prevent the puppet from bending too
far.

Set IK Max Angle
Remove All
Constraints

Removes all nails except the minimum and maximum angles.

Morphing
Morphing

Contour Hint

Lets you control a morphing sequence by placing different types of hints to help
Harmony morph the animation the way you want it.
The Contour Hint point is used on the colour fill zone and brush lines; in otherwords, on Contour vectors. It allows you to control the line thickness andcontour position. Also, if a contour is not animated correctly, you can use hints
to correct the animation. For example, if a flag is not waving properly.
When adding a Contour Hint point, make sure to place it far enough away from155

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

the contour so you can see it snap to the contour.
Contour Hint points are yellow.

Zone Hint

The Zone Hint point is used on a colour zone to control the proximity rule. The
Zone Hint is placed in the centre of the colour zone. Sometimes a colour zone
is not associated with the corresponding one by default. For example, in asplash animation there are many water droplets that are the same colour.
Harmony automatically morphs the droplet to the nearest one. This is notalways the one you may have predicted. A Zone Hint will force a colour zone tomorph with another one.
Zone Hint points are cyan in colour.

Pencil Hint

A Pencil Hint point is used to control a pencil line, also known as central vector.
It can be used on drawings that were done using the Pencil, Polyline, Ellipse,
Line and Rectangle tools. Like the Contour Hint, the Pencil Hint snaps to thecentral vector. Make sure to place it far enough away from the line so you will
see it snap when you move it.
Pencil Hint points are magenta in colour.

Vanishing Point Hint

A Vanishing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of a vanishing shape. A
shape will vanish from the source drawing when there is no corresponding
shape in the destination drawing. If you do not place a Vanishing Point Hint tocontrol the point of disappearance, the shape will vanish into its centre.
Vanishing Point Hint points are green in colour.

Appearing Point Hint

An Appearing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of an appearing shape.
A shape will appear in the destination drawing when there is no corresponding
shape in the source drawing. If you do not place an Appearing Point Hint tocontrol the point of appearance, the shape will appear from its centre andexpand outwards.
Appearing Point Hint points are violet in colour.

Switch Between
Morphing Key
Drawings

Toggles Toggles between the two key drawings in your morphing sequence.
This option is useful while setting hints. You can use the default keyboard
shortcut F4 to toggle between your drawings.

Suggest HInts

Automatically sets Automatically sets hint points on key drawings as a help
tool. If you're not sure where to set hints, you can use this option. It will set themain hints which you can then fine tune.

Hide Hints

Temporarily Temporarily hides the hint points from the key drawings. Use thisoption when you have a series of hint points hiding some lines you would like to
see.

156

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Colour View Menu
The Colour View menu lets you access commands related to the Colour view such as creating new palettes, adding
new colour swatches, and displaying the Tint panel.
How to access the Colour menul

In the upper-left corner of the Colour view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Palettes
Creates a new colour palette.

New

By default, Toon Boom Harmony is set to the Basic mode. For simple
productions, it is recommended to use the Basic mode. This setting stores thepalettes automatically for you and saves them at the Scene level. When you use
the Advanced Palette Lists mode, you can decide at which level you want to store
your palettes: Environment, Job, Scene, or Element.

Link

Lets you access other palettes created in the project and link them to your scene.

ImportImports a colour palette located on your hard drive.

RemoveDeletes the selected colour palette.

RenameLets you five the selected colour palette a new name.

Duplicate

Creates a copy of the original palette, using the same names and colour values,
but has a different ID and is independent from the original palette. This ensuresthat both the duplicate and original palettes are completely independent.

Clone

Creates a copy of the master palette. The colours in each palette have the same
properties. The colours have the same identification number pointing to the same
colour zones, but they can have different names and RGBA values.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette containing the pencil line textures.

Move Up

Moves the selected colour palette up one level.

Move Down

Moves the selected colour palette down one level.

Colour Editor

Opens the Colour Editor where you can pick and edit colour swatches.

Tint Panel

Opens the Tint panel where you can modify a series of colours to blend a tint inthem or offset their RGBA values.

Display Colour Values

Display the colour values beside their colour swatches in the palette list.

Colours
Cut

Cuts the selected colour swatch from the palette.

Copy

Copies the selected colour swatch which you can paste in a different palette.

Copy Colour ID

Copies a colour swatch's colour ID so you can keep a reference file of colour IDs
or use them with custom plug-ins. Example of a colour ID: 075cf5b552401130.

Paste Colour Values

Pastes the colour value of the copied swatch over an existing colour swatch.

Paste As New Colours

Creates a new colour swatch from the colour value of the copied swatch.

157

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Paste As Clones

Pastes a copied colour to a new palette as a clone of the original one. Both colour
use the same colour ID. They have to be in different palettes.

New

Creates a new colour swatch from the colour swatch that was last selected.

Edit

Opens the Colour Picker window in which you can edit the selected colour
swatch.

DeleteDeletes the selected colour swatch from the palette.

New Texture

Lets you add a bitmap colour swatch to your palette. You can load photos andtextures and paint your drawings with it. The bitmap image must be a .tga or .psd
file format.

Edit Texture

Opens the browser to replace the texture used in a textured colour swatch. Allzones using the swatch will be updated with the new texture.

Scale Down Texture

Lets you set a new maximum texture size or scaling factor.

New Default Colour

Creates a new colour using the default colour set in the preferences.

Protect Colour

Locks a selected colour, so if you ever paint over it accidentally, the work alreadydone will not be affected. You can also block the filling colours if you painted all of
the animation in Line Art and plan to repaint the lines.

Swatch Mode

Displays the colour swatches with its corresponding name inside the swatch.
When this option is not selected, the names of the colour swatches are displayed
beside the swatch.

Independent Bitmap
ColourBitmap colour selection is independent from the vector colour selection.

Bitmap Colour Sliders
RGB

Displays the colour picking sliders as RGB (red, green, blue).

HSV

Displays the colour picking sliders as HSV (hue, saturation, value).

158

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Drawing View Menu
The Drawing View menu lets you access tools, set morphing parameters, lock or unlock layers, and select elementsin the Drawing view.
How to access the Drawing menul

In the upper-left corner of the Drawing view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit
Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing, Timeline
and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one when moving
them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Select Stroke With
Current Colour

Select the strokes that contain the currently selected colour.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command will
deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were not selected.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animation table.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like an animation table.

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Switch to Colour Art

Displays the Colour Art layer. When switching art layers, you can edit the
selected layer without affecting the other one.

Preview Line Art
and Colour Art

Displays all Art layers.

View

Show Grid: Displays the grid.
Grid

Grid Outline Only: Displays the outline of the grid only.
Underlay: Displays the grid under the drawing elements.

159

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Overlay: Displays the grid over the drawing elements.
Square Grid: Displays a standard square grid.
12 Field Grid: Displays a 12-field size grid.
16 Field Grid: Displays a 16-field size grid.
Show Onion Skin: Lets Lets you preview the previous and next drawings. By
default, the previous drawings appear in a shade of red and the next drawings are
displayed with a shade of green. You can change these colours in the Preferences
dialog box.
Show Centre Line:No Previous Drawing: Displays no previous drawing.
Previous Drawing: Displays the previous drawing.
Previous Two Drawings: Displays the previous two drawings.
Previous Three Drawings: Displays the previous three drawings.
No Next Drawing: Displays no next drawing.
Onion Skin

Next Drawing: Displays the next drawing.
Next Two Drawings: Displays the next two drawings.
Next Three Drawings: Displays the next three drawings.
Reduce One Previous Drawing: Reduces the number of previous visible
drawings by one.
Add One Previous Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of previous visible
drawings.
Reduce One Next Drawing: Reduces the number of next visible drawings byone.
Add One Next Drawing: Adds one drawing to the number of next visible
drawings.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see Turns on the light table so you can see theprevious and subsequent active layers in washed-out colours. It is useful forseeing the other layers when designing, animating or cleaning up your animation.

Backlight

Produces Produces a silhouette effect by changing the drawing’s coloured areas
into a single dark, solid colour. Use this to verify the completeness of the ink andpaint process. Any unpainted zones can be seen as the light shows through theunpainted areas of the silhouetted drawing.

Show Strokes

Displays the strokes in your drawings so that the invisible lines stand out.

Show Strokes with
Colour Wash

Displays strokes with washed-out colours.

Highlight Selected
ColourIdentify a selected colour swatch used in a drawing.

Show Morphing Key
Drawing Thumbnail

When using the Morphing tools, this displays the source or destination drawing asa reference in the bottom corner of the Drawing view.

Show

Show Scan Information Displays a status bar showing the scanning information at the bottom of the Draw-

160

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

ing and Camera view.
Desk
No Thumbnail
Small Thumbnail
Changes the size of the drawing desk thumbnails.
Medium Thumbnail
Large Thumbnail
Remove Selected
Drawing

Clears selected drawing from drawing desk.

Remove All Drawings

Clears all drawing from drawing desk.

Drawing
Remove Dirt: Opens the Remove Dirt dialog box where you can specify the
number and size of dots removal from a selected drawing.
Remove Hair: Opens the Remove Hair dialog box where you can specify the
number and length of hairs for removal from a selected drawing. This removes any
small strokes created in the Colour Art layer from very thick lines or filled zones.
Increase the value to select larger strokes for removal from the drawing.
Close Gaps: Closes small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes
between the two closest points to close the colour zone. You do not need to trace
directly over the gap. You can draw it a few millimeters away. The two closest
points automatically close the gap.
Clean Up

Remove Art Inside Selection: Removes any art inside a selection. It is
recommended that you clean your Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if you
work in high definition resolutions.
Remove Art Inside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art inside all
drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Remove Art Outside Selection: Removes any art existing outside a selection. It
is recommended that you clean the Colour Art level as well. If you have a stroke
accumulation in the Colour Art, it can result in large output files, especially if you
work in high-definition resolutions.
Remove Art Outside Selection On All Drawings: Removes any art outside all
drawings selected with the Permanent Selection option in the Select tool.
Unpaint Selection: Unpaints any art existing inside a selection.
Unpaint Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art contained inside a selection
on all the drawings within the same layer.

Paint

Unpaint Outside Selection: Unpaints any art existing outside a selection. If noselection have been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be
unpainted.
Unpaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Unpaints all art outside a selection
on all the drawings within the same layer.
Repaint Selection: Repaints any art inside a selection.
Repaint Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art inside a selection on all thedrawings contained within the same layer.

161

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Repaint Outside Selection: Repaints any art outside a selection. If no selection
has been drawn using the Select tool, the entire drawing will be repainted.
Repaint Outside Selection on All Drawings: Repaints any art outside aselection on all the drawings contained within the same layer.
Pencil Lines to Brush Strokes: Converts the selected centreline pencil strokes
into contour strokes brush lines.
Brush Strokes to Pencil Lines: Converts selected contour strokes into
centreline pencil strokes. The brush stroke thickness will be lost.
ConvertStrokes to Pencil Lines: Converts the selected invisible line to a pencil line.
Brush Apart Text Layers: Text is treated as a single drawing object. This
separates the text so each character becomes an individual drawing object you
can select and modify independently.
Flatten: Merges Merges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If
you draw new lines to fix a drawing or line with many brush strokes, it can be
useful to flatten them all into a single shape. By default, lines are drawn one on topof each other. If you intend to repaint the lines or modify their shape, it will beeasier if they are flattened.
Smooth: Smooths selected drawing strokes and removes extra points.
Create Contour Strokes: Adds a permanent invisible line around a shape thatwas drawn directly in Harmony. This allows you to unpaint lines with the Paint tool
but maintain the shape of the lines, should you need to repaint later.
Remove Contour Strokes: Remove any permanently invisible lines that werecreated while scanning and vectorizing drawings or manually adding contour
strokes. This is useful for removing the intersection triangles created during vectorization.
Remove Extra Strokes: Removes strokes inside painted area. This option only
works after the painted drawing is flattened.
Optimize

Optimize: Reduces Reduces the number of layers, such as overlapping brushstrokes, in the selected drawing objects. Drawing objects will only be flattened
and optimized if the selected objects do not change the appearance of the final
image when they are merged.
Crop Brush Textures: Crops Crops an unnecessarily large texture bitmap thatlies unseen beneath the vector contour of a textured line. This often occurs when
you cut and paste textured lines from one drawing into another. If you cut a portion
from a textured line and paste it into a different drawing, Harmony pastes theentire unseen texture bitmap from the source drawing into the new one, even if you
only took a small portion of the source drawing. Using the Crop Brush Texture
command will crop away extraneous texture that does not touch the vector area. If
there are many textured lines in your scene, this will greatly reduce the file size.
Reduce Drawing Texture Resolution:
When you import and vectorize as texture (colour) a high resolution image, thesize of your drawing can be heavy. You can reduce the size and resolution of the
textures in a drawing.

Arrange

Bring to Front: Moves the selected art to the front (on top).
Bring Forward: Moves the selected art one level forward (closer to the front).

162

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Send Backward: Moves the selected art one level lower (behind).
Send to Back: Moves the selected art behind everything (bottom / back).
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.
Transform

Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Rotate 180: Rotates the current selection 180 degrees.

Creates Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
Create Empty Drawing already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets another drawing, key exposure or a blank cell.

Duplicate Drawings

Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets you modify anexisting drawing but retain the original. When duplicating a drawing, the selected
cell is replaced with the new drawing. The exposure of the original drawing thatwas on the current cell is removed. The original drawing is not deleted from the project folder or other cells in which it is exposed.
When duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing.
The exposure of the original drawing that was on the current cell is removed. The
original drawing is not deleted from the project folder or other cells in which it is
exposed.

Delete Selected
Drawings

Permanently removes selected drawings. Once you save your project, thesedrawings cannot be recovered.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.

Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded layers (line art,
colour art, overlay, underlay) and create invisible strokes to paint your drawings on
Create Colour Art From separate layers. This provides more inking and painting flexibility.
Line Art
You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on any of the four
embedded layers.
Automatically creates a matte from a selected drawing or all drawings on a layer.
Generate Auto-Matte

Opens the auto-Matte dialog box where you can set the radius of the lines
depending on how precise or rough your line is.
You can also select the source and destinatin layers from which the matte will becreated.

Adjust Line Texture
Opacity

Lets you adjust the contrast and opacity of textured lines in a drawing.

Change Bitmap
Drawing Resolution

Lets you Lets you change the resolution of bitmap art for individual drawings. You
can reduce the resolution of your bitmap file as well as increase it. Be careful
because enlarging the bitmap resolution on an existing drawing will result in a lossof quality.Harmony will perform a pixel smoothing pass (resampling) and create
additional pixels to avoid losing too much quality, but only to a certain extent. Thisfeature is very useful when you need to have a full resolution of a bitmap image(such as imported bitmaps as .psd or .tga for the background) for tracing to createa matte directly in Harmony.By default, Harmony creates small thumbnail images
when imported as bitmap in order to increase performance by using a small

163

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

thumbnail image instead of using the original large size bitmap for animation workin Harmony. This will make difficult to view details or trace due to the low
resolution (blurry). This option temporary increases the resolution of bitmaps up to
their original bitmap resolution to make tracing easier.
Previous Drawing
Next Drawing
Previous Layer
Next Layer

Once a cell is selected in the Timeline or Xsheet view, you can navigate between
the drawings, frames, and layers. Displays the previous drawing, next drawing,
previous layer or next layer.
Displays the previous drawing, next drawing, previous layer or next layer.
Toggle Current Colour Protection: Temporarily enables/disables the Colour Protection feature so you can quickly correct wrongly inked or painted areas under protected colour without readjusting the Current Colour Protection option.

Colour Protection

Respect Colour Protection: In the Colour view, you can protect a colour swatch
to avoid repainting or unpainting the zones linked to that swatch. If you using the
Paint tool and this option is deselected, you will repaint or unpaint the protectedcolours on your drawings until you enable the option again.

Drawing Tools
SelectLets you select elements from the Camera and Drawing views.

Contour Editor

Lets you add, remove or modify points on a vector line and control them.

Pencil Editor

Lets you modify the thick and thin contour of a pencil line (basically a central
vector shape). Shape control points along the central spine allow you to adjust thestroke curve and position.

CutterLets you cut a drawing area to move, copy, cut or delete it.

Smooth Editor

Lets you optimize contours and reduce the number of points on a line.

Perspective

Lets you deform a drawing selection and alter its perspective.

Envelope

Lets you deform and warp part of a drawing using a grid envelope and Bezier
handles.

Reposition All
Drawings

Lets you reposition, scale, rotate or skew all drawing strokes on every drawing
included in a layer.

Drawing Pivot

Lets you set pivots on a characters, drawings and symbols.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with a thick and thin line
effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing the final images, such as character nodes,
cut-out puppet and clean animation. Creates a central vector shape.

Text

Lets you type text in your project using various fonts and text attributes.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for precisely erasing parts of a drawing.

Dropper

Lets you pick a colour directly from a drawing.

Morphing

Lets you control a morphing sequence by placing different types of hints to help
Harmony morph the animation the way you want it.

164Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Line
Rectangle
EllipseLets you draw straight lines which you can then edit.

Polyline
Paint

Lets you paint both empty and filled zones.

Ink

Lets you paint only the segment you clicked on between two intersections to be
painted.

Repaint Brush
Close Gap

Lets you close small gaps in a drawing by creating small, invisible strokes
between the two closest points.

StrokeLets you draw stokes, connect line ends and flatten lines.

Edit Gradient/Texture

Lets you modify the position of a gradient or texture colour within a specific zone.

Hand

Lets you pan the Drawing or Camera view.

Zoom

Lets you zoom in and out of the Drawing or Camera view.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Drawing or Camera view just like with a real animation disc.
Can also be used in Perspective view.

Morphing
Morphing

Contour Hint

Lets you control a morphing sequence by placing different types of hints to help
Harmony morph the animation the way you want it.
The Contour Hint point is used on the colour fill zone and brush lines; in otherwords, on Contour vectors. It allows you to control the line thickness and contour
position. Also, if a contour is not animated correctly, you can use hints to correct
the animation. For example, if a flag is not waving properly.
When adding a Contour Hint point, make sure to place it far enough away from thecontour so you can see it snap to the contour.
Contour Hint points are yellow.

Zone Hint

The Zone Hint point is used on a colour zone to control the proximity rule. The
Zone Hint is placed in the centre of the colour zone. Sometimes a colour zone is
not associated with the corresponding one by default. For example, in a splash
animation there are many water droplets that are the same colour. Harmony
automatically morphs the droplet to the nearest one. This is not always the one
you may have predicted. A Zone Hint will force a colour zone to morph withanother one.
Zone Hint points are cyan in colour.

Pencil Hint

A Pencil Hint point is used to control a pencil line, also known as central vector. It
can be used on drawings that were done using the Pencil, Polyline, Ellipse, Lineand Rectangle tools. Like the Contour Hint, the Pencil Hint snaps to the central
vector. Make sure to place it far enough away from the line so you will see it snap
when you move it.
Pencil Hint points are magenta in colour.

Vanishing Point Hint

A Vanishing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of a vanishing shape. A
shape will vanish from the source drawing when there is no corresponding shape

165

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

in the destination drawing. If you do not place a Vanishing Point Hint to control the
point of disappearance, the shape will vanish into its centre.
Vanishing Point Hint points are green in colour.

Appearing Point Hint

An Appearing Point Hint is used to control the trajectory of an appearing shape. A
shape will appear in the destination drawing when there is no corresponding shapein the source drawing. If you do not place an Appearing Point Hint to control the
point of appearance, the shape will appear from its centre and expand outwards.
Appearing Point Hint points are violet in colour.

Switch Between
Morphing Key
Drawings

Toggles Toggles between the two key drawings in your morphing sequence. This
option is useful while setting hints. You can use the default keyboard shortcut F4
to toggle between your drawings.

Go to First Frame

Goes to the first frame of your morphing sequence.

Go to Previous Frame

Goes to the previous frame of the selected frame in the morphing sequence.

Go to Next Frame

Goes to the next frame of the selected frame in the morphing sequence.

Go to Last Frame

Goes to the last frame of your morphing sequence.

Suggest HInts

Automatically sets Automatically sets hint points on key drawings as a help tool.
If you're not sure where to set hints, you can use this option. It will set the main
hints which you can then fine tune.

Hide Hints

Temporarily Temporarily hides the hint points from the key drawings. Use thisoption when you have a series of hint points hiding some lines you would like to
see.

166

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Function View Menu
The Functions View menu lets you do many things in the Camera view, including selecting and editing objects indifferent views, changing the display, setting morphing parameters, accessing tools and many more.
How to access the Function menul

In the upper-left corner of the Function view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit
Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select Next Keyframe

Selects the next keyframe.

Select Previous
Keyframe

Selects the previous keyframe.

Select Left Handle

Selects the left handle of the selected keyframe.

Select Right Handle

Selects the right handle of the selected keyframe.

Select All

Selects all objects in the Function view. This helps you manage multiple objects
as one.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Function view.

Show Current Frame

Displays the current frame

Toggle Grid

Enables the display of the grid.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

View

Function List
Auto Load Selection
Clear
Load Selection
Add Selection
Remove Selection
Show Motion:
Show

Show Rotation:Show Scale:167

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Show Skew:
Show Other:168

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Library View Menu
The Library View menu lets you access commands specific to the Library view, such as opening a Library or getting
the rights to modify a library folder.
How to access the Library menul

In the upper-left corner of the Library view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

View
List

Displays the contents of the selected folder as a list.

Thumbnails

Displays the contents of the selected folder as a thumbnails.

Details

Displays the details of the selected file.

Generate Thumbnails

Creates a thumbnail to display in the preview window.

Edit
Creates a new symbol from a drawing or part of a drawing in the
Drawing or Camera view, or a layer in the Timeline view.
New Symbol

If your selection is in the Timeline , the new symbol appears in the Symbol folder.
The current selection is not replaced by the new symbol. The new symbol only
appears in the library. You must drag it into your scene to use it.
If your selection is in the Drawing or Camera view, the new symbol appears in the
Symbol folder and in the Timeline view as a new layer.

Cut

Cuts the selected file in the Library view.

Copy

Copies the selected file in the Library view.

Paste

Pastes the selected file in the Library view.

DeleteDeletes the selected file in the Library view.

Delete Thumbnails

Deletes any thumbnails that were generated for display in the preview window.
Places you inside the symbol where you can edit it.

Edit Symbol

To return to the project's timeline, click the Top
button in the Camera view's
top-left corner, press Ctrl + Shift + E (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + Shift + E (Mac OS
X).

Remove Unused Files

Removes any files not in use in the selected template.

Rename Template

Lets you rename a selected template.

Import Files

Imports vector files such as AI, PDF, and SWF. You requires the right to modify
the library in which you want to import the files.

Folders
New Folder

Creates a new folder in the Library view. Before you can create a new folder, youmust have the right to modify the folder in which you are creating the new folder.

RefreshUpdates the view and its contents.

Open LibraryLets you open a library on your computer.
169

Chapter 3: Menus

Close LibraryView Menus

Unlinks a library folder from your library list.

170

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Model View Menu
The Model View menu lets you load models and view them in different ways, as well as access some drawing tools.
How to access the Model menul

In the upper-left corner of the Model view, click the menu

button.

Command

Description

Previous Model

Shows the previous model loaded in the Model view.

Next Model

Shows the next model loaded in the Model view.

Import Model

Imports a TVG drawing as a model in the Model view.

Use Current Drawing as Model Loads the currently selected drawing in the scene as a model in the Model view.
Load Default Models

Loads TVG drawings placed in a custom models folder located in the scenefolder.

Clear Model

Removes the model from the Model view.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Rotate View CW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees clockwise, like an animation table.

Rotate View CCW

Rotates the Camera view 30 degrees counter-clockwise, like an animation table.

Reset Rotation

Resets the view’s rotation to its default position.

SelectActivates the Select tool. This tools is also available on the Tools toolbar.

Cutter Selection

Allows to cut a section of the model to paste it in your scene.

Dropper

Activates the Dropper tool. This tools is also available on the Tools toolbar.

Zoom

Activates the Zoom tool. This tools is also available on the Tools toolbar.

171

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Perspective View Menu
The Perspective View menu lets you select and edit elements, manipulate the view during scene setup, setparameters for animation and access animation tools.
How to access the Perspective menul

In the upper-left corner of the Perspective view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit
Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties
to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as
one when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were
not selected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, thiscommand will deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing thatwere not selected.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Parent Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view
skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in theTimeline view.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timelineview.

Zoom In

Zooms into the view, towards the view's pivot point, up to 80,000%.

Zoom Out

Zooms out of the view, away from the view's pivot point, up to 1%.

Move Forward

Moves infinitely forward into the view, using the direction set by the current
position and angle of rotation.

View

172

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Move Backward

Moves infinitely backwards out of the view, using the direction set by thecurrent position and angle of rotation.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Light Table

Turns on the light table so you can see Turns on the light table so you can
see the previous and subsequent active layers in washed-out colours. It isuseful for seeing the other layers when designing, animating or cleaning up
your animation.

Camera Cone

Displays the camera cone.

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

Animation

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale,skew, etc. of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off theAnimate mode to reposition objects for the entire scene. When the Animate
mode is disabled, keyframes are not created when an object's parameterschange.

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the currently selected frame in the Timeline view.

Insert Control Point

Adds a control point to the motion path at the currently selected frame. This
control point does not appear in the Timeline, but can be used to reshape
the motion path. In order for this command to work, layers must be set to
3D Path.

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing
Set Stop-Motion Keyframe
remains still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing
pops to its new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. In motion keyframes, there is no automaticinterpolation created between the selected point and the next one. The layer
will maintain its position until the animation reaches the frame of the next
point and will then jump to the new position. Deselect this option to
generate interpolation and get the layer to progressively move to the next
position.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip

Flip Scale X: Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal andvertical axes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flipon your drawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original Xaxis of the layer and flips the element following it.
Flip Scale Y: Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips theelement following it.

173

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Opens the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box where you canchange the velocity of selection functions.

Linear Motion

Straightens out the motion path on either sides of the selected control point.

Lock in Time

Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe) or only
locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely as otherpoints are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging

Locks the Z value when you're animating in 3D space. This means you can
only reposition your object along the x and y axes.

Substitute Drawing
Previous

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.

Substitute Drawing Next
Select Previous Keyframe/PointSelect the previous keyframe/point.

Select Next Keyframe/PointSelect Next Keyframe /Point
Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.
Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.

Lock

Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation
angle will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all thetransformation values will be reset.

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer.
Your keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value.
All transformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z
position. This is useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often
have a particular Z ordering for the different views of a character. You mightwant to reset the transformation, but not necessarily the Z position.

Animation Tools
Transform

Lets you create a global selection so you can reposition, scale, rotate andskew as one unit, which is useful for cut-out characters.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an
object up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale
the element while maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you
move them towards or away from the camera.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

174

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Spline Offset

Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If
your elements were drawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area, it will look like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing. Also,
if you have several elements attached to one trajectory, you might wantyour trajectory to be at a different location to represent the group's motion
better.

175

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Side View Menu
The Side View menu lets you position elements in 3D space, set parameters for animation and access animation
tools—see Side View on page 395.
How to access the Side menul

In the upper-left corner of the Side view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit
Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one
when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were
not selected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, thiscommand will deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing thatwere not selected.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Parent Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view
skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timelineview.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

View

176

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Camera Cone

Displays the camera cone.

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

Animation

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale, skew,
etc. of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off the Animate mode
to reposition objects for the entire scene. When the Animate mode is disabled,
keyframes are not created when an object's parameters change.

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Insert Control Point
Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. In motion keyframes, there is no automaticinterpolation created between the selected point and the next one. The layer
will maintain its position until the animation reaches the frame of the next point
and will then jump to the new position. Deselect this option to generateinterpolation and get the layer to progressively move to the next position.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip

Flip Scale X: Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal andvertical axes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on
your drawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original X-axis of
the layer and flips the element following it.
Flip Scale Y: Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element
following it.

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Opens the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box where you can change
the velocity of selection functions.

Linear Motion

Transforms a curved path to a linear path removing tension, bias, andcontinuity.

Lock in Time

Indicates Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe)or only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely asother points are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging

Keeps the Z value constant when you drag a character using the Transform orTranslate tool.

Substitute Drawing
Previous
Substitute Drawing
Next

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.

177Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Select Previous
Keyframe /Point

Select the previous keyframe/point.

Select Next Keyframe/PointSelect Next Keyframe /Point
Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.
Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.

Lock

Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation angle
will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all the transformation
values will be reset.

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer.
Your keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value. Alltransformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position.
This is useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often have aparticular Z ordering for the different views of a character. You might want toreset the transformation, but not necessarily the Z position.

Animation Tools
Transform

Lets you create a global selection so you can reposition, scale, rotate andskew as one unit, which is useful for cut-out characters.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an
object up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale theelement while maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you movethem towards or away from the camera.

Spline Offset

Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If yourelements were drawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area,
it will look like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing. Also, if you haveseveral elements attached to one trajectory, you might want your trajectory to
be at a different location to represent the group's motion better.

178

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Timeline View Menu
The Timeline View menu lets you modify layers, keyframe and timing.
How to access the Timeline menul

In the upper-left corner of the Timeline view, click the menu

Parameter

button.

Description

ImportFrom Scanner

Imports drawings from a TWAIN scanner.

ImagesImports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.

SoundsLets you import sound files into your project.

Cut cells from Xsheet

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Edit

Copy cells from Xsheet Copies selected objects and properties.
Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

Paste Special

Lets you copy and paste selected drawings into a different layer or paste theselection in the same layer to duplicate the drawings.

Paste Special Again

Pastes new drawings with the previous Paste Special settings.

Paste Cycle

Cycles a portion of an animation. You can increase or decrease the number ofcycles to paste and select a type of cycle: Normal, Reverse, Forward-Reverse
and Reverse-Forward.

Paste Reverse

Reverses the timing of drawings or keyframes in range of selection after copying.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Modify Paste Presets

Lets you modify existing presets when pasting keyframes and exposures. There
are three presets you can modify: the default presets for both key frames andexposures, key frames only and exposures only.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one
when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were notselected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, this command will
deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing that were not selected.

Select Synced Layers

Selects all the layers synced to the selected layer. The selected layer must be a
synced in order for this option to be enabled.

Select Child Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view skipping effects in the hierarchy.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

179Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in the Timelineview.

Select Parent Skipping
Effects

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view skipping
effects in the hierarchy.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timelineview.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.
Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.
Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.

Lock

Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Tag

Timeline Tag: You can tag elements in the Timeline or Node views to view only
those elements. When you tag elements, an asterisk appears beside the item in
the Timeline view. Once your elements are tagged and you have switched over toView Tagged Layers mode, the Timeline view will display only tagged elements.
The red bar on the left of the layers indicates you are in this view mode.
Timeline Untag: Untags selected layer in the Timeline view.
Timeline Untag All: Untags all tagged elements.
Timeline Untag All Others: Untags all elements except the selected one.
Mark Current Frame: Places a scene marker on the current frame on which theplayhead is parked. The marker appears in the frame counter area of the Timeline
view. You can customize the colour of the scene marker and add text to display
as a tooltip when you hover over the marker—see .

Scene Markers

Create Scene Marker: Creates a scene marker from a selected frame range inthe frame counter area of the Timeline view.
Edit Scene Marker: Lets you edit an existing scene marker.
NOTE: It's important to select the entire length of the scene marker, otherwise
the Timeline Scene Marker dialog box will not open for editing.
Delete Scene Marker: Removes an existing scene marker.

Share Functions

Lets you share an existing function curve. By default, all function curves can only
be used and modified using their original parameter. If you want another layer orparameter to use the same function curve, you must share it.

Cycle to Next View
Mode

Displays the new view mode.

Normal View Mode

Displays the Normal view mode, the default in the Timeline view. It shows
everything connected to the chosen display. In this mode, anything not connectedto the currently set default display will not be shown in the Timeline view. This
also means that you cannot add certain elements to the Timeline view, as bydefault, when added they are not connected to any display or composite node. An

View

180

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

example of such an element is a peg.
Selection Only Mode

Displays only elements currently selected in the Camera or Node view. This
makes it easier to concentrate on one or a few elements at a time.
Lets you see only elements which have been assigned a Tagged status. An itemthat has been tagged will appear in the Timeline view with a small asterisk besideits name.

View Tagged Layers

Once your elements are tagged and you have switched over to View Tagged
Layers mode, the Timeline view will display only tagged elements. The red bar on
the left of the layers indicates you are in this view mode. While in this mode, theasterisks are not displayed beside the tagged elements.

Show Functions
Centre on Selection

Centers the Timeline view on the selected layer. This useful when you have manylayers in the Timeline view, you may find it hard to locate which one is selected.

Change Track Colour

Opens the colour picker window to modify the colour of the selected layer.

Default Track Colour

Resets the layer colour.

Collapse/Expand

Toggles between expanding and collapsing all parent layers in the Timeline view.

Collapse All

Collapses all parented layers in the Timeline view.

Expand All

Expands all parented layers in the Timeline view.

Set Tempo Marker

Lets you set a marker that synchronizes your animation with a musical score.
This lets you reproduce the FPB (Frames Per Beat) and use the tempo signature
as tempo markers. The Xsheet view lets you pace your animation according to
the tempo or beat of the soundtrack music or to any rhythmic sound, such as theticking of a clock or water leaking from a spout. See .

LayersAdd Synced Drawing Layer

Creates a new drawing layer whose timing is synced immediately with the currently selected drawing layer.

Sync Layer With

Opens the Convert to Synced Drawing Layer dialog box. In this dialog box, every
other drawing layer in the project can be selected, parented and have its timing
synced to the currently selected layer.

Unsync Layer

Unsyncs the parent layer of a synced pairing, when the child layer is selected.

181

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Top View Menu
The Top View menu lets you position elements in 3D space, set parameters for animation and access animation
tools—see Top View on page 405.
How to access the Top menul

In the upper-left corner of the Top view, click the menu

Commandbutton.

Description

Edit
Cut Drawing Object

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Copy Drawing Object

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

Delete Drawing Object

Removes selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one
when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Invert Selection

Deselects the currently selected items and selects all other items that were
not selected. For example, if some lines are selected in a drawing, thiscommand will deselect them and select any other lines in the drawing thatwere not selected.

Select Child

Lets you select the first element parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Children

Lets you select all elements parented to the selected peg element in theTimeline view.

Select Parent

Lets you select the parent of the selected element in the Timeline view.

Select Previous Sibling

Lets you select the previous element (above current element) in the Timelineview.

Select Next Sibling

Lets you select the next element (below current element) in the Timeline view.

Zoom In

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Layer Properties

Shows or hides the Layer Properties view.

Camera Cone

Displays the camera cone.

Control

Displays the controls of the selected element.

View

182

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Hide All Controls

Hides the controls of the selected element.

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

Animation

AnimateEnables the Animate mode which records the position, rotation, scale, skew,
etc. of objects as keyframes in the Timeline view. Turn off the Animate mode
to reposition objects for the entire scene. When the Animate mode is disabled,
keyframes are not created when an object's parameters change.

Insert Keyframe

Adds a keyframe to the selected cell in the Timeline view.

Insert Control Point
Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. In motion keyframes, there is no automaticinterpolation created between the selected point and the next one. The layer
will maintain its position until the animation reaches the frame of the next point
and will then jump to the new position. Deselect this option to generateinterpolation and get the layer to progressively move to the next position.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the current selection horizontally.
Flip Vertical: Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip

Flip Scale X: Once your drawing layer is rotated, the original horizontal andvertical axes change. The Flip Scale X and Flip Scale Y will perform a flip on
your drawing layer following its original axis.Remembers the original X-axis of
the layer and flips the element following it.
Flip Scale Y: Remembers the original Y-axis of the layer and flips the element
following it.

Set Ease for Multiple
Parameters

Opens the Set Ease for Multiple Parameters dialog box where you can change
the velocity of selection functions.

Linear Motion
Lock in Time

Indicates Indicates whether the point is locked to a specific frame (keyframe)or only locked to a specific position and the curve can flow through it freely asother points are being added, moved, or adjusted (control point).

No Z Dragging
Substitute Drawing
Previous
Substitute Drawing
Next

Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.

Select Previous
Keyframe /Point

Select the previous keyframe/point.

Select Next Keyframe/PointSelect Next Keyframe /Point

Lock

Lock: Locks Locks one or a multiple selection of layers.
Unlock: Unlocks Unlocks one or a multiple selection of locked layers.

183

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Lock All: Locks Locks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Unlock All: Unlocks Unlocks all the layers in the Timeline view.
Lock All Others: Locks Locks every layer except the selected ones.

Reset

Returns Returns the value of the selected element to the initial value of theactive tool. For example, if the Rotate tool is active, the transformation angle
will be reset to 0 and if the Transform tool is active, all the transformation
values will be reset.

Reset All

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame in a selected layer.
Your keyframe will remain, but all the values will return to the starting value. Alltransformations are reset regardless of the tool you're using.

Reset All Except Z

Resets Resets all transformations on the current frame except the Z position.
This is useful when doing cut-out animation. Cut-out puppets often have aparticular Z ordering for the different views of a character. You might want toreset the transformation, but not necessarily the Z position.

Animation Tools
Transform

Lets you create a global selection so you can reposition, scale, rotate andskew as one unit, which is useful for cut-out characters.

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element. You can scale an
object up to make it larger or down to make it smaller. Press Shift to scale theelement while maintaining its proportions.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you movethem towards or away from the camera.

Spline Offset

Lets you Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If yourelements were drawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area,
it will look like the trajectory is not aligned with your drawing. Also, if you haveseveral elements attached to one trajectory, you might want your trajectory to
be at a different location to represent the group's motion better.

184

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Xsheet View Menu
The Xsheet View menu lets you modify columns, keyframe and timing.
How to access the Xsheet menul

In the upper-left corner of the Xsheet view, click the menu

Parameter

button.

Description

File
Images: Imports bitmap images which you can choose to vectorize.
ImportFrom Scanner: Imports drawings from a TWAIN scanner.
Sounds: Lets you import sound files into your project.

Print

Prints the exposure sheet so you can take it to your animation table, provide a
copy to the animator, or create your Xsheet skeleton directly in Harmony.

Cut cells from Xsheet

Removes selected objects. You can then paste the object or its properties toanother object.

Edit

Copy cells from Xsheet Copies selected objects and properties.
Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you select in a view.

Paste Special

Lets you copy and paste selected drawings into a different layer or paste theselection in the same layer to duplicate the drawings.

Paste Special Again

Pastes new drawings with the previous Paste Special settings.

Paste Cycle

Cycles a portion of an animation. You can increase or decrease the number ofcycles to paste and select a type of cycle: Normal, Reverse, Forward-Reverse
and Reverse-Forward.

Paste Reverse

Reverses the timing of drawings or keyframes in range of selection after copying.

DeleteRemoves selected objects.

Select All

Selects all drawing objects in the current drawing window in the Drawing,
Timeline and Camera views. This helps you manage multiple objects as one
when moving them.

Deselect All

Deselects all selected objects in the Drawing and Camera views.

Insert Mode

Adds a new value or a new value sequence over existing ones, the new values
are inserted between the old ones. The existing timing sequence is pushed down
the column. The Insert mode opposite of the Overwrite mode, which is the Xsheet
default mode.
Lets you drag a cell to any other frame in the same column or into another column.

Gestural Drag Mode
This feature does not apply to Annotation columns.
Send to Function View

Sends selected objects to the Function view where you can edit and adjust its
function curve and parameters.

View

185

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Zoom In Xsheet

Zooms in the view.

Zoom Out Xsheet

Zooms out the view.

Reset Zoom

Resets the view’s zoom to its default position.

Reset Pan

Resets the view’s pan to its default position.

Reset View

Resets the view to its default position.

Set Tempo Marker
Collapse Selection:
Expand Selection:
Expand/Collapse
Collapse All:
Expand All:

Column Properties

Lets you rename a column, and enable or disable a column. To view additional
properties, select Edit > Preferences from the top menu. In the Preferences
dialog box, select the Advanced tab, then select the Advanced Element Mode
option.

Show Column List
Lets you add advanced column types to create particular animation paths. When
you create these columns, they are not linked automatically to any particular
Column Types Manager
drawing layer. You can create a motion path using these columns and then link or
unlink several drawing or peg layers to it.
Show Thumbnails

Displays column thumbnails making it easier to identify a particular column. This
option displays a small thumbnail picture of the current frame below the column
header.

Show Selection
Set Columns Width

Lets you change the column width (in pixels) and set it as the default.

All Columns to Default
Width

Returns all columns to their default width of 100 pixels.

Change Columns
ColourLets you customize the colour of the column by selecting one from the SelectColour dialog box. The colour you select is also reflected in the correspondng
layer in the Timeline view.

Default Column Colour

Removes the colour you assigned to a column (if any).

Hide Selected Columns Hides selected columns.
Unhide All Columns

Displays all columns.

Show Hidden Columns

Displays columns that were previously hidden.

Enable Playback

Plays back your animation in the Perspective view.

Columns
Add Columns

Lets you add a column. You can specify the column name, type, and set drawing
layer options in the Add Column dialog box that opens.

Delete Columns

Removes the selected column. You have the option to delete the associateddrawing files and element folders.

Clone Selected

Creates a copy of the selected column that is linked to the original. If a drawing is

186

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Columns: Drawings
Only
Clone Selected
Columns: Drawings
and Timing
Duplicate Selected
Columns

modified in the original or cloned column, both will be updated. However, cloned
columns can have different timings.
You can clone the drawings only or both the drawings and timing.
Creates an independent copy of the selected column. This useful when you needto modify the element independently, including the timing (exposure). Changes tothe original element do not propagate to the duplicate.
There are two methods of merging drawings.
•

You can merge selected drawings in adjacent elements. The columns andlayers will be left intact, and each new merged drawing will reside in theframes of the left-most column or lower layer.

•

You can merge elements. All drawings will be merged. Unused columns
and layers will be deleted, but the original drawing files are still accessible.

Merge Selected
Columns

FramesAdd Frames At Start
Adds the number of frames you specify to the end of the scene.
Add Frames At End
Add Frames Before
Selection
Adds the number of frames you specify before or after your selection.
Add Frames After
Selection
Remove Selected
FramesDeletes the selected frames from your scene.

Drawings
Create Empty Drawing

Duplicate Drawings

Creates Creates a drawing in the selected cell, replacing any drawing that may
already be exposed in that cell and the following ones until it meets another drawing, key exposure or a blank cell.
Lets you duplicate the drawing and work on a copy of it. This lets you modify anexisting drawing but retain the original. When duplicating a drawing, the selected
cell is replaced with the new drawing. The exposure of the original drawing thatwas on the current cell is removed. The original drawing is not deleted from the
project folder or other cells in which it is exposed.
When duplicating a drawing, the selected cell is replaced with the new drawing.
The exposure of the original drawing that was on the current cell is removed. The
original drawing is not deleted from the project folder or other cells in which it is
exposed.

Rename Drawing

Lets you give a selected drawing a new name.
Marks selected drawings as one of the following: Key, Breakdown, In-between,
RetakeKey, RetakeBD or RetakeIB.

Mark Drawing As

This helps to keep the Xsheet well organized while animating.
When working with several animators, directors or even other studios, thenecessity for retakes will often arise. Harmony gives you the possibility to marknew drawings as either Retake Key, Retake Breakdown, or Retake In-betweens.

187Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Substitute Drawing
Previous
Replaces the drawing or cell's symbol on the current frame by the next drawing.
Substitute Drawing
Next
Exposure

Increase

Adds Adds one more exposure to a selected cell; repeating this action adds anextra cell each time. This is an efficient way to extend a drawing's exposure andis always set in Insert mode. Increasing an exposure pushes the existing
exposure forward.

Decrease

Decreases exposure of a selected cell by one; repeating this action decreases
one exposure adds an extra cell each time. This is an efficient way to shorten adrawing's exposure. Decreasing an exposure pulls in the existing exposure.

Set Exposure toLets you set the exposure to 1, 2, 3 or a custom exposure.

Extend Exposure

Lets you extend the length of a selected cell.

Add Key Exposure

Adds a key exposure to the selected cell.

Remove Key Exposure

Removes only the key exposure (key frames) not all the exposures. The existing
key exposure is replaced by the preceding exposure.

Remove Duplicate Key
Exposure

When working with drawings to adjust the timing of a mouth in a lipsync, forexample, and forcing the use of specific key exposures, unnecessary key
exposures will be created. You can delete these duplicates without affecting therest of the drawing. The first drawing of the selection will be used for the range.

NOTE: Duplicate key exposures may occur when pasting with the Enforce
Key Exposure option selected.

Fill Empty Cells

Lets you Lets you fill empty cells to extend the exposure of single frame drawings
to fill the range of empty cells after each one.When creating drawings on cells thatare not side-by-side, the exposure of the first drawing no longer fills automatically.
You must select the frame range where you want your drawings to hold their
exposure up to the next drawing and use the Fill Empty Cells command.

Insert Blank Cell

Adds Adds an empty cell between other cells.

Clear Exposure

Removes the exposure from the selected cell.

Clear Exposure andPull

Replaces the exposure from the selected cell with exposures that follow it.

Fill Selection

Lets you Lets you fill the same value over an entire selection. The selection canbe over one cell, a cell range in one column, a cell range over many columns, anentire column, or many columns. You can use numbers, words, letters, or any
alphanumeric value.

Sequence Fill

Lets you Lets you create a numbered sequence over a selection. The sequencecan be forward, backward, single, double or higher increment, as a cycle, and soon. The selection can be over one cell or a cell range in one column or more or an
entire column or many entire columns.

Fill Cells Randomly

Lets you Lets you fill in random values over a selection. You can give a maximum

188Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

and a minimum value and create a range for Harmony to choose the random
values from. The selection can be over one cell or a cell range in one column or
more or an entire column or many entire columns.
Hold Exposure

Lets you expose a drawing for three, four, or five cells and so on.

MotionInsert Keyframe
Insert Keyframe andDuplicate Drawing
Delete Keyframes

Deletes the selected keyframes.

Go to Previous
Keyframe
Go to Next Keyframe
Set Stop-Motion
Keyframe

Sets a stop-motion keyframe which there is no computer-generated motion
between two keyframes. The segment is constant or flat. The drawing remains
still until the playback reaches the next keyframe, then the drawing pops to its
new location.

Set Motion Keyframe

Sets a motion keyframe. In motion keyframes, there is no automatic interpolation
created between the selected point and the next one. The layer will maintain its
position until the animation reaches the frame of the next point and will then jump
to the new position. Deselect this option to generate interpolation and get thelayer to progressively move to the next position.

Morphing
Create MorphingLets you control a morphing sequence by placing different types of hints to help
Harmony morph the animation the way you want it.

Delete Morphing

Once a cell is selected in a morphing sequence, deletes the entire sequence
between the two keyframes.

Insert Morphing Key
Drawing

Creates a morphing keyframe from a selected morphing frame.

Convert Morphing toDrawing

Lets Lets you convert your morphing inbetweens to real drawings you can edit.
This is useful when manually editing a morphing sequence or if you prefer to haveanimation timing in double frame (on twos) instead of single frame (on ones).

Lip-Sync
Change Mouth Shapeto

Lets you change the mouth shape to one of the following: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, X.

Auto Lip-Sync
Detection

Generates a sound detection for lip-sync.

Map Lip-Sync

Automatically maps Automatically maps drawings in an element to the mouth
chart you have generated for a sound. This can save time when you are lipsynching a voice track.

Sound Display
Sound Name

Shows the name of the sound file, as well as the file format. The line running
vertically through the column frames between the same file name indicates acontinuity of the same sound file in these frames.

189

Chapter 3: Menus

View Menus

Mouth Shapes

Shows the letter (or name depending on the way you named your character's
different mouth positions) in the column's frames. There is only one mouth
position allotted per frame and this position should correspond to the sound fileafter performing a lip-sync.

Waveform

Shows a vertical display of the sound file's actual waveform. In the column
header, in the field under the column name, you can type in a percentage to zoom
in or zoom out on the waveform, or pass the scroll cursor
over the Zoom
Waveformicon.

Sound Edit
Insert Blank Cell

Places an empty cell between other cells.

Clear Exposure andPull

Replaces the exposure from the selected cell with exposures that follow it.

Annotation
Import FileLets you import an image file in an Annotation column.

Change Pen Colour

Lets you change the pen colour by selecting one from the Select Colour dialog
box.

Pen Width

Lets you select a pen preset or change the pen width (in pixels).

Eraser Width

Lets you modify the width of the Eraser tool.

Erase All

Removes all text and drawn annotations. Annotations that you type in cannot be
erased using this method.

Erase Selected Images Removes images you select in the Annotation column.
Erase Selected Texts

Removes text you select in the Annotation column.

Enable Drawing

Lets you draw in the Annotation column using your mouse or pen tablet.

190

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Chapter 4: Nodes
The Node view uses a visual set of connections (nodes) to show how each element in the scene is connected andbrought to the final image. It allows you to add extra elements and effects, and to move beyond the possibilities
offered by the Timeline and Xsheet views. Each node corresponds to a layer in the Timeline view. Very few nodes
are only visible in the Node view.
The basic rules of the Node view are quite simple. Once you understand them, a lot can be accomplished.
Each node used to build a node system is available in the Node Library view as well as through the Insert menu in
the Node view. In addition, each time you create a layer from the Timeline or Xsheet views, the corresponding nodeis created in the Node view.
Combine Nodes

193

Blending Node

194

Cutter Node198

Highlight Node200

Tone Node

202

Deformation Nodes

204

Bone Node

205

Deformation Composite Node207

Game Bone Node

209

Kinematic Output Node211

Filter Nodes

212

Blur - Gaussian Node213

Blur Node215

Colour-Override Node217

Colour-Scale Node221

Glow Node223

Shadow Node

226

Transparency

228

Generator Nodes

230

Colour-Card Node

231

Element / Drawing Node232

Move Nodes

241

Camera Node242

Peg Node243

Transformation Tab

243

191

Chapter 4: Nodes

Quadmap Node244

Output Nodes

246

Display Node247

Sound Layer Properties

248

192

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Combine Nodes
The nodes found in the Combine category are used to take two or more elements are combine them into a newimage.
Blending Node

194

Cutter Node198

Highlight Node200

Tone Node

202

193

Chapter 4: Nodes

Combine Nodes

Blending NodeEffects nodes, like the Tone node and Highlight node, can control the colour and alpha composite operations foryou. These nodes were created with preset colour and alpha composite operations to fit the most frequently used,composite operations.

You might, however, still want to control the colour and alpha composite operation between two images using theBlending node, to create a multiplicity of lighting, shadow, filter or ambient effects. The Blending node combines
two images into one output image, following the parameters you choose for your movie and images sequence or
SWF movie exports.
The drawing node connected to the Blending effect will act as the blending image and will be applied to all thedrawing layers situated under them in the Timeline view order.

NOTE: It is possible to select two different blending modes in the same Blending effect layer, in the eventthat you want to export your project to both a Bitmap and an SWF movie file with different results.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

194Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, and Node views.

Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Lets you rename the node.
Choose the blending effect mode you wish to apply to your layer. The Blend Modetype will only be visible when the Camera view is set to Rendermode and will
only export to a bitmap movie file or sequence of images.
Both the Blending node and Composite-Generic node have regular blending
modes and legacy blending modes. The regular blending modes will take thesource images and unmultiply them before blending the two inputs together. The
images will be remultiplied when being output from the node. The legacy blending
modes use the pre-multipled source images as is in order to apply the effect.
Unmultiplying the images before processing them will give a final result closer towhat can be found in software such as Adobe Photoshop.

Blend Mode and SWF Blend
Mode•

Normal: The layer attached to the effect acts as a normal layer and will not
create any blending mode effect.

•

Multiply: This operation multiplies the blending element colour with theoutput image. This will darken the colour of the overlapping area.

•

Screen: This operation multiplies the inverted colour of the blending
element with the image. This will lighten the colour of the overlapping area.

•

Lighten (Lighten Legacy): This operation lightens the area of the output
image which, is darker than the blending element’s colours. The lighter
colours will remain unchanged.

•

Darken: This operation darkens the area of the output image, which islighter than the blending element’s colours. The darker colours will remainunchanged.

•

Difference (Difference Legacy): This operation subtracts the blending
elements colour from the output image colours or vice-versa, depending on
which of them has more bright colours. The final result will be colours thatare more vibrant.

•

Add (Add Legacy): This operation lightens the output image using theblending element.

•

Subtract (Subtract Legacy): This operation darkens the output image
using the blending element.

•

Invert: This operation inverts the output image colours on the area
overlapping the blending layer colours.
195Chapter 4: Nodes

Combine Nodes•

Overlay (Overlay Legacy): This operation multiplies or screens thecolours from the blending image, with those of the output image,depending on the base colour. Colours from the blending element overlay
the colours of the drawing elements, while preserving the highlights andshadows of the base colour. The base colour is not replaced, but mixed
with the blend colour to reflect the lightness, or darkness, of the original
colour.

•Hardlight(Hardlight Legacy): This operation multiplies, or screens, thecolours of the blending layer with those of the output image, depending on
the blend colour. If the blend colour is lighter than 50% grey, the image islightened, as if it were screened. This is useful for adding highlights to an
image. If the blend colour is darker than 50% grey, the image is darkened,
as if it were multiplied. This is useful for adding shadows to an image.
Painting with pure black or white results in pure black or white. Play with
the Opacity value to create a subtler look.

•

Alpha: This operation will blend the alpha value of the blending layer withthe output image. This effect is not available for SWF Blend Mode.

•

Erase: This operation produces a cutter effect using the blending element.
This effect is not available for SWF Blend Mode.

•

Divide (Divide Legacy): This operation divides the output image colour
values by the blending layer colour values. The blending image colour
values are inverted, creating a negative image. The negative image’s
colour values are then multiplied by the right image colour values. Thiseffect is not available for SWF Blend Mode.

•

Replace: This operation replaces the output image by the blending layer.
This effect is not available for SWF Blend Mode.

•

Softlight: This operation darkens or lightens the colours in a soft anddiffuse way, depending on the blend colour (image in left port). If the blend
colour is lighter than 50% grey, the image is lightened. If the blend colour isdarker than 50% grey, the image is darkened. Painting with pure black orwhite produces a distinctly darker or lighter area, but does not result in pure
black or white.

•Linear Light: This operation burns or dodges the colours by decreasing or
increasing the brightness depending on the colour of the underlying colour.
If the blend colour is lighter than 50% grey, the colour is lightened because
the brightness is increased. If the blend colour is darker than 50% grey, thecolour is darkened because the brightness is decreased.

•

Pin Light: This operation will replace the colours, depending on theunderlying colour . If the blend colour is lighter than 50% grey, pixels darker
than the underlying colour are replaced, and pixels lighter than theunderlying colour do not change. If the blend colour is darker than 50%
grey, pixels lighter than the underlying colour are replaced, and pixels
darker than the underlying colour do not change.

•

Vivid Light: This operation burns or dodges the colours by decreasing or
increasing the brightness depending on the colour of the underlying colour.
If the colour is lighter than 50% grey, the blend colour is lightened because
the contrast is decreased. If the colour is darker than 50% grey, the blend
colour is darkened because the contrast is increased.

196

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide•

Exclusion: This operation produces a similar result to the Differencemode, but with a lower contrast.

•

Dodge: This operation will lighten the colour.

•

Burn: This operation will darken the colour.

•

Hue: This operation will result in a colour that will take the luminosity andsaturation of the underlying colour, and the hue of the source colour.

•

Saturation: This operation will result in a colour that will have the same
luminosity and hue of the underlying colour, and the saturation of thesource colour.

•

Colour: This operation will result in a colour that will have the luminosity of
the underlying colour, and the hue and saturation of the source colour.

•

Luminosity: This operation will result in a colour which has the hue andsaturation of the underlying colour, and the luminosity of the source colour.
This mode is opposite to the Colour mode.

197

Chapter 4: Nodes

Combine Nodes

Cutter Node
T-HFND-010-009
The Cutter effect cuts out a portion of an image. To accomplish this, it needs to be connected to the drawing it isintended to cut as well as to a matte layer. The cutter will take the shape of the drawing in its matte layer and cut
this shape out of the drawing layer. This is especially useful if you want to make a character disappear between abackground element, or if you want to cut out a hole in the middle of a character.
The Cutter effect has an Inverted parameter, which is disabled by default. When enabled, the Cutter will have therevert effect: Instead of cutting the matte's shape out of the drawing, it will cut everything outside of the matte's
shape out of the drawing, leaving only the parts of the drawing that are covered by the matte.
The Cutter effect can be used with 2D-3D integration. Rendered 2D drawings, integrated with 3D models, display
soft, anti-aliased edges, even where the Cutter effect is applied.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

198

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, and Node views.

Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Allows you to change the node's name.

Inverted

When this option is enabled, the Cutter node will invert the matte shape to cut thedrawing. Instead of cutting the image intersecting with the matte, it will cut any
artwork outside of the matte shape.

199

Chapter 4: Nodes

Combine Nodes

Highlight Node
T-HFND-010-009C
The Highlight effect lets you to turn a drawing's area lighter to simulate a light source. For this effect, you willneed to create a matte to determine the shape and position of the highlight on another element and so you can blurthe edges to create a softer effect. By adjusting the Highlight properties, you can control the type and amount ofblur, as well as the colour of the highlight effect.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

Properties

200

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, and Node views.

Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.

Blur Type

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that make up theedge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction you select.

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you selected the Directional Blur type, you can set the direction of the blur byentering a value from 0 to 360 in this field.
0: Blurs the image to the west.

Directional Angle

90: Blurs the image to the south.
180: Blurs the image to the east.
270: Blurs the image to the north.
The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a value
between 0 and 1.

Directional Falloff Rate

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from the edge of thecharacter to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edge of theimage.

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to create the tone, shadow, or highlight.

Use Matte/Source Colour

Creates the shadow or tone using the matte shape's colour. Be sure that you are
in render mode
to see this effect and that your background is NOT white andthat you do NOT have a white colour card node attached to the composite. As thematte only gives colour information, but no alpha, the matte is automatically multiplied with the background colours. If there is no colour card attached and thebackground appears black, you will see the matte colour at full opacity. If it is multiplied with a white background, the colours disappear into the full 255.

Multiplicative

Multiplies the tone or shadow colours with the background.

ColourRGBAEnter a value to add or subtract from the colour channels in the drawings or attachthese values to function curves.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker where you can specify the colour.

Intensity

Lets you set a value to determine the strength of the effect or attach a function toanimate the effect.

201

Chapter 4: Nodes

Combine Nodes

Tone Node
The Tone effect lets you add a dark-coloured region to your drawing and simulate the shaded area away from alight source. To produce the tone effect, create a drawing to control where the tone will appear. The Tone effectuses a matte to determine the shape and position of the tone on your drawing and can be blurred at the edges tocreate a softer effect.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, and Node202

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

views.
Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergoa change of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.

Blur Type

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that make up
the edge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction you select.

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you selected the Directional Blur type, you can set the direction of the blur byentering a value from 0 to 360 in this field.
0: Blurs the image to the west.

Directional Angle

90: Blurs the image to the south.
180: Blurs the image to the east.
270: Blurs the image to the north.
The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a value
between 0 and 1.

Directional Falloff Rate

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from the edge ofthe character to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edge ofthe image.

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to create the tone, shadow, or highlight.

Use Matte/Source Colour

Creates the shadow or tone using the matte shape's colour. Be sure that you
are in render mode
to see this effect and that your background is NOT
white and that you do NOT have a white colour card node attached to the composite. As the matte only gives colour information, but no alpha, the matte is
automatically multiplied with the background colours. If there is no colour card
attached and the background appears black, you will see the matte colour atfull opacity. If it is multiplied with a white background, the colours disappear
into the full 255.

Multiplicative

Multiplies the tone or shadow colours with the background.

ColourRGBAEnter a value to add or subtract from the colour channels in the drawings or
attach these values to function curves.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker where you can specify the colour.

Intensity

Lets you set a value to determine the strength of the effect or attach a function
to animate the effect.

203

Chapter 4: Nodes

Deformation Nodes

Deformation Nodes
The deformation rigs are composed of several different types of nodes. Additional ones such as the Kinematic
Output node can be used to enhance the results.
Bone Node

205

Deformation Composite Node207

Game Bone Node

209

Kinematic Output Node

211

204

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Bone Node
The Bone node is one of the main nodes used to build a deformation rig. Each Bone node consists of a bone and anarticulation. You can chain Bone nodes to create a skeleton chain for your character. The Rigging tool can be used tocreate and connect those nodes automatically.

Properties

Parameter

Descriptions

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, and Node views.

Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Resting Parameters Rest Offset(x) AxisThis is the bone x-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the resting position.

(y) AxisThis is the bone y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the resting position.

Rest RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the resting position.

Rest Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the resting position.

Rest Bias

This is the articulation's bias (roundness and smoothness) for the resting position.

Rest Length

This is the bone's length for the resting position.

Deform Parameters Offset
2D PathWhen this option is enabled, the X and Y-axis parameters are controlled by thesame 2D path function.

Separate

When this option is enabled, the X and Y-axis parameters are individual one fromanother.

Path

When using a 2D Path, this field displays the name of the function.

205

Chapter 4: Nodes

Deformation Nodes(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

(y) AxisThis is the bone y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the animation position. This parameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the animation position.
This parameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the animation position. This parameter canbe linked to a function to be animated over time.

Bias

This is the articulation's bias (roundness and smoothness) for the animation position. This parameter can be linked to a function to be animated over time.

LengthThis is the bone's length for the animation position. This parameter can be linked
to a function to be animated over time.

206

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Deformation Composite Node
Just like a standard Composite node, the Deformation-Composite node is used to bring together all the elementsthat are connected to it, allowing you to customize parameters that will influence the result of the output. The
Deformation-Composite links the deformation chain to the graphic element to which it is related.

Properties
Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, andNode views.

Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Output Kinematic Only

This option is disabled by default, allowing the deformation chain to output deformation and position information. This option should be enabledin order to output the chain information position only. This will allow you
to connect a part to the hierarchy without it undergoing the deformation
applied to the rest of the chain.

Output Selected Port Only

This option is important if you have several deformation chains for one
element.
Lets you select a deformation chain option to use. This parameter isused when the Output Selected Port Only option is enabled.

Rightmost: Only the first chain connected to the right of the composite
node will be used.
Output Kinematic Chain

Leftmost: Only the first chain connected to the left of the composite
node will be used.
Select: If you select this option, you can define which chain to output
according to the order they are connected from left to right.
Use First Connected Element’s Exposure as Key: Allows the deformation effect to automatically detect which deformation chain to use (subgroup) by detecting the exposure of the first element connected to thedeformation. This option is used in the case of a multiple pose rig.
207

Chapter 4: Nodes

Deformation Nodes

Use Parent Composite’s Connected Element Exposure: When the
Output Kinematic Only option enabled, the information from the parent
element’s exposure is used to attach the child to the correct chain, following which pose is exposed—see
When the Output Selected Port Only option is selected AND the Selectoption is used as the Output Kinematic Chain setting, this field defines
which deformation chain you want to use on your element. Select the
number which corresponds to the left to right order that the chains areconnected to the Deformation-Composite node.
Output Kinematic Chain Selection

You can attach this value to a function and enable different chains over a
period of time on specific frames. This value can be modified in theTimeline view by using the Deformation-Switch layer. Since theDeformation-Composite node is only visible in the Node view, the layer
has a reference to this parameter enabling you to easily edit the value
when working in the Timeline view.

208Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Game Bone Node
The Bone node is one of the main node used to build a deformation rig. Each Bone node consists of a bone and anarticulation. Chaining Bone nodes will create a skeleton chain for your character. The Rigging tool can be used tocreate and connect those nodes automatically.

Parameter

Descriptions

Resting Parameters Rest Offset(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the resting position.

(y) AxisThis is the bone Y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the resting position.

Rest RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the resting position.

Rest Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the resting position.

Rest Length

This is the bone's length for the resting position.

Deform Parameters Offset
2D PathWhen this option is enabled, the X and Y axis parameters are controlled by thesame 2D path function.

Separate

When this option is enabled, the X and Y axis parameters are individual from eachother.

Path

When using a 2D Path, this field displays the name of the function curve.

(x) AxisThis is the bone X-axis (horizontal) coordinates for the animation position. Thisparameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

(y) AxisThis is the bone Y-axis (vertical) coordinates for the animation position. This parameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

RadiusThis is the articulation's radius value (articulation size) for the animation position.
This parameter can be linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

Orientation

This is the bone's orientation angle for the animation position. This parameter canbe linked to a function curve to be animated over time.

209

Chapter 4: Nodes

LengthDeformation Nodes

This is the bone's length for the animation position. This parameter can be linked
to a function curve to be animated over time.

210

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Kinematic Output Node
The Kinematic Output node lets you hook a separate element that you want to be linked to the deformation chain but
not be part of the deformation, such as a hand to an arm or an arm to the body. These elements will follow the
movement of the chain just like a regular cut-out character hierarchy piece without being influenced by the
deformation of the arm. If you don't use the Kinematic Output, the piece's pivot will not follow the deformation.
Connect a Kinematic Output node below the deformation node you want your drawing to follow.

211

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

Filter Nodes
Here is the list of the main filter effects available in Harmony.
Blur - Gaussian Node213

Blur Node215

Colour-Override Node217

Colour-Scale Node221

Glow Node223

Shadow Node

226

Transparency

228

212

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Blur - Gaussian Node
The Blur - Gaussian effect softens the image, reducing the amount of noise and detail. The look of the Gaussian bluris smooth, but does take some rendering time. This effect is useful when rendering time is less important, andquality is more important. Also, you can use a matte with this effect to isolate areas of the image.

For detailed video tutorials and sample scenes by Adam Phillips, see toonboom.com/resources/videotutorials/chapter/adam-phillips-harmony-effects.
Refer to the following example to connect this node.

Properties

Parameter

Description

213

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergo achange of depth or scale. When this option is deselected, the effect's values
remain unchanged regardless of any depth or scale changes. This option should
be deselected when multiple drawings are composited and attached to this effect.

Repeat Edge Pixels

Makes the blur algorithm operate as if the pixel values beyond the edge of thelayer are the same as the values of the edge pixels. This keeps edges sharp, preventing them from darkening and becoming more transparent.

BlurrinessDirectional

Blurs according to the length, width, and angle you specify. For example, if a character is walking east, the blur may fall to the west.

BlurrinessAmount of blur applied to the layer.

Horizontal BlurrinessLength of the blur.

Vertical Blurriness

Thickness of the blur.

Angle

The direction in which the blur is applied: sideways, up, down, 90 degrees, 45
degrees, and so on.

Bidirectional

Blurs in both horizontal and vertical directions.

Matte

Precision: Blurs the image the number of times the precision indicates atdifferent radius (between 0 and the specified radius).

214

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Blur Node
T-HFND-010-007
The Blur-Radial effect creates an effect that softens, fogs or obscures the image evenly in all directions. This effectis useful when you want to make cloudy images not realistically seen in detail, such as a drawing object that is
farther back or in the background of your scene, usually blurry due to the laws of atmospheric perspective. Other
uses include the general softening of objects such as snow, stars and shadows that do not naturally have a hardoutline.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

215

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergoa change of depth or scale. When this option is deselected, the effect's values
remain unchanged regardless of any depth or scale changes. This option
should be deselected when multiple drawings are composited and attached tothis effect.

RadiusSize of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the strength or reach of the
blur. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
Click the Edit Curve button to change these values over time by adjusting thefunction curve.

Quality

Select High for a slow and accurate operation or Low for a faster operation witha more raw look.

216

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Colour-Override Node
The Colour-Override effects processes the colours in a drawing layer. Using this effect, you can change colours
from the palette without affecting the actual palette, swap clone palettes, or even replace a specific colour zone. The
drawings in this layer must be .tvg files as the Colour-Override uses the colour palettes linked to them.

The Colour-Override effect lets you:l

Change colour values in drawings during the compositing process.

l

Use colour values from a specific colour palette in the palette list.

l

l

l

Establish the priority of override palettes in the palette list. For example, you may have different clones of thesame palette, such as a daytime and nighttime version.
Isolate specific areas of a drawing by selecting certain colours. For example, using specific colours to generate a matte for a glow effect.
Hide certain colours.

To learn how to use the advanced functions of the Colour Override node, see:
Refer to the following example to connect this node.

217

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

Interface

Palettes
The Palettes section displays the palettes in the palette list of the selected layer. You can move these palettes
into the Whole Palette Overrides section to reorder them. If you have cloned palettes, the higher one in the list will
override the others. This is useful for overriding the clone palette ordering set in the scene through the Colourview.
You can load additional palettes in the palette list from either your project, by clicking on The Paletteor your computer by clicking on the Browse
button.
llbutton,The Palettebutton allows you to load a palette contained within the project hierarchy (Environment,
Job, Scene and Elements).
The Browse
button allows you to load a palette located outside the project hierarchy, anywhere on
your system or server. If you link to a palette outside of your project, you will be prompted with the following warning message:

You can hover your mouse over the palette name in any of the override sections to display the path to the palette.

218

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Colours
The Colours section displays the colour swatches of the selected palette. Move a swatch into the Colour-Overrides
section to change its value.

Whole Palette Overrides
The Whole Palette Overrides section forces the use of a particular palette (clone palette) or palette list ordering
during the compositing process. You must drag palettes from the Palettes section to change their order. Harmony
uses the palettes in the order they appear in the palette list to find the colour values associated with the colour IDs ofeach colour zone. To apply a different version of a colour palette to, for example, switch from a day to a night palette,
use the Override section to change the order of the colour palettes (you must be working with cloned palettes).

Individual Colour Overrides
When you drag a swatch from the Colours section to this section, you can override its value. The default override
mode is set to New RGBA so you can override the RGB value as well as the transparency value.
The Current column always displays the colours from the currently active palette. Selecting a clone palette in the
Palettes area will not change the colours if you haven't changed the active palette in the Whole Palette Overrides
section. The update will be done once you close and reopen the Colour Override Layer Properties window.

219

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

220

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Colour-Scale Node
The Colour-Scale effect offsets an image's colours. This effect is useful in creating ambient transitions, such as
from daytime to nighttime.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Red, Green, Blue, Alpha

The red, green, blue and alpha used to offset the image.

Hue

The colour or hue to offset the image.

Saturation

The amount of colour to offset the image.

Value

Enter the value for the colour to offset the image. The actual colour values of theimage are not changed; instead, the channels are multiplied by a selectedamount. For example:

221Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

l

l

l

A value of 1 does not change the colour values.
A value greater than 1 brings the colour channel value closer to 255 (orwhite).
A value less than 1 brings the colour channel value closer to zero (0 orblack).

222

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Glow Node
T-HFND-010-009B
The Glow effect turns your image into a glow area with a bright soft-edged light or diffuse light region around an
image. The Glow effect is useful for creating a shining rim around objects, such as the sun or stars. Clone your layer
to display the original image on top of the glow.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

223

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

Properties

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, and Nodeviews.

Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergoa change of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.

Blur Type

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that make up
the edge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction you select.

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.
If you selected the Directional Blur type, you can set the direction of the blur byentering a value from 0 to 360 in this field.
0: Blurs the image to the west.

Directional Angle

90: Blurs the image to the south.
180: Blurs the image to the east.
270: Blurs the image to the north.

Directional Falloff Rate

The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a value
between 0 and 1.
0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from the edge of224

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

the character to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edge ofthe image.
Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to create the tone, shadow, or highlight.

Use Matte/Source Colour

Creates the shadow or tone using the matte shape's colour. Be sure that you
are in render mode
to see this effect and that your background is NOT
white and that you do NOT have a white colour card node attached to the composite. As the matte only gives colour information, but no alpha, the matte is
automatically multiplied with the background colours. If there is no colour card
attached and the background appears black, you will see the matte colour atfull opacity. If it is multiplied with a white background, the colours disappear
into the full 255.

Multiplicative

Multiplies the tone or shadow colours with the background.

ColourRGBAEnter a value to add or subtract from the colour channels in the drawings or
attach these values to function curves.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker where you can specify the colour.

Intensity

Lets you set a value to determine the strength of the effect or attach a function
to animate the effect.

225

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

Shadow NodeWith the Shadow effect, you can turn a drawing into a shadow. It doesn't matter if the drawing layer is a fully
coloured character. The Shadow effect will render it into a grey, semitransparent, slightly blurry silhouette. Clone
your image or connect it a second time to the final Composite node to see the original image displayed on top of
the shadow.

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

Properties
Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Enables or disables the selected node in the Camera, Timeline, and Nodeviews.

Colour Swatch

Changes the layer colour.

Name

Use this field to rename the node.

Truck Factor

Activated by default, this option readjusts the blur when the elements undergoa change of depth or scale. When disabled, the effect's values will remainunchanged regardless of depth or scale changes. It is recommended that thisoption be disabled when multiple drawings are composited and attached thiseffect.

Blur Type

Radial: The edges of the matte are blurred evenly around points that make up
the edge of the matte.
Directional: The matte is blurred in the direction you select.

RadiusEnter a value for the size of the blur. The larger the value, the greater the blureffect. The blur radius is affected by the drawing scale and camera position.

Directional Angle

If you selected the Directional Blur type, you can set the direction of the blur byentering a value from 0 to 360 in this field.

226

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

0: Blurs the image to the west.
90: Blurs the image to the south.
180: Blurs the image to the east.
270: Blurs the image to the north.
The distance where the blur fades from the edge of the image. Select a value
between 0 and 1.
Directional Falloff Rate

0: Makes the blur fade out slowly, distributing the blur evenly from the edge ofthe character to the farthest edge of the blur.
1: Makes the blur fade out quickly. The blur is heaviest closer to the edge ofthe image.

Invert Matte

Inverts the matte used to create the tone, shadow, or highlight.

Use Matte/Source Colour

Creates the shadow or tone using the matte shape's colour. Be sure that you
are in render mode
to see this effect and that your background is NOT
white and that you do NOT have a white colour card node attached to the composite. As the matte only gives colour information, but no alpha, the matte is
automatically multiplied with the background colours. If there is no colour card
attached and the background appears black, you will see the matte colour atfull opacity. If it is multiplied with a white background, the colours disappear
into the full 255.

Multiplicative

Multiplies the tone or shadow colours with the background.

ColourRGBAEnter a value to add or subtract from the colour channels in the drawings or
attach these values to function curves.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker where you can specify the colour.

Intensity

Lets you set a value to determine the strength of the effect or attach a function
to animate the effect.

227

Chapter 4: Nodes

Filter Nodes

Transparency
T-HFND-010-008
The Transparency effect is used to make an image partially transparent. The Transparency effect is useful whenfading images in and out, such as a phantom or to make something partially see-through, such as a window.

AuthorChristina Halstead
2D Animator and Character Designer
shadowbrushcreations.com

Refer to the following example to connect this node.

You can enter a value in the Transparency field or change the transparency value over time by linking it to afunction curve. Entering a value of 100 in the Transparency field will make the element 100% transparent, in otherwords, invisible. Entering a value of 0 will render the element completely opaque.

228

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

It is also possible to adjust a layer/node's transparency directly in the Layer Properties window without using theTransparency node. In the layer's properties, go to the Drawing tab and adjust the Opacity parameter. Thisparameter is visible in OpenGL mode.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Allows you to change the node's name.

Transparency

Lets you set the opacity of an element. Values range from 0 to 100. A value of 100
will make the element 100% transparent and a value of 0 will render the element
completely opaque.

229

Chapter 4: Nodes

Generator Nodes

Generator Nodes
The nodes found in the Generator category are nodes that generate an image on their without using any external
TVG or bitmap drawings. You can adjust the parameters to control the image outputted by these nodes.
Colour-Card Node

231

Element / Drawing Node

232

230

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Colour-Card Node

The Colour Card is a solid background the same size as the camera. The Colour Card lets you fill the scene's
background with a solid colour when there is no background image. If no background or colour card is added to thescene, the resulting export will appear with a black background.
By default, the Colour Card has a Z ordering value of 12 Backward. This puts the Colour card behind all elementsthat have a value lower than 12 Backward. Most of the time, the Colour card will appear automatically behind all thescene elements as they are all set to 0 Backward, unless you have changed the Z ordering of the scene
components. If so, the Colour Card will be in front of the elements that are pushed back to more than 12 fields
backward.

Colour Card Properties
Parameter

Description

Depth

The value used to determine composition order when the Z value of two elements
is the same.

Offset Z

The front-back position of the Colour Card layer in 3D space. This value can beverified in the Top view.

Red/Green/Blue/Alpha

The colour and transparency of the Colour Card. You can also attach theseparameters to function columns to change their values over time.
Click the colour swatch to open the Colour Picker window and select a colour.

Colour Swatch

Opens the Colour Picker window in which you can specify the colour.
231

Chapter 4: Nodes

Generator Nodes

Element / Drawing Node
The drawing layer's properties is composed of the following tabs:
Transformation Tab
The Transformation tab contains parameters for adjusting the position, scale, rotation, skew and pivots of anelement.

Parameter

Description
3D Path: Lets you use a 3D path function to animate an element.
Separate: Lets you independently edit the different coordinate fields.
Path (x) Axis: Lets you type in a new East/West coordinate corresponding to
the desired position.

Position

Path (y) Axis: Lets you type in a new North/South coordinate corresponding to
the desired position.
Path (z) Axis: Lets you ype in a new Forward/Backward coordinate
corresponding to the desired position.
Velocity: When the 3D Path option is selected, lets you set the speed at which

Scale

Locked: Resizes the element while keeping its ratio. The X and Y axes scale
proportionally232

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Separate: Resizes the element allowing to modify the ratio (squash andstretch).
(x) Axis: Lets you type in the horizontal scale value.
(y) Axis: Lets you type in the vertical scale value.
Scale in Fields: Instead of using the standard scaling units, when this option
is enabled, images are scaled using field units, based on the traditional
animation field chart.
Ignore Parent Scaling: When this option is enabled, any scaling value
applied to a parent layer is ignored in the current layer. This can be handy in
cut-out rigs when you need to scale an arm without affecting the forearm.
RotationAngle z: Lets you type in a degree value for the rotation angle. Note that you
can enter values greater than 360 and -360 degrees. If you enter 720, the object
will rotate twice.

Skew

Skew: Lets you type in a degree value between -90 to 90 for the skew angle.
(x) Axis: Lets you type in a new East/West coordinate corresponding to thedesired position.

Pivot(y) Axis: Lets you ype in a new North/South coordinate corresponding to thedesired position.
Use Embedded Pivots:
Harmony has three types of pivots:lDrawing Pivot

Permanent Pivot

This is a permanent pivot, sometime referred to as peg pivot, that is applied tothe entire drawing or peg layer. If you modify its position, it will be changed forthe entire layer, modifying the animation, scale and rotation interpolation. The
permanent pivot is set using the Rotate, Translate or Scale tool. The
Transform tool will only move that pivot temporarily for positioning purposes,
but the animation interpolation will be done from the original permanent pivot's
position. The Transform tool is designed to move the pivot temporarily during
the animation process. It also permits you to select multiple pegs and apply acommon temporary pivot.
To permanently move a peg pivot, use the Rotate or Scale tool. You can also
directly type the values in the Layer Properties window in the Pivot section's(x) Axis and (y) Axis fields.
In the Layer Properties window, in the Drawing Pivot section, select the Don't
Use Embedded Pivot option to use the permanent pivot.
lDrawing Pivot

The Drawing pivot is contained within each drawing. In one layer, each drawing
can have its own pivot. If you have many different views of a character within
one layer, the pivot positions can be different and the animation will adjust to
the pivot. The Drawing pivot can also be referred to as embedded pivot. If you

233Chapter 4: Nodes

Generator Nodes

are not mixing different views within the same layers or are using pegs toanimate your layers, it is recommended to use the permanent pivot.
You can set a different pivot for each one of your drawings. For example, if you
have a series of drawings from different views, they are not likely to rotate fromthe same location. In that case, you can set a different pivot for these drawings
by using the Drawing Pivot
tool.

In the Layer Properties window, in the Drawing Pivot section, select the Apply
Embedded Pivot on Drawing Layer option to use the drawing pivot directlyon the drawing layer. If you want to apply the drawing pivot to a parent peg toforce the peg to follow the drawing pivot variations, enable the Apply
Embedded Pivot on Parent Peg option.
lSymbol Pivots

The Symbol pivot is similar to the Drawing pivot. Each symbol cell can have its
own pivot and act the same as the Drawing pivot. The Symbol pivot can also
be referred to as embedded pivot. Inside a symbol, each drawing can have its
own pivot. If you are not mixing different views within the same layers or areusing pegs to animate your layers, it is recommended to use the Peg pivot.
For a simple character rig, it is recommended to set the Peg pivot (even on
drawing layers) using the Rotate
tool.

Drawing Tab
The Drawing tab contains parameters for the element columns, designating art layers, and setting bitmap options.

234

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Parameter

Description
Overlay Art Enabled: Enables the Overlay Art display.
Line Art Enabled: Enables the Line Art display.
Colour Art Enabled: Enables the Colour Art display.
Underlay Art Enabled: Enables the Underlay Art display.

Art Layers
Overlay Art Type: Allows you to set the Overlay Art as Vector or Bitmap type.
Line Art Type: Allows you to set the Line Art as Vector or Bitmap type.
Colour Art Type: Allows you to set the Colour Art as Vector or Bitmap type.
Underlay Art Type: Allows you to set the Underlay Art as Vector or Bitmap type.
When an image is created with an external software and that image has sometransparency, there are several formats the software can use when writing the
RBG channels. The purpose of the four import options for the transparency is forthe user to tell Harmony how to interpret the RGB channels of the imported
image. The correct option has to match the ouput format of the software that wasused to create the image in the first place. For instance, if the you used Adobe
Photoshop and exported an image as Straight, then it should be imported inHarmony as Straight in order to get the correct result.

Bitmap File Options

Note that if the image has no alpha channel or if it does have an alpha channel andall the pixels are 100% opaque, it does not make any difference which option is
selected.
Colour: Controls the production of colour information from bitmap images. If thismodule reads 3 or 4-channel bitmaps, this selection determines whether thecolour should be read or ignored. If this module reads 1-channel bitmaps, thisselection determines whether the channel should be read as colour. When thisoption is selected with 1-channel images, the resulting image will be a greyscale
image.
Transparency: Controls the production of alpha information from bitmap images.
If this module reads a 1 or 3-channel image, this option will create a matte from235

Chapter 4: Nodes

Generator Nodesthe colour values in the image. If the module reads a 4-channel image and thisoption is not selected, the alpha information in the image will be ignored.
Transparency Type
Premultiplied with Black: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image are
blended with black.
Premultiplied with White: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image are
blended with white.
Straight: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image are left as is (unmatted).
Clamp Colour to Alpha: Semi-transparent pixels in the original image are
blended with black. On import, each of the RGB channels is clamped so that acolor value never exceed the alpha value for a given pixel. When the RGB values
are multiplied with the alpha value, that is to say, if you have a pixel of value
R=247, G=188, B=29 and the alpha is 50% or the image has a 50% transparency,
then the actual RGB values output would be half of the amounts listed above.

Controls Tab

The Controls tab contains animation control options.
Parameter

Description

Animation

Animate Using Animation Tools: By default, a drawing layer can be animatedusing the same parameters as a peg, but you can disable this feature. Being
able to switch your drawing layers so they can no longer be animated without apeg has certain advantages. In cut-out animation, it is easier to separate yourdrawing exposure and keyframes to change timing easier and rearrange
keyframe position in the Timeline view. This feature is also available forbackward compatibility when bringing in templates created in older versions of
the software, so as not to lose their offset keyframes or drawing substitution
keyframes.

Spline Offset

In the X, Y and Z axis fields, type the coordinates of where you want to offset
the visual trajectory. By default, the trajectory is displayed at the centre
drawing using the layer's pivot position. If you want to move it so itcorresponds better with your drawing, either type new coordinates or use theSpline Offset tool available in the Advanced Animation toolbar.
To display the trajectory in the Camera view, select your drawing and selectView > Show > Control. You can also press Shift + F11 (Windows/Linux) or236

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide⌘ + F11 (Mac OS X).

Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab contains options for setting the alignment of drawings, line thickness, vector render options, andmore.

Parameter

Description
Alignment Rule: The alignment rule selections are intended to deal with drawings
that were created on paper of a different size or orientation from the defaultalignment rule (set up in the Scene Settings dialog box) or imported bitmap
images. The drawings are then scaled to match the Harmony alignment
rectangle. Note that alignment rules are not based on the camera frame, but on
the scene frame. Refer to the Fundamentals Guide to learn more about scenealignment and scene settings.

Alignment•

Left: The default alignment for drawings; aligns the drawings to the left
side of the scene’s alignment rectangle. Harmony scales the drawings tomatch their height to the alignment rectangle of the scene.

•

Right: Aligns the drawings to the right side of the alignment rectangle.
Harmony scales the drawings to match their height to the height of thealignment rectangle of the scene.

•

Top: Aligns the drawings to the top of the alignment rectangle. Harmony

237

Chapter 4: Nodes

Generator Nodes

scales the drawings to match their widths to the width of the alignment
rectangle of the scene.
•

Bottom: Aligns the drawings to the bottom of the alignment rectangle.
Harmony scales the drawings to match their widths to the width of thealignment rectangle of the scene.

•

Centre Fit: Centers the drawings.

•

Centre Fill: Centers the drawings and then scales them so the width orheight fills the available space.

•

Centre LR: Aligns the drawings in the left-right centre of the alignment
rectangle. Harmony scales the drawings to match their height to the heightof the alignment rectangle of the scene.

•

Centre TB: Aligns the drawings in the top-bottom centre of the alignment
rectangle. Harmony scales the drawings to match their widths to the widthof the alignment rectangle of the scene.

•

Stretch: Scales the drawings so they fit within the alignment rectangle ofthe scene. This is particularly useful for images that you will manipulate
with a Quadmap node. If the drawings in the Quadmap node do not havethe same aspect ratio as the alignment rectangle of the scene (from the
Scene Settings dialog box), the handles on the quadmap will not appear on
the corners of the image, making it difficult to manipulate the quadmap. In
this case, you would set the drawing layer of the quadmap images toStretch to make the handles appear on the corner of the image. This canhave the effect of distorting the images, but it is not an issue with images
that will be distorted through the Quadmap node anyways.

•

As Is: Leaves the drawings aligned as they are.

•Centre First Page: Aligns the centre of the first part of a standard pan celwith the centre of the field chart.

Turn Before Alignment: Rotates the drawings in the selected element 90
degrees to the left before scaling and aligning them according to the alignment
rule, and before performing any offset, rotation or scaling for the element or peg.
This and the Alignment Rule are intended for drawings that were created on paperof a different size or orientation than the other paper in the scene, and requiresalignment so they are treated accurately.
Flip Horizontal: Flips the drawing on the X-axis.
Flip Vertical: Flips the drawing on the Y-axis.

Line Thickness

As you move the camera in your scene along the Z-axis, notice that, logically, thelines of the elements become thicker the closer the camera gets to the drawing. If
you prefer the lines to remain the same size or become thicker at a different
speed, you can use the thickness feature to adjust your brush stroke and pencil
line thickness. You can modify the size of the lines even if the camera is notanimated.
l

Adjust Pencil Lines Thickness: Lets you work with pencil lines and238

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

adjust their thickness. You will not see any changes to lines in the Camera
view OpenGL mode. You must switch to the Render mode.
l

l

l

l

l

l

•

Normal Thickness: Disables all overrides on the brush stroke line thickness. This option must be enabled in order for the pencil line thickness
parameter and pencil lines to appear. If you want to modify the brushstroke thickness, deselect this option. To enable brush strokes to workwith the line thickness feature, you must first create central strokes in the
Colour Art layer. The central strokes control the line variation of your brushstrokes in the Line Art layer. Select Drawing > Create Colour Art fromLine Art.
Zoom Independent Thickness: Select this if you want your line thickness to remain constant independently from the camera move. Everythingelse will increase in size, but the line thickness will stay the same.
Proportional: Enter a multiple by which you want to increase the line thickness base on its original thickness. A value of 1 will result in no change; avalue of 0 (zero) will hide the lines.
Constant: Enter a value in pixels (based on a 720x540 screen resolution)
to indicate the amount of pixels you want to add around the existing line.
Minimum: Enter a value in pixels (based on a 720x540 screen resolution)
for the minimum line thickness allowed.
Maximum: Enter a value in pixels (based on a 720x540 screen resolution)
for the maximum line thickness allowed.
Antialiasing Quality: A smoothness (antialiasing) setting applied to thefinal rendered image.
•

Low: No antialiasing•

Medium Low: Basic antialiasing•

Medium: Improved antialiasing (blurs the textures)•

High: High quality antialiasing (does not blur the textures)

Higher quality images require more time to render and more systemmemory. Choose a lower quality if you are rendering a pencil test.
•

Antialiasing Exponent: Controls the size of the area around the final
image edges used in the antialiasing process. A higher value uses lessarea, resulting in sharper edges, while a lower value uses more area,
resulting in softer edges. If the Antialiasing Quality value is set to Low (noantialiasing) or Medium Low, this value is ignored. Values: Between 0 and
1.

•

Texture Filter: This option changes the way coloured pixels of TVG
textures are calculated when rendered for different degrees of accuracy.

Vector Render Options•

Bilinear: This option takes the four pixels around each point andmakes a bilinear interpolation between them. (Medium Quality)•

Nearest: This option chooses the colour of the closest pixel to a point.
(Lower Quality)•

Nearest (Filtered): This option is an improved version of Bilinear andimproves the quality when zooming on a texture. (Best Quality)239

Chapter 4: Nodes

Generator Nodes•
Miscellaneous

Opacity: Lets you quickly change the transparency of the selected
element. Opacity settings here will be reflected in both OpenGL preview,and full render.

240

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Move Nodes
The nodes found in the Move category are used to animate layers as well as camera motions.
Camera Node242

Peg Node243

Transformation Tab

243

Quadmap Node

244

241

Chapter 4: NodesMove Nodes

Camera NodeYou can setup the camera position by entering coordinates and values in the Layer Properties view.

Parameter

Description

Enable/Disable

Turns the camera layer on or off.

Change Track Colour

The Change Track Colour button lets you change the colour of the exposed
frames; this helps you to quickly locate a layer in the Timeline view. Click the
Change Track Colour button to open the Select Colour window and choose a
new colour. You can modify the colour for any type of layer, such as group,peg, drawing, and effects.

Name

Displays the current layer name. You can rename the layer by typing in a newlayer name.

Position

Displays the current position of the camera layer using X-axis (East/West), Yaxis (North/South) and Z-axis (Forward/Backward) coordinates. To reposition
your camera frame, type in the new values corresponding to the desired position coordinates. You can also use the up and down arrows to set the value ofeach field.

Angle

Displays the current rotation value. To set a new rotation position, type in a
new angle value. You can also use the up and down arrows to set the newangle value.

Pivot

Displays the current position of the rotation pivot of the camera layer. The camera will perform a rotation taking the position of the pivot as its angle centre. Bydefault, the pivot is set at the centre of the camera frame. To reposition thepivot point, enter new X and Y coordinates values in the appropriate field. To
see the pivot's position, the Rotate tool must be selected.

242

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Peg Node
Find below a description of all the Peg node parameters.

Transformation Tab
Parameter

Description
3D Path: Lets you use a 3D path function to animate an element.
Separate: Lets you independently edit the different coordinate fields.
Path (x) Axis: Lets you type in a new East/West coordinate corresponding to thedesired position.

Position

Path (y) Axis: Lets you type in a new North/South coordinate corresponding to
the desired position.
Path (z) Axis: Lets you ype in a new Forward/Backward coordinate
corresponding to the desired position.
Velocity: When the 3D Path option is selected, lets you set the speed at which
Locked: Resizes the element while keeping its ratio. The X and Y axes scale
proportionally
Separate: Resizes the element allowing to modify the ratio (squash and stretch).
(x) Axis: Lets you type in the horizontal scale value.

Scale(y) Axis: Lets you type in the vertical scale value.
Scale in Fields: Instead of using the standard scaling units, when this option isenabled, images are scaled using field units, based on the traditional animation
field chart.
Ignore Parent Scaling: When this option is enabled, any scaling value applied toa parent layer is ignored in the current layer. This can be handy in cut-out rigs
when you need to scale an arm without affecting the forearm.

RotationAngle z: Lets you type in a degree value for the rotation angle. Note that you canenter values greater than 360 and -360 degrees. If you enter 720, the object will
rotate twice.

Skew

Skew: Lets you type in a degree value between -90 to 90 for the skew angle.
(x) Axis: Lets you type in a new East/West coordinate corresponding to thedesired position.

Pivot(y) Axis: Lets you ype in a new North/South coordinate corresponding to thedesired position.

243

Chapter 4: NodesMove Nodes

Quadmap NodeThe Quadmap transformation layer lets you deform the shape of an element. For example, you can use it tocreate a drop-shadow effect on an element.

You can edit the Quadmap visually in the Camera view.
How to edit the Quadmap in the Camera view
1. In the Timeline view, click the Add Layerbutton and select Quadmap.

2. Connect the drawing you want to deformto the Quadmap.

3. In the Tools toolbar, disable the Animate mode to change the value for the Quadmap over the entire duration of the element.
4. In the Timeline view, click on the Quadmap layer to select it.
5. From the top menu, select View > Show > Control or pressShift + F11.
The quadmap handles appear around the element in the window. There is also a pivot point at the centre of
the quadmap frame that you can reposition.
6. In the Camera view window, use the Transform tool to move the points on the quadmap. Shift + click to
select multiple points.

244

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

The value of each point on the quadmap can be changed gradually. To do this, use the Quadmap node Layer
Properties to attach the points to function curves.
Only the X and Y values of each point in the quadmap can be changed.

Properties

Parameter

Description

Name

Lets you rename the node.

2D PathChanges the X and Y values simultaneously and control the velocity of thechange.

Separate

Changes the X and Y values separately. Each one can be attached to separate
function curves.

245

Chapter 4: Nodes

Output Nodes

Output Nodes
The nodes found in the Output category are used to control the image outputted in the various views.
Display Node

247

246

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Display NodeThe Display node is an important node; it is used by the export and views to display your scene, primarily the
Camera and Timeline views. By default, a scene's node system always has a Display node which can be used toshow your entire scene, a single node or a group of nodes through a Composite or Group node. You might use it tosee one single character as you animate it, debug your node system as you create complex effects or export yourcomplete scene or a portion of it.

Harmony Advanced doesn't allow you to add Display nodes. The display selection feature is only available for the
possible scenario that you need to use a specific Display node created by a Harmony Premium user.

247

Chapter 4: Nodes

Sound Layer Properties

Sound Layer Properties
When you select a sound layer in the Timeline view, the options related to that layer appear in the Layer
Properties view.

248Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Chapter 5: Tools Properties
Harmony has a wide variety of drawing and manipulation tools and each one of them has a series of options andmodes available in the Tool Properties view. This section covers these options.

Brush Tool Properties (Vector)

251

Size and Smoothness Tab

252

Paper Texture Tab

253

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

255

Tip Tab257

Transparency Tab

262

Dual Tip Tab

265

Paper Texture Tab

269

Close Gap Tool Properties

272

Contour Editor Tool Properties

273

Cutter Tool Properties

275

Drawing Pivot Tool Properties

277

Dropper Tool Properties

279

Ellipse Tool Properties

280

Size and Smoothness Tab

283

Texture Tab

284

Envelope Tool Properties

285

Eraser Tool Properties

287

Size and Smoothness Tab

288

Soft Eraser Tab

289

Ink Tool Properties

290

Line Tool Properties

292

Size and Smoothness Tab

295

249

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Texture Tab

296

Morphing Tool Properties

298

Paint Tool Properties

301

Pencil Tool Properties

305

Size and Smoothness Tab

308

Texture Tab

309

Pencil Editor Tool Properties

311

Perspective Tool Properties

315

Polyline Tool Properties

317

Size and Smoothness Tab

318

Texture Tab

319

Rectangle Tool Properties

321

Size and Smoothness Tab

323

Texture Tab

324

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties

326

Rigging Tool Properties

328

Mode

328

Options

328

Operations

328

Select Tool Properties

329

Smooth Editor Tool Properties

336

Stroke Tool Properties

338

Text Tool Properties

339

Transform Tool Properties

342

Zoom Tool Properties

344

250

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Brush Tool Properties (Vector)
When you're drawing on a vector layer and select the Brush tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool
Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow to display
advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer
the control points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Brush Presets

Presets are created by saving the properties of the current tool to a newpreset, which you can reuse for repeated tasks. You can create as many
presets as you need.

New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

New Dynamic Brush

Allows you to create a new dynamic brush to clone custom patterns.

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously exported
via the Export Brushes command.

251

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties (Vector)

Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on a different
computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.
When drawing on vector layers, the Draw Behind mode lets you paintbehind existing art. By default, strokes appear over your work until you
release the tool.

Draw Behind

The Repaint Brush is used to repaint zones that have already been
painted, it will not affect empty zones or pencil lines. You can use thismode to paint tones or highlights onto your character.
Repaint BrushAs you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

Auto-Flatten Mode

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automatically flattens the new lines
created with the existing artwork as you draw in the Drawing or Camera
view. Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes and pencil lines will
flatten with pencil lines.

Respect Protected Colour

The Respect Protected Colour option prevent the colours you marked asprotected, in the Colour view, to be repainted using the Repaint Brushmode or any of the painting tools.

Use Stored Colour
Gradient

The Use Stored Colour Gradient option makes your tool use the previously
stored gradient position. This way, every new brush line or colour fill will
use the stored gradient position.

Size and Smoothness Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

252Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the width of
the stroke.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If
you do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.

Tip Shape

Lets you select a tip shape—from round and square ones to star shaped. This option
is disabled when using a textured brush.

Paper Texture Tab
You can create texture brushes to draw on vector layers. Enable the Paper Texture option to access the options.
Parameter

Description
The hardness value corresponds to the softness of the line edge. The lower thevalue, the softer the line edge will be. The higher the value, the sharper the line

Hardnessedge will be.

253

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Maximum Opacity

Brush Tool Properties (Vector)

This value corresponds to the transparency of the stroke when the pressure isheavy.
This value corresponds to the transparency of the stroke when the pressure islight and is a percentage of the Maximum Opacity value.

Minimum Opacity254Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)
When you're drawing on a bitmap layer and select the Brush tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool
Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow to display
advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.

Flow

The Flow parameter lets Lets you set the range for the rate at which paintflows from the brush. The analogy works better with a pen. The greater theflow, the more ink comes out, which gives you a more consistent line
colour and texture. If the flow is light, then the colour and texture of the line
may look spotty. The flow works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen
tablet.

Opacity

The Opacity parameter are where you set the transparency for a brushstroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.

Brush Presets

Presets are created by saving the properties of the current tool to a newpreset, which you can reuse for repeated tasks. You can create as many
presets as you need.

255

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously exported
via the Export Brushes command.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on a different
computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.
When drawing on vector layers, the Draw Behind mode lets you paintbehind existing art. By default, strokes appear over your work until you
release the tool.

Draw Behind

The Repaint Brush is used to repaint zones that have already been
painted, it will not affect empty zones or pencil lines. You can use thismode to paint tones or highlights onto your character.
Repaint Brush256

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Tip TabTool Name

Description

257

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tip
Library

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

This is where you select the shape of the brush tip. By default it is round. Note that some tips aredesigned to have semitransparent areas, even when the maximum brush opacity is set to 100%.
To create a custom brush tip, you must prepare the file ahead of time, either in Harmony or in a thirdparty software, such as Adobe Photoshop. Colour is not supported and transparency is notsupported in the traditional sense. Black appears as 100% opaque, white appears as 100%transparent and all the shades of grey in between appear as varying degrees of semitransparency. A
range of file formats are supported—.jpeg, .png, .tif, .psd, .tga to name a few. Alpha channels are
disregarded on import. It is recommended that your file be between 100 x 100 pixels and 400 x 400
pixels.
You can also import brush tips that you exported from Harmony, so you can share them withcolleagues.
The minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool produce the thick and thin effect on yourstroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.
l

MinimumandMaximum
SizelMaximum Size: Defines the maximum width of the stroke.
Minimum Size: Defines the minimum width of the stroke in relation to and as a percentage ofthe maximum size.

NOTE: Setting the Minimum Size value to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating width variation on your stroke. In other words, you would be forcing a uniform line width using the Maximum Size value.
The Roundness and Angle parameters allow you to change the shape and orientation of the brushtip.
Roundnessand AnglellRoundness: Squashes the height of the brush tip from its centre point. 100% roundness =the native height of the brush tip. A smaller percentage will make the brush tip look flatter andmore narrow. The squashing is NOT relative to the angle value—if the brush tip is rotated, thesquashing function still uses the brush tip's original orientation.
Angle: Rotates the brush tip counter-clockwise. 0° = the brush tip's native orientation.

258

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

The Hardness and Spacing parameters allow you to change the softness and spacing of the marks
made by the brush tip. You can preview the hardness and spacing at the top of the Bitmap Brush
Properties window, stroke preview area.
The hardness value corresponds to the softness of the brush tip's edges. The lower the value, thesofter the tip edge. The higher the value, the sharper the tip edge. Be aware that some brush tips are
not 100% opaque, so they will always appear somewhat soft, even at 100% hardness.
HardnessDefines the amount of space between each stamp of the brush. A value of 100% sets the stamp
marks edge to edge, if there is no white space around the shape. The larger the value, the greater
the space between marks. A really large value can make the brush stroke appear as a string ofindividual marks. Conversely, a small spacing value will give the appearance of a fluid brush stroke.
Spacing is only evident when making a continuous stroke.

Spacing

Randomness

The Randomness parameters let you create a varied bitmap brush stroke. Refining these options
can give your stroke a lovely, non-mechanical look.

RandomSize

You can create variation between the thick and thin of your brush stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Size values. If you add randomness to the mix, pressure sensitivity fromyour drawing tablet will still be applied. Light pressure will create random values around theminimum, while heavy pressure will create random values closer to the maximum. The larger thepercentage, the larger the range of random variation.

259

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

NOTE: Setting the Minimum Size to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating width variation
on your stroke, whether you are applying randomness or not. Therefore, you would be forcing auniform line width using the Maximum Size value.
Sets the range for random rotation around the set Angle value. For example, if the Angle is set to 45°
and the Random Angle set to 10°, the software will choose values between 40°–50° (plus or minus 5
degrees, equaling a total of 10 degrees).

RandomAngle

RandomSpacing

Sets the range for random spacing around the set Spacing value. For example, if the Spacing is set
to 50% and the Random Spacing is set to 10%, then Harmony will choose values between 45%–55% (plus or minus 5 percent, equaling a total of 10 percent).

260

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

261

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

Transparency Tab

Tool Name

Description
The Maximum and Minimum Flow parameters let you set the range for the rate
at which paint flows from your brush. The analogy works better with a pen.
The greater the flow, the more ink comes out, hence the more consistent thecolour and texture of the line. If the flow is light, then the colour and texture of
the line may look spotty. This feature works with the pressure sensitivity of apen tablet.

Maximum and Minimum FlowllMaximum Flow: Sets the maximum rate at which colour and texture
are applied as you create a fluid stroke.
Minimum Flow: Sets the minimum rate at which colour and texture areapplied as you create a fluid stroke. It is defined as a percentage of theMaximum Flow value. If the Minimum Flow value is set to 100%, thentablet pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The flow will be
set to the constant rate of the Maximum Flow value.

262

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

The Maximum and Minimum Opacity parameters are where you set theopacity range for a brush mark. This works with the pressure sensitivity of apen tablet.
llMaximum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the brush markwhen the pressure is heavy.
Minimum Opacity: Sets the transparency limit of the brush mark when
the pressure is very light. It is defined as a percentage of the Maximum
Opacity value. If the Minimum Opacity value is set to 100%, then tablet pressure sensitivity will no longer be applicable. The opacity will be
set to the constant rate of the Maximum Opacity value.

Maximum Opacity and Minimum Opacity

RandomnessTh Randomness parameter lets you set the range for the randomness of theflow and opacity. This works with the pressure sensitivity of a pen tablet.

Randomness Flow

You can create variation in the flow of your brush stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Flow values. If you add randomness to the mix,pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Lightpressure will create random values around the minimum, while heavypressure will create random values closer to the maximum. The larger thepercentage, the larger the range of random variation.

263

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

NOTE: Setting the Minimum Flow value to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating flow variation on your stroke, whether you are applying
randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform flow using theMaximum Flow value.

You can create variation in the opacity of your brush stroke just by setting theMaximum and Minimum Opacity values. If you add randomness to the mix,pressure sensitivity from your drawing tablet will still be applied. Lightpressure will create random values around the minimum, while heavypressure will create random values closer to the maximum. The larger thepercentage, the larger the range of random variation.
Random Opacity
NOTE: Setting the Minimum Opacity value to 100% eliminates the possibility of creating opacity variation on your stroke, whether you are applying randomness or not. That is, you would be forcing a uniform opacity
using the Maximum Opacity value.
264

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Dual Tip Tab
The Dual Tip tab lets you set the parameters for creating a dual tip brush. The primary bitmap brush tip and the dual
tip always work together. You can set the parameters for the primary tip in the Tip tab and those for the dual tip in theDual Tip tab. The Blend mode you select determines how the tips are combined.
You must select the Dual Tip option to access the tab's parameters.
By default, the Blend Mode is set to Multiply and the Random Angle to 360°.

265Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

Tool Name

Description

Blend Mode

The Blend modes let you decide how the primary tip and the dual tip are combined.

Multiply

This is the default blend mode. When the two brush tips are combined in thismode, they essentially cut each other out in overlapping areas, where one or bothtips have an area of 100% transparency. The less opaque the brush tips are, thelighter their combination.

266

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Colour Dodge

In this mode, the primary tip cuts out the shape of the dual tip. Where the tip
shapes overlap, within the boundaries of the primary shape, the colour and opacity
appear darker.

267

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

CombineBrush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

This mode treats the two tips as two different and separate brushes that have thesame colour and follow the same path.

268

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Paper Texture Tab
The Paper Texture tab lets you view and select a paper-like texture for your brush. You can also import paper
textures that were previously exported.
You must select this option to access the tab's parameters.

269

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Brush Tool Properties (Bitmap)

Tool
Name

Description

TextureScale

Increase or decreases the size of the paper texture.

Additive

This option layers the texture on top of itself as you scribble overlapping lines in one continuous
stroke. If this option is turned off, areas of overlapping lines from a single, continuous stroke willappear the same, in terms of darkness and texture, as non-overlapping areas.

270Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

This option defines the way separate, overlapping strokes behave. If this option is enabled, thepaper texture's position does not change with each sweep of the brush. If this option is disabled,each sweep of the brush produces a different texture position. The texture orientation always stays
the same.

Aligned271

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Close Gap Tool Properties

Close Gap Tool Properties
When you select the Close Gap tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Auto-Flatten Mode

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automaticallyflattens the new lines created with the existingartwork as you draw in the Drawing or Camera view.
Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes andpencil lines will flatten with pencil lines.

272

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Contour Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Contour Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt totemporarily switch between the Marquee and Lassomodes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt
to temporarily switch between the Marquee and Lassomodes.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it
on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you
can also snap your anchor point to.

Show Contour Editor Controls

Use the Show Contour Editor Controls option to show
the contour editor controls. You can use these controls
to scale, reposition and rotate the selected anchor
points.

Apply to Line and Colour Art The Apply to Line and Colour Art option uses the273

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Contour Editor Tool Properties

concept of Line Art and Colour Art layers. Use thisoption to apply an action such as selecting, resizing or
erasing a drawing on both Line Art and Colour Art
layers, as well as the Overlay and Underlay layers.
Smooth Selection

The Smooth operation lets you smooth out selecteddrawing strokes and remove extra points.
lSplit Pencil Line and Join
Pencil Lines

274

From the top menu, select Drawing> Optimize> Smooth or press Alt + Shift + S.

When drawing with the Polyline tool, your drawing has
an even line thickness. You can use the Pencil Editor toadjust the thickness point by point, but if you want toadjust it quicker, you can use the Split Pencil Line andPoint Pencil Lines options to create segments andapply a pencil stencil to your drawing. Note that if you
did not join the pencil lines on your polyline stroke, thesegments between the points will act as separated
segments.

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Cutter Tool Properties
When you select the Cutter tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Ico- ToolnName

Description

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt to temporarily switch between the Marqueeand Lasso modes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt to temporarily switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Apply to The Apply to Line and Colour Art option uses the concept of Line Art and Colour Art layers. UseLine and this option to apply an action such as selecting, resizing or erasing a drawing on both Line Art andColour Art Colour Art layers, as well as the Overlay and Underlay layers.
Apply toSyncedDrawing
LayersApplies to the Camera view only. Works in conjunction with the Works on Single Drawing. Only
selects lines from the current drawing and drawing layers synced to the current drawing.
Layers are synced when drawings need to be separated on different layers, but need to have thesame timing. When you enable the Apply to Synced Drawing Layers option, only drawings onlayers synced with other layers will be available for cutting. When you click on a synced layer in
the Timeline view, the other layers that it is synced with will display the link icon.

In the example above, the torso layer is synced with the torso_pattern_1 and torso_
pattern_2 layers.
Use
Mouse
GestureWhen using the Lasso selection type, the Use Mouse Gesture option lets you automaticallydelete any extra sections of line in your artwork by simply dragging your mouse over it.

NOTE: For this operation to work, you lines CANNOT be flattened.

275

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Use
Mouse
GestureBreakerMode

Cutter Tool Properties

When using the Lasso selection type, the Use Mouse Gesture Breaker Mode option lets you
draw an invisible stroke on a pencil line to cut it in two individual objects. Once a pencil line is cut
with this option, you will be able to select the two portions independently with either the Cutter
tool, Pencil Editor tool or Select tool.

NOTE: This option only works with pencil lines.
Tip StyleIf you erase the end of a pencil line or erase a pencil line through the centre, new line tips or line
ends are created. Use the Tip Style option to customize the shape of the new line tips that are
created.

Antialiasing

When drawing on a bitmap layer, lines are no longer clean vector shapes. For the edges to besmooth, a slight amount of antialiasing is used. When using the Cutter tool, you can cut a portionof your drawing with or without antialiasing. By default, the option is enabled. If you want to cut
your drawing using a hard edge, you can select the Antialiasing Off option.

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.
Degrees
CW
Rotate 90 Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Degrees
CCW

276

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Drawing Pivot Tool Properties
The Drawing Pivot tool lets you set the pivots on your character. You can set the drawing pivots on drawings andsymbols.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Setting the Drawing Pivot
for Symbols on All Frames

The Set the Pivot for Symbol on All Frames option isenabled by default. When you set a drawing pivot on asymbol, all of its cells use the same drawing pivot. Thismeans you do not have to set a drawing pivot on all
frames. Once you set it, it is done.
If you prefer to set a different drawing pivot for a seriesof cells, you can deselect the option and set your pivots
on each cell or cell range.

NOTE: If you have already set several different
pivots on your symbol's cells and selected the Set
the Pivot for Symbol on All Frames option, once
you set a new pivot on the same symbol, all of its
pivots will be reset and will use your new pivot.
Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it
on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you
can also snap your anchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled
grid.

Reset Pivot

When you click the Reset Pivot option, the drawing
pivot of the selected drawing or symbol is reset to thecentre of the Camera view.

277

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Drawing Pivot Tool Properties

Copying Pivot on Parent
SymbolWhen you import new extra drawings, such as hands
and mouths, you can use the drawing pivot that was set
on your drawings and report them to the symbol's cells.
Use the Copy Pivot to Parent Symbol command for
this.

NOTE: When you copy drawing pivots to the parent symbol, there is no link between the drawings'
pivots and the symbol's pivots. If you modify thedrawing pivot later, it will not link to the symbol.
You would need to perform the operation again. If
you need to modify the symbol's pivots, you can doit directly on the symbol's cells.

278

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Dropper Tool Properties
When you select the Dropper tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Sample All Layers

On bitmap layers, if strokes with transparency locatedon separated art layers overlap, the Dropper will pickthe combination of the two colours. When disabled, theDropper will pick the colour on the current art layer.

Do not Pick Transparency

On bitmap layers, when enabled, the dropper will pickthe colour at 100% of opacity even if the selection has
some transparency.

279

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Ellipse Tool Properties

Ellipse Tool Properties
When you select the Ellipse tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view. There are a few
less options available when working on a bitmap layer.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow todisplay advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.

Shape

You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

280

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

l

l

l

Presets

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first
tip you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as thecorner style. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel
style.

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create andsave your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise
sizes and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same
preset list.

New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously
exported via the Export Brushes command.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on adifferent computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.
When drawing on vector layers, the Draw Behind mode lets you paintbehind existing art. By default, strokes appear over your work until you
release the tool.

Draw Behind

Automatic Filling

Use the Automatic Filling option to automatically fill your shape with theselected colour as you draw. By default, the Shape tool creates theoutline of an empty shape that you can later fill using the Paint tool.
This option is unavailable for the line tool.

281

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Ellipse Tool Properties

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as
you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will
snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying
temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

Snap to Grid

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art
layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automatically flattens the newlines created with the existing artwork as you draw in the Drawing or
Camera view. Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes and pencil
lines will flatten with pencil lines.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE:
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with the AutoFlatten mode are essentially cut into segments by the overlap andcan be treated as individual lines.

282

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

The Use Stored Colour Gradient option makes your tool use theUse Stored Colour Gradipreviously stored gradient position. This way, every new brush line orentcolour fill will use the stored gradient position.
Enable this option to draw perfect circle (ratio 1:1) without holding any
keyboard shortcuts. As an alternative, you can hold down the Shift key.

Draw Circle

Size and Smoothness Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the width of
the stroke.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If
you do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

283

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Ellipse Tool Properties

Texture Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Copy to Preferences

You can add a pencil texture to your preset preferences.

New Texture

Adds a new custom pencil texture to the list.

Delete Texture

Deletes a texture preset from the list.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected texture to keep the list organized.

Presets

Harmony provides a variety of pencil texture presets and also lets you
create and save your own.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette assigned to hold the pencil textures. Use
the Colour View menu to assign a new palette.

284

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Envelope Tool Properties
Selecting the Envelope tool displays its properties and options in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Width and Height

Increase the width and height values to add morecolumns and rows to the deformation grids.

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt totemporarily switch between the Marquee and Lassomodes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt
to temporarily switch between the Marquee and Lassomodes.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it
on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you
can also snap your anchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled
grid.

285

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Envelope Tool Properties

Show Advanced Controls

To display more controls,you can click on the Show
Advanced Controls button.

Apply to Line and Colour Art The Apply to Line and Colour Art option uses theconcept of Line Art and Colour Art layers. Use thisoption to apply an action such as selecting, resizing or
erasing a drawing on both Line Art and Colour Art
layers, as well as the Overlay and Underlay layers.
Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

SmoothYou can modify the central line smoothness of your line
using this option. This parameter smooths the deformedlines. Increasing the value will result in a smoother linewith fewer control points. The more you increase thevalue, the less details and curves you will get. Use theleft and right arrows to increment the value by one fullunit. Use the Up - Down slider to quickly increment thevalue.

286

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Eraser Tool Properties
When you're drawing on vector layer and you select the Eraser
Properties view.

tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool

The bitmap eraser options are identical to those of the bitmap brush with one obvious exception. Instead ofcustomizing the parameters of a mark or stroke, you will be customizing the parameters for the absence of a mark or
stroke.
It is a good idea to create an eraser preset with the identical properties of a brush preset and to use them as a pair.
That way, when part of a stroke is erased, its soft textured look is not interrupted with a hard edged eraser mark.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow to display
advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer
the control points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Eraser Presets

Presets are created by saving the properties of the current tool to a newpreset, which you can reuse for repeated tasks. You can create as many
presets as you need.

New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

287

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Eraser Tool Properties

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously exported
via the Export Brushes command.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on a different
computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.

Apply to Line and Colour
Art

The Apply to Line and Colour Art option uses the concept of Line Art andColour Art layers. Use this option to apply an action such as selecting,resizing or erasing a drawing on both Line Art and Colour Art layers, aswell as the Overlay and Underlay layers.
If you erase the end of a pencil line or erase a pencil line through thecentre, new line tips or line ends are created. Use the Tip Style option tocustomize the shape of the new line tips that are created.

Tip Style

Applies to the Camera view only. Works in conjunction with the Works on
Apply to Synced Drawing
Single Drawing. Only selects lines from the current drawing and drawing
Layerslayers synced to the current drawing.

Size and Smoothness Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Name

Description

288

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the widthof the stroke.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If
you do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value willbe ignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.

Tip Shape

Lets you select a tip shape—from round and square ones to star shaped. This
option is disabled when using a textured brush.

Soft Eraser Tab
You can create texture brushes to draw on vector layers. Enable the Soft Eraser option to access the options.

HardnessDefines the softness of the stroke edge. The lower the value, the softer the strokeedge will be. The higher the value, the sharper the stroke edge will be.

Saturation

Lets you adjust the softness of edge feathering. Works in conjunction with theHardness, e.g. 100% Hardness will yield no results in saturation change. 0%
Hardness will allow a fine tuning of the feathering of the soft stroke edge.

Maximum Opacity

The transparency of the brush when the pressure is heavy. A smaller value will
leave semi-transparent colour and texture. A larger value will ensure thateverything is properly erased. This option in unavailable if the Keep Vectors
option is disabled.

Minimum Opacity

Sets the minimum transparency of the brush, in relation to the Maximum Opacity,when the pressure is very light. A smaller value will leave semi-transparent colour
and texture. A larger value will ensure that everything is properly erased. This
option in unavailable if the Keep Vectors option is disabled.

Keep Vectors

Keeps the vector frames around your strokes intact, only the texture fill disappears. Disabling this option will cut the stroke's vector frame into different
pieces when the Eraser tool passes over it. If you disable this option, the maximum and minimum opacity sliders are disabled as well.

289

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Ink Tool Properties

Ink Tool Properties
When you select the Ink tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Tool

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold
Alt to temporarily switch between the Marqueeand Lasso modes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click andhold Alt to temporarily switch between the
Marquee and Lasso modes.

Show Inkable Lines

Highlights all pencil lines (no brush strokes) on theselected layer. Pencil line segments that are
already inked with the selected swatch colour
from the colour palette are also not highlighted.

Be Smart on Connecting Lines

As you hover and move the cursor acrossintersecting pencil lines, the path that you create
will be highlighted. When you click on your mouseor stylus the highlighted segments are inked. With
this option disabled, all the intersecting segmentsthat your cursor comes near will be highlighted
and become part of the selection, even if they
were not situated in the direction of the chosen
path.

NOTE: This option only works if the Ink tool
is in Hover mode.

Select ModeUse this mode instead of the Hover Mode. In the
Hover Mode, any potentially inkable pencil line
will have its central vector line highlighted as the
Ink tool’s cursor hovers over it. Use Ctrl (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ (Mac OS X) to toggle between
the two modes.

Select Newly Painted, Repainted,
and Unpainted Contours/Lines

In the Paint tool properties, this option keeps aselection highlighted around the latest paintedzone after using the Paint, Repaint, Unpaint, orPaint Unpainted tool.

290

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Raise

As you ink the pencil line, the segment will be
moved on top of the other intersecting strokes.
Disable this option for the line to be sent behind.
Hold down the Alt key to perform the opposite
operation as you ink.

Mitre

As you hover over two perpendicular or nearly perpendicular segments, a highlighted path with acorner is created. Clicking on these highlighted
segments inks both segments and makes themappear as a single stroke with a corner or bend.
Options include: As Is, Round, Miter, and Bevel.

Tip StyleLets you customize the edge of the Ink tool.
Options include: Round, Flat, and Bevel.

291

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Line Tool Properties

Line Tool Properties
When you select the Line tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view. There are a few less
options available when working on a bitmap layer.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow to display
advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.

Shape

You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

292

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

l

l

l

Presets

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first
tip you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as thecorner style. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel
style.

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency andconsistency.
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same
preset list.

New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously exported
via the Export Brushes command.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on a different
computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.
When drawing on vector layers, the Draw Behind mode lets you paintbehind existing art. By default, strokes appear over your work until you
release the tool.

Draw Behind

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as
you move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will
snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying
temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

293Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Line Tool Properties

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art
layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automatically flattens the newlines created with the existing artwork as you draw in the Drawing or
Camera view. Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes and pencil
lines will flatten with pencil lines.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE:
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with the AutoFlatten mode are essentially cut into segments by the overlap andcan be treated as individual lines.
When using the pencil tool, you can automatically close strokes with aninvisible stroke.

Auto-Close Gap

It is recommended to keep this option enabled when drawing with thePencil tool.

294

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

The Line Building mode is very useful when drawing long lines andcurves in small increments with pencil lines or the Line tool. As the
pencil lines are central vector lines, it may be difficult to align the line
tips perfectly to create a uniform stroke and close all gaps.
In this mode, you can draw lines in small increments and the tips are
merge into one single stroke.

Line Building Mode

NOTE: This mode only works with pencil lines or the line tool.
The Use Stored Colour Gradient option makes your tool use theUse Stored Colour Gradipreviously stored gradient position. This way, every new brush line orentcolour fill will use the stored gradient position.
Draw Circle

Enable this option to draw perfect circle (ratio 1:1) without holding any
keyboard shortcuts. As an alternative, you can hold down the Shift key.

Size and Smoothness Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the width of
the stroke.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If
you do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

295

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Line Tool Properties

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Copy to Preferences

You can add a pencil texture to your preset preferences.

New Texture

Adds a new custom pencil texture to the list.

Delete Texture

Deletes a texture preset from the list.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected texture to keep the list organized.

Presets

Harmony provides a variety of pencil texture presets and also lets you
create and save your own.

296

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette assigned to hold the pencil textures. Use
the Colour View menu to assign a new palette.

297

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Morphing Tool Properties

Morphing Tool Properties
As you create and adjust your morphing sequences, you will often use the Tool Properties view. Using this view
allows you to do things such as toggle between your key drawings, adjust the easing or select a hint type.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Hint TypeThe Hint Type drop-down menu allows you to selectthe correct hint to remedy any problem areas in yourdrawing.

You can have more than one hint type in yourdrawings. You can mix all of the hint types in yourmorphing sequence.
Do not Pick Transparency

298

The Hide Hints button temporarily Temporarily hides
the hint points from the key drawings. Use this option
when you have a series of hint points hiding somelines you would like to see.

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference GuideShow Morphing in PlaceThe Show Morphing In Place option is used withmorphing layers. Enabling this option prevents thecurrently selected morphing layer from being shownon top of the others and maintains the correct layerordering.

Suggest Hints

The Suggest Hints option is used to automaticallyset Automatically sets hint points on key drawings
as a help tool. If you're not sure where to set hints,
you can use this option. It will set the main hints
which you can then fine tune.

Switch Between Drawings

The Switch Between Drawings button is used totoggle Toggles between the two key drawings in yourmorphing sequence. This option is useful whilesetting hints. You can use the default keyboard
shortcut F4 to toggle between your drawings.

Flatten

The Flatten option is used when you have to morph asequence with a semi-transparent or transparent
colour in it.

Quality

The Quality setting is used to make the lines of themorphed drawings smoother. Adjust this parameter
when you are doing an extreme close up of youranimation.

Morphing Layers

The Morphing Layers option is used when working
with morphing layers. You can add, remove andmanage your different morphing layers in this space.

To create new drawings, double-click on the blankarea under the From section to create the source
drawing and the To section for the destination
drawing and type a different value than the ones used
for the main layer.
Add Layer

Adds a new Morphing layer.

Delete Layer

Deletes the selected Morphing layer.

Move Up

Moves the new layer up in the stack.

Move Down

Moves the new lower up in the stack.

299

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Morphing Tool Properties

Start

Indicates the start frame of the selected Morphing
layer.

Stop

Indicates the end frame of the selected Morphing
layer.

Ease in and Ease out

The Easing option is used to adjust the starting andending velocity of your morphing sequence so thatthe motion is smooth and not mechanical.
You can adjust the Ease In and Ease Out value by
dragging your cursor up and down or typing a newvalue. The values go from -1.0 to 1.0.

Convert Hints

The Convert Hints option is used to switch the typeof the selected hint points. This option is useful when
you position hints and then realize they are not theright type. You can select them and convert them tothe correct type instead of deleting them and setting
new ones.

Use the Morphing tool to select the hints and thenconvert them by going to the Tool Properties viewand selecting the new hint type from the Convert
Hints drop-down menu.
Time

The Time field is used to set the timing on Appearing
Point and Vanishing Point hints. These hints areused to set the trajectory of appearing and vanishingobjects, With the Time field, select your Appearing
Point or Vanishing Point hint and type the frame
number on which the object will start its appearing or
vanishing animation.

300

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Paint Tool Properties
When you select the Paint tool, its properties and options appears in the Tools Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt totemporarily switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt totemporarily switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Paint Modes

The Paint tool has four different modes available:
l

l

l

l

Paint and Remove Textures

The Paint mode paints everything it touches, including
empty and filled zones.
The Paint Unpainted mode paints only empty zones.
Any line or filled zone will remain unchanged.
The Repaint mode paints everything it touches except
empty zones. Any zone that is not painted will remain
intact.
The Unpaint mode unpaints everything it touches,
including empty and filled zones.

The Paint and Remove Texture option is used when you
vectorized images as greyscale texture style. An image
vectorized as texture is a mix of bitmap filling encapsulated ina vector-based frame. Painting a textured zones with the
Paint tool will change the tint of the textured lines. Painting
the textured zones using the Paint and Remove Texture
option transforms the bitmap filling into a 100% vector basedzone and fills it with a solid colour.

301

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Paint Tool Properties

Apply to Multiple Drawings

The Apply to Multiple Drawings option is used for fast painting
in hand-drawn animation. When you want to paint several
drawings in a same layer at once, such as a walk cycle, you
can enable this option and make a selection in the Camera or
Drawing view. All the closed zones located within your Paint
tool selection are painted with the selected colour swatch.

You do not need to enable the Onion Skin preview to use thisoption. The option will stay enabled only for the next action. If
you want to use it again, you must click on the Apply toMultiple Drawings button again, or press Alt + A.
Apply to All Visible Draw- The Apply to All Visible Drawings option is used to paintings
several drawings on separated layers on the current frames. If
you have a character broken in several layers, you can enable
this option to paint all your layers at once. The operation is
only applied on the current frame. This option will stayenabled only for the next action. If you want to use it again,
you must click on the Apply to All Visible Drawings button
again.

NOTE: This option is only available in the Camera viewand does not affect symbols.
Respect Protected Colour

The Respect Protected Colour option is enabled by default. In
your Colour view, you can protect some colour swatches toavoid repainting or unpainting the zones linked to that swatch.
If you disable this option the Paint tool will not follow theprotect colour rule and will repaint or unpaint the protectedcolours on your drawings until you enable the option again.

Use Stored Colour Gradi- When you paint a zone with a gradient or textured colour
entswatch, the gradient or texture’s position is set relative to thesize of the zone you are painting. If you want the Paint tool to
use a particular size and position, you must first store yourdesired position and size using the Select tool and thenenable the Use Stored Colour Gradient option in the Paint tool
properties.

302

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Select Newly Painted,
Repainted, andUnpainted Contours/Lines

In the Paint tool properties, this option keeps a selection
highlighted around the latest painted zone after using the
Paint, Repaint, Unpaint, or Paint Unpainted tool.

Close Gap

The Close Gap option has four modes available. When theoption is enabled, Harmony will consume more resources
while painting.

l

l

l

l

303

No Close Gap: The moment a zone has a gap in it, thePaint tool will not fill the area.
Close Small Gap: If a zone has a small gap in it, thePaint tool will fill the area. You can zoom out to makethe gap appear smaller and the Paint tool will paint.
Close Medium Gap: If a zone has a medium gap in it,
the Paint tool will fill the area. You can zoom out tomake the gap appear smaller and the Paint tool will
paint.
Close Large Gap: If a zone has a large gap in it, thePaint tool will fill the area. You can zoom out to makethe gap appear smaller and the Paint tool will paint.

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Paint Tool Properties304

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Pencil Tool Properties
When you select the Pencil

Icon

tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow to display
advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer
the control points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
305

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Pencil Tool Propertiesll

End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the cornerstyle. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Harmony provides a variety of pencil presets and thickness stencils andalso lets you create and save your own. It is a good idea to create andsave pencils with precise sizes and parameters when you draw anddesign for efficiency and consistency.

Presets

A thickness stencil saves the thickness information across the length ofthe line. When drawing with a thickness stencil, the pressure sensitivity ofthe tablet is discarded. A thickness stencil can be used while drawing, orapplied afterwards.
You also have the possibility to apply different textures to your lines byeither using the default presets or importing your own.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import thosethat others have created. This is a good way for you and project
collaborators to keep a consistent look for the project.

New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously exported
via the Export Brushes command.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on a different
computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.
When drawing on vector layers, the Draw Behind mode lets you paintbehind existing art. By default, strokes appear over your work until you
release the tool.

Draw Behind

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

Auto-Flatten Mode

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automatically flattens the new lines

306

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

created with the existing artwork as you draw in the Drawing or Camera
view. Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes and pencil lines will
flatten with pencil lines.

NOTE:
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with the AutoFlatten mode are essentially cut into segments by the overlap andcan be treated as individual lines.
When using the pencil tool, you can automatically close strokes with aninvisible stroke.

Auto-Close Gap

It is recommended to keep this option enabled when drawing with thePencil tool.
The Line Building mode is very useful when drawing long lines and curves
in small increments with pencil lines or the Line tool. As the pencil lines
are central vector lines, it may be difficult to align the line tips perfectly tocreate a uniform stroke and close all gaps.
In this mode, you can draw lines in small increments and the tips are
merge into one single stroke.

Line Building Mode

NOTE: This mode only works with pencil lines or the line tool.

307

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Pencil Tool Properties

The Auto Adjust Thickness tool is useful when you want to render aportion of a line thicker. When tracing a drawing on paper, you will often go
back to a section of a curve to make it thicker to add dynamism to the line.
Using the Auto Adjust Thickness tool, you can draw highlight strokes overthe section to make thicker. Once you release the pen or mouse, the line
becomes thicker following the shape and curve of the original stroke. Thisway is much faster and smoother than using the Pencil Editor tool. You do
not have to add extra points and adjust the position and Bezier handles.

Auto Adjust Thickness

The default overlay colour is light yellow. If this colour is difficult to see
because of the background or drawing colour, you can adjust the colour.

Line Pushing Mode

The Line Pushing Mode option lets you draw highlight strokes overexisting pencil lines. You can reshape the curves. Depending how you
draw the pushing stroke over your line, the highlighted section will bereshaped in one direction or the other.
The default overlay colour is light yellow. If this colour is difficult to see
because of the background or drawing colour, you can adjust the colour.

You can change the colour for the Line Pushing Mode anf the Auto Adjust
Thickness option by clicking on the Colour swatch and selecting a newcolour in the Colour Picking window.
ColourSize and Smoothness Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

308Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the width of
the stroke.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If
you do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

309

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Icon

Pencil Tool Properties

Tool Name

Description

Copy to Preferences

You can add a pencil texture to your preset preferences.

New Texture

Adds a new custom pencil texture to the list.

Delete Texture

Deletes a texture preset from the list.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected texture to keep the list organized.

Presets

Harmony provides a variety of pencil texture presets and also lets you
create and save your own.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette assigned to hold the pencil textures. Use
the Colour View menu to assign a new palette.

310Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Pencil Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Pencil Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Ico- Tool
n
Name
Lasso

Description
Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt to temporarily switch between the Marqueeand Lasso modes.

311

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Pencil Editor Tool Properties

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt to temporarily switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Maximum
Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the width of the stroke.

Minimum
Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If you do nothave pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will be ignored.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew. You canchoose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew. You canchoose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves abruptly. You
could also define the Join style as the corner style. You can choose between Round,
Mitre and Bevel style.

Harmony provides a variety of pencil presets and thickness stencils and also lets you createand save your own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes andparameters when you draw and design for efficiency and consistency.

Presets

A thickness stencil saves the thickness information across the length of the line. When drawing
with a thickness stencil, the pressure sensitivity of the tablet is discarded. A thickness stencil
can be used while drawing, or applied afterwards.
You also have the possibility to apply different textures to your lines by either using the default
presets or importing your own.
You can export the pencil presets that you have created and import those that others havecreated. This is a good way for you and project collaborators to keep a consistent look for the
project.

New
Brush

Allows to create a new preset from the selected pencil line.

DeleteBrush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

RenameBrush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Small
Thumbnail, Large
Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large square thumbnails or a list
Thumbof stroke preview.
nail, and
StrokeView

312

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Copy toPreferences

You can add a pencil texture to your preset preferences.

New Texture

Adds a new custom pencil texture to the list.

DeleteTextureDeletes a texture preset from the list.

RenameTextureRenames the selected texture to keep the list organized.

Presets

Harmony provides a variety of pencil texture presets and also lets you create and save yourown.

Pencil TexDisplays the colour palette assigned to hold the pencil textures. Use the Colour View menu totureassign a new palette.
PaletteThe Smooth operation lets you smooth out selected drawing strokes and remove extra points.
l

From the top menu, select Drawing> Optimize > Smooth or press Alt + Shift + S.

SmoothSelection

The Pump Pencil Pressure option is used to increase the line thickness of a selected area on a
pencil line.

Pump Pencil Pressure

The Deflate Pencil Pressure option is used to decrease the line thickness of a selected area ona pencil line.

DeflatePencilPressure313

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Pencil Editor Tool Properties

Pencil lines are central vector lines and it might be difficult to match pencil line’s tips properly toalign them and make it look like it is one single line. With the Select tool, you can select several
pencil lines and merge them as one single object using the Merge Pencil Lines option. The endsof your lines are adjusted to form one single line.

Merge Pencil Lines

The Reverse Pencil Thickness option inverts the thick and thin section on a selected pencil line.
This option will take the thickest size on the line and apply it to the thinnest, and it will apply thethinnest to the thickest.

ReversePencilThickness

314

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Perspective Tool Properties
Selecting the Perspective tool displays its properties and options in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt totemporarily switch between the Marquee and Lassomodes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt
to temporarily switch between the Marquee and Lassomodes.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it
on. As soon as you move it close enough to anotherline, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line
while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you
can also snap your anchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled
grid.

Selection Tool Options

Apply to Line and Colour Art The Apply to Line and Colour Art option uses theconcept of Line Art and Colour Art layers. Use thisoption to apply an action such as selecting, resizing or
erasing a drawing on both Line Art and Colour Art
layers, as well as the Overlay and Underlay layers.
Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clock-315

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Perspective Tool Properties

wise.

316

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Polyline Tool Properties
When you select the Polyline tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow to display
advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.
Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency and consistency.

Presets
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.
New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously exported

317

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Polyline Tool Properties

via the Export Brushes command.
Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on a different
computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as you
move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will snap to it.
As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.

Automatically Create
Colour Art

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automatically flattens the new lines
created with the existing artwork as you draw in the Drawing or Camera
view. Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes and pencil lines will
flatten with pencil lines.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE:
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with the AutoFlatten mode are essentially cut into segments by the overlap andcan be treated as individual lines.

Size and Smoothness Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

318Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the width of
the stroke.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If
you do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value will beignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

319

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Icon

Polyline Tool Properties

Tool Name

Description

Copy to Preferences

You can add a pencil texture to your preset preferences.

New Texture

Adds a new custom pencil texture to the list.

Delete Texture

Deletes a texture preset from the list.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected texture to keep the list organized.

Presets

Harmony provides a variety of pencil texture presets and also lets you
create and save your own.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette assigned to hold the pencil textures. Use
the Colour View menu to assign a new palette.

320Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Rectangle Tool Properties
When you select the Rectangle tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view. There are a few
less options available when working on a bitmap layer.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Preview area lets you see a preview of the selected or customized
stroke. You can click on the Show Extended Properties arrow to display
advanced customization parameters.

Previewing the Stroke

Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines
the width of the stroke.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip
you drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
321

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Rectangle Tool PropertieslJoin: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line
curves abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the cornerstyle. You can choose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Harmony provides a variety of presets and also lets you create and saveyour own. It is a good idea to create and save pencils with precise sizes
and parameters when you draw and design for efficiency and consistency.
Presets
All tools using pencil lines share the same preset list. Therefore, thePolyline, Line, Rectangle, Ellipse, and Pencil tools share the same preset
list.
New Brush

Allows to create a new preset.

Delete Brush

Allows you to delete your custom presets.

Rename Brush

Allows you to rename a custom preset.

Import Brushes

Allows you to import a set of XML Harmony presets previously exported
via the Export Brushes command.

Export Brushes

Allows you to export Harmony presets to backup or import on a different
computer.

Small Thumbnail, Large
Thumbnail, and Stroke
View

Allows you to display the presets as small square thumbnails, large
square thumbnails or a list of stroke preview.
When drawing on vector layers, the Draw Behind mode lets you paintbehind existing art. By default, strokes appear over your work until you
release the tool.

Draw Behind

Use the Automatic Filling option to automatically fill your shape with theselected colour as you draw. By default, the Shape tool creates the outlineof an empty shape that you can later fill using the Paint tool. This option isunavailable for the line tool.
Automatic Filling

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As soon as you
move it close enough to another line, your point or selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

322

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

As you draw in the Line Art layer, the Automatically Create Colour Art
option instantly creates the corresponding strokes in the Colour Art layer.
Automatically Create
Colour Art

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automatically flattens the new lines
created with the existing artwork as you draw in the Drawing or Camera
view. Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes and pencil lines will
flatten with pencil lines.

Auto-Flatten Mode

NOTE:
Using the Select tool, you can use select and remove a segment offlattened pencil lines. Overlapping pencil lines drawn with the AutoFlatten mode are essentially cut into segments by the overlap andcan be treated as individual lines.
The Use Stored Colour Gradient option makes your tool use the previously
Use Stored Colour Gradistored gradient position. This way, every new brush line or colour fill willent
use the stored gradient position.
Draw Square

Enable this option to draw perfect square (ratio 1:1) without holding any
keyboard shortcuts. As an alternative, you can hold down the Shift key.

Size and Smoothness Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

323

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Rectangle Tool Properties

Tool Name

Description

Maximum Size

Defines the maximum size of your drawing tool. This parameter defines the widthof the stroke.

Minimum Size

Defines the minimum size of your stroke as a percentage of the maximum size. If
you do not have pressure sensitivity from a pen table, the minimum size value willbe ignored.

Smoothing

Defines the number of control points added to the centre line. The fewer the control
points the smoother (but less faithful) the line.

Contour Smoothing

Defines the number of points on the contour share of your stroke. This will smoothout the bumps and waves on tour contour shape of your brush strokes.
You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

Shape
l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you
drew. You can choose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew.
You can choose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves
abruptly. You could also define the Join style as the corner style. You canchoose between Round, Mitre and Bevel style.

Texture Tab
You can access advanced properties by clicking on the Previewing the Stoke button in the Tool Properties view.

324Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Copy to Preferences

You can add a pencil texture to your preset preferences.

New Texture

Adds a new custom pencil texture to the list.

Delete Texture

Deletes a texture preset from the list.

Rename Texture

Renames the selected texture to keep the list organized.

Presets

Harmony provides a variety of pencil texture presets and also lets you
create and save your own.

Pencil Texture Palette

Displays the colour palette assigned to hold the pencil textures. Use theColour View menu to assign a new palette.

325

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties

Reposition All Drawings Tool Properties
When you use the Reposition All Drawings tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

OptionDescription

Apply to Synced Drawing Layers

Applies to the Camera view only. Works inconjunction with the Works on Single Drawing. Only selects lines from the current drawing and drawing layers synced to the current
drawing.

Flip Horizontal

Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees
clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees
counter-clockwise.
Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields
to enter specific values and precisely
reposition the selected shape.

Offset X and Y

1. X: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along the X-axis.
2. Y: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along the Y-axis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up anddown arrows to modify the value in the
X or Y value field.
Use the Width and Height operation fields to

Width and Height326

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

enter specific values to resize the selectedshape with precision.

1. Width: Type a value in this field to resize the width of your selection.
2. Height: Type a value in this field to resize the height of your selection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up anddown arrows to modify the value in the
Width or Height fields.
4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lockor unlock the ratio between the Widthand Height values.
The Angle operation lets you to enter specificvalues and accurately rotate the selectedshape.

Angle
1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field
to rotate your selection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up anddown arrows to modify the value in theAngle value field.

327

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Rigging Tool Properties

Rigging Tool Properties
In the Tool Properties view, you can customize not only the behaviour of the tool but also the settings of thedeformers that you will create.

Mode
Name

ButtonDescription

Bone Mode

Sets the Rigging tool to create Bone deformers.

Game Bone Mode

Sets the Rigging tool to create Game Bone deformers.

Options
Parameter

ButtonShow All Manipulators(Show All Controls)

Description
Lets you immediately see the resting position in red (Setup)
and the animated position in green.

Operations
Name

ButtonDescription

Reset Deform (Reset Current Keyframe)

Copies the resting position of the deformation skeleton to
the current frame.

328

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Select Tool Properties
When you use the Select tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt totemporarily switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt totemporarily switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Snap to Contour

Snaps your selection or point to any line you position it on. As
soon as you move it close enough to another line, your point or
selection will snap to it.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap youranchor point to.

Snap to Grid

Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

Select by Colour

Lets you select all the zones and lines in your drawing painted
with the same colour swatch.

Selection Tool Options

In the Camera or Drawing view, click on any zone or line in yourdrawing. All zones and lines of the same colour are selected.
Click the Select tool again to return to the regular Select mode.

NOTE: Only the zones painted with the SAME colour

329

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Select Tool Properties

swatch will be selected. If another zone is coloured with theexact same RGB value (same colour), but not painted withthe same colour swatch, it will not be selected.
Permanent Selection

Lets you maintain a selection over multiple drawings. Once thisoption is enabled, the selection zone made using the Select tool
will remain as you navigate through drawings of the same layerand drawings from other drawing layers. This option can be used
to simultaneously delete artwork inside or outside of the selection
on several drawings when combined with the Apply to Multiple
Drawings option.

Apply to Multiple Draw- The Apply to Multiple Drawings option is used to perform an
ings
action on all the drawings contained in a layer. With the Selecttool, this option can be used to select and remove vector shapeson all the drawings contained in a layer. To use it, activate
Permanent Selection option and make a selection that can beapplied to all your drawings. Then, activate the Apply to Multiple
Drawings option and press delete. This will delete all the shapesthat would have been selected by the permanent selection on
every drawing in the layer. This can be used for example toremove dirt and registration on the same areas of all the drawings
simultaneously on a layer.
The Apply to Multiple Drawings option disables itself after eachaction.

Apply to Line and Col-The Apply to Line and Colour Art option uses the concept of Line330

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

our ArtArt and Colour Art layers. Use this option to apply an action suchas selecting, resizing or erasing a drawing on both Line Art andColour Art layers, as well as the Overlay and Underlay layers.

Apply to Synced Draw- Applies to the Camera view only. Works in conjunction with theing Layers
Works on Single Drawing. Only selects lines from the current
drawing and drawing layers synced to the current drawing.
Works on Single Draw- By default, when you draw a selection box in the Camera view,ing
the Select tool will select only the drawing strokes of the current
drawing. If you prefer the Select tool to select all the strokes on
all layers, you can disable the Works on Single Drawing option in
the Tool Properties view or disable the Select tool Works on
Single Drawing preference. To do this, go to the top menu, select
Edit > Preferences > Camera (Windows/Linux) or Harmony
Advanced > Preferences > Camera (Mac OS X) and uncheckthe Select tool Works on Single Drawing option.

Ico- ToolnName

Description

Selection Tool Operations
Flip Hori- Flips the current selection horizontally.
zontalFlip Vertical

Flips the current selection vertically.

Rotate90
Degrees
CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate90
Degrees
CCW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.

SmoothSmooth out selected drawing strokes and remove extra points.

331

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Select Tool Properties

FlattenMerges drawing objects and brush strokes into a single layer. If you draw new lines to fix adrawing or line with many brush strokes, it can be useful to flatten them all into a single shape. Bydefault, lines are drawn one on top of each other. If you intend to repaint the lines or modify theirshape, it will be easier if they are flattened.

CreateColour
Art from
Line Art

Lets you use the outline you traced on one of the four embedded layers (line art, colour art,
overlay, underlay) and create invisible strokes to paint your drawings on separate layers. This
provides more inking and painting flexibility.

Distribute toLayersThe Distribute to Layers option is used to separate the selected art strokes and send them to new
drawing layers. In the Camera view, once you have drawn your artwork, you can select thestrokes you want to distribute using the Select tool and click on the Distribute to Layers button;
you can also select Drawing > Distribute to Layers. It will automatically take every stroke fromthe drawing selection made in the Camera view and separate them into a different layer for each.
If an artwork is composed of several strokes, you must group them using Edit > Group > Group
before using the Distribute to Layers option. This option cannot be done from the Drawing view.

You can also configure this option to create the invisible strokes on any of the four embedded
layers.

Store Col- Use the Store Colour Gradient operation to record the selected gradient’s position. This reuses
our Gradi- the stored position of the gradient when drawing new brush lines or painting colour zones. Enableent
the Use Stored Colour Gradientoption in the Paint or Brush Tool Properties view to do this.
Pencil to
Brush

Converts the selected centre line pencil strokes into contour strokes brush lines.

Merge
PencilLines

Pencil lines are central vector lines and it might be difficult to match pencil line’s tips properly toalign them and make it look like it is one single line. With the Select tool, you can select several
pencil lines and merge them as one single object using the Merge Pencil Lines option. The endsof your lines are adjusted to form one single line.

332

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

NOTE: Points must be close enough to be merged. If there is a large gap between the lines,
they will not be merged.
ReversePencilThickness

The Reverse Pencil Thickness option inverts the thick and thin section on a selected pencil line.
This option will take the thickest size on the line and apply it to the thinnest, and it will apply thethinnest to the thickest.

Offset X
and Y

Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields to enter specific values and precisely reposition
the selected shape.

1. X: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along the X-axis.
2. Y: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along the Y-axis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify the value in the X or Y value
field.
Width
and
Height

Use the Width and Height operation fields to enter specific values to resize the selected shapewith precision.

1. Width: Type a value in this field to resize the width of your selection.

333

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Select Tool Properties

2. Height: Type a value in this field to resize the height of your selection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify the value in the Width or Height
fields.
4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lock or unlock the ratio between the Width and Height values.
Angle

The Angle operation lets you to enter specific values and accurately rotate the selected shape.

1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field to rotate your selection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify the value in the Angle value
field.
Adjustingthe Pencil Line
Thickness

When you select a pencil line with the Select tool, additional options appear in the Tool Properties
view.
Use the Adjusting the Pencil Line Thickness operation field to resize the selected centreline
strokes. This operation is not permitted on contour line shapes, such as brush strokes or shapefills.

1. Minimum Size: Type a value in this field to set the minimum thickness of the selected
centreline stroke.
2. Maximum Size: Type a value in this field to set the maximum thickness of the selected
centreline stroke.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify the value contained in the
Thickness value field.
PencilLine
Shape

You can adjust the start, end, and joint style of a pencil line.

l

l

l

Start: Lets you select the style of the start tip, which is the first tip you drew. You canchoose between Round or Flat style.
End: Lets you select the style of the end tip, which is the last tip you drew. You canchoose between Round or Flat style.
Join: Lets you select the joint style. The joints are where the line curves abruptly. You
could also define the Join style as the corner style. You can choose between Round, Mitre
and Bevel style.

334

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

PencilStencils

Gives you the flexibility to change the style and thickness of your pencil lines even after they are
drawn. You can apply preset pencil stencils or create your own.

AddingPencil lines support texture. Once a pencil line is drawn, you can apply a preset texture or load
Texture your own. Textures are independent from pencil stencils.
to a Pencil Line
Adjusting When you select text with the Select tool, the tool properties will display the Text tool options on
the Text the bottom of the view. You can also press Alt + 9 to display only the Text properties in the Tool
Selection Properties view—see Text Tool Properties on page 339.

335

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Smooth Editor Tool Properties

Smooth Editor Tool Properties
When you select the Smooth Editor tool, its properties and options appear in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

SmoothingStyle

The Smoothing Style options allow you to smooth a portion of your drawing by tracing asmoothing stroke over the zone to optimize or by selecting an area of the drawing with
the Marquee or Lasso.
Note that by default, the Smooth Editor tool colour is yellow, it was changed to orange
for screen grab clarity.

Show Control The Show Control Points option allows you to show or hide the Bezier points around
Pointslines. When the Bezier points are displayed, you can see the result of your smoothing
and the number of points left on the curve. When it is turned off, only the original artwork
is displayed.
Minimum
This is where you set the minimum and maximum sizes of your drawing tool which will
Size and Max- produce the thick and thin effect on your stroke. This works with the pressure sensitivity
imum Sizeof a pen tablet.
This options is available while using the Brush SmoothingllSmoothness

style.

Maximum and Minimum Size: Defines the maximum and minimum width of thestroke.
Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to set the minimum and maximum size value.

The Smoothness impacts the strength of the smoothing result. The higher the value, themore points are removed and the smoother the curve. The Smoothness range is from 0
to 100; the default value is 20.

336

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

ColourYou can modify the colour of the control points displayed on the artwork while working
with the Smooth Editor tool by double-clicking on the colour swatch.

337

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Stroke Tool Properties

Stroke Tool Properties
When you select the Stroke tool, its properties and options appears in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Draw Stroke as StraightLines

Enable the Draw Stroke as Straight Lines option if
you want the new strokes you draw to be a perfectstraight line. Disable the option if you want the stroke
to follow the mouse gesture.

Connect Line Ends

Enable the Connect Line Ends option if you want thestart or end point of your new stroke to connect toyour existing strokes to make sure no gaps are left inyour drawing.

Auto-Flatten Mode

When enabled, the Auto-Flatten mode automaticallyflattens the new lines created with the existingartwork as you draw in the Drawing or Camera view.
Brush strokes will flatten with brush strokes andpencil lines will flatten with pencil lines.

Apply to Line and Colour
Art

The Apply to Line and Colour Art option uses theconcept of Line Art and Colour Art layers. Use thisoption to apply an action such as selecting, resizing
or erasing a drawing on both Line Art and Colour Art
layers, as well as the Overlay and Underlay layers.

Smoothness

You can modify the central line smoothness of yourline using this option. This parameter smooths theinitial movement of your line. Increasing the value
will result in a smoother line with fewer control
points. Use the left and right arrows to increment thevalue by one full unit. Use the Up - Down slider toquickly increment the value.

338

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Text Tool Properties
Use the Text tool's properties to select the font type and other formatting options you want to apply to the text.
If you already wrote your text, you must first use the Text tool and select the text portion you want to format. You
can modify the parameters of an entire text box using the Select tool.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Font TypeUse the Font drop-down menu to select a font. OTF
fonts are supported.

Bold

Use this option to bold your text selection.

ItalicUse this option to italicize your text selection.

Left Alignment

Use this option to left align the paragraph.

Centered Alignment

Use this option to center align the paragraph.

339

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Text Tool Properties

Right Alignment

Use this option to right align the paragraph.

Justified Alignment

Use this option to justify align the paragraph.

Font SizeEnter a size for the text.

Kerning

Use the kerning field to modify the spacing between
letters and characters. You can select the Auto Kern
option to set the kerning automatically based on the
font’s predefined standard. A negative value decreases
spacing between each character, creating a letter
overlap and a positive value increases it.

IndentEnter a value in the Indent field to increase or decrease
the indentation on the first line of your text. A positive
value sets the first line of your paragraph farther to theright and a negative value sets it farther to the left.

340Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Line Spacing

Enter a value in the Line Spacing field to decrease or
increase the space between each line of text.

341

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Transform Tool Properties

Transform Tool Properties
When selecting the Transform tool, several options are available in the Tool Properties view.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Lasso

Sets the selection mode to Lasso. Click and hold Alt to temporarily
switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Marquee

Sets the selection mode to Marquee. Click and hold Alt to temporarily
switch between the Marquee and Lasso modes.

Peg Selection ModeIn the Camera view, the Peg Selection Mode limits the selection to peg
layers instead of drawing layers. This mode is useful when you havecreated a character rig using peg layers for each drawing. That way, you
do not accidentally select the drawing layer when you want to animate
on the peg.
When disabled, the Transform tool selects the drawing layers.

Snap and Align

Snaps the selected anchor point to any existing line while displaying temporary rulers as a guide that you can also snap your anchor point to.
Snaps your selection following the currently enabled grid.

Snap to Grid

Hide Manipulator Controls

The Hide Manipulator Controls button lets you hide the bounding box andmanipulator controls from the Camera view when an element isselected.
Flips the current selection horizontally.

Flip Horizontal

You can also select Animation > Flip > Flip Horizontal from the top
menu or press 4 or 5.
Flips the current selection vertically.

Flip Vertical

You can also select Animation > Flip > Flip Vertical from the top menu
or press 4 or 5.

342

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Rotate 90 Degrees CW

Rotates the current selection 90 degrees clockwise.

Rotate 90 Degrees CCW Rotates the current selection 90 degrees counter-clockwise.
Use the Offset X and Offset Y operation fields to enter specific values
and precisely reposition the selected shape.

Offset X and Y

1. X: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along theX-axis.
2. Y: Type a value in this field to reposition your selection along the
Y-axis.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify thevalue in the X or Y value field.
Use the Width and Height operation fields to enter specific values toresize the selected shape with precision.

Width and Height

1. Width: Type a value in this field to resize the width of your selection.
2. Height: Type a value in this field to resize the height of your selection.
3. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify thevalue in the Width or Height fields.
4. Lock icon: Click the lock icon to lock or unlock the ratio between
the Width and Height values.
The Angle operation lets you to enter specific values and accurately
rotate the selected shape.

Angle
1. Angle: Type a degree value in this field to rotate your selection.
2. Up/Down arrows: Use the up and down arrows to modify thevalue in the Angle value field.

343

Chapter 5: Tools Properties

Zoom Tool Properties

Zoom Tool Properties
When you select the Zoom tool, its properties are displayed in the Tool Properties view.

Parameter

ButtonDescription

Zoom In

Zooms in

Zoom Out

Zooms out

Zoom Tool Options
Zoom in the Camera or Drawing view.
Perform Zoom In
The keyboard shortcut is 2.
Zoom out the Camera or Drawing view.
Operations

Perform Zoom Out
The keyboard shortcut is 1.
Reset Zoom

Restores the current zoom level to 100%.

Reset View

Restores the original display by resetting any
pan, rotation or zoom actions.

344

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Chapter 6: Toolbars
Harmony contains toolbars which, by default, are located at the top of the interface. Some views also have a toolbar
which you can reposition to suit your work style. You can show or hide toolbars, as well as customize it with thetools you use most often and hide the ones you don't.
Top Toolbars

346

Advanced Animation Toolbar

347

Art Layer Toolbar

348

Deformation Toolbar

349

Display Toolbar

351

Easy Flipping Toolbar

352

Edit Toolbar

353

File Toolbar

354

Flip Toolbar

355Game Toolbar

356Mark Drawing Toolbar

357

Onion Skin Toolbar

358

Playback Toolbar

359

Scripting Toolbar

360

Tool Presets Toolbar

361

Tools Toolbar

362

Workspace Toolbar

365

View Toolbars

366

Timeline View Toolbar

367

Xsheet View Toolbar

368

345

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

Top Toolbars
Harmony has a series of toolbars that are added by default at the top of the interface. These toolbars can be
moved on the sides of the interface as well as within specific views.
All top toolbars can be added through the top menu Windows > Toolbars > desired toolbar .
Advanced Animation Toolbar

347

Art Layer Toolbar

348

Deformation Toolbar

349

Display Toolbar

351

Easy Flipping Toolbar

352

Edit Toolbar

353

File Toolbar

354

Flip Toolbar

355Game Toolbar

356Mark Drawing Toolbar

357

Onion Skin Toolbar

358

Playback Toolbar

359

Scripting Toolbar

360

Tool Presets Toolbar

361

Tools Toolbar

362

Workspace Toolbar

365

346

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Advanced Animation Toolbar
The Advanced Animation toolbar contains tools to position and animate layers. The Scale, Translate and Rotate
tools can be used to reposition the permanent pivot position of a layer. Unlike the Transform tool, each tool in the
Advanced Animation toolbar performs a single operation, either rotate, scale, translate or scale in relation to thecamera distance.

How to access the Advance Animation toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Advanced Animation.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

TranslateLets you move the selected element along the X and Y
axes.

RotateTurns a selected element around its pivot point.

Scale

Increases or decreases the size of a selected element.
You can scale an object up to make it larger or down tomake it smaller. Press Shift to scale the element while
maintaining its proportions.

Skew

Slants the selected element.

Maintain Size

Keeps elements the same size aspect ratio in the Camera view as you move them towards or away from thecamera.

Spline Offset

Lets you reposition the visual trajectory without offsetting or modifying your animation. By default, the trajectory is located at 0,0,0 fields. If your elements weredrawn in a different location than the centre of the drawing area, it will look like the trajectory is not aligned withyour drawing. Also, if you have several elements
attached to one trajectory, you might want your trajectory to be at a different location to represent thegroup's motion better.

347

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

Art Layer Toolbar
The Art Layer toolbar lets you access the art layers. By default, only the Line Art and Colour Art are displayed. A
drawing is composed of two layers, a line layer and a colour layer. The colour layer is always placed under the line
layer. These layers are accessible in the Drawing or Camera view (using drawing tools). When you view the final
drawing, you will see the final composition of the lines and colours, not two separate layers.

You can draw and paint in all layers. If you prefer to work in a single layer, everything can be done in the Line Art
layer.
You can change your preferences to enable the advanced use of layers and have access to four layers instead oftwo:lOverlaylLine ArtlColour Artl

Underlay

How to access the Art Layer toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Art Layer.
How to enable the Support Overlay and Underlay Arts option
1. Select Edit > Preferences ( Windows/Linux ) or Harmony Advanced > Preferences ( Mac OS X ).
2. In the Preferences dialog box, select the Advanced tab.
3. In the Advanced Options section, select the Support Overlay and Underlay Arts option.
4. Click OK.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Preview Line Art andColour Art

Displays all Art layers.

Overlay Art

Makes the Overlay Art layer current.

Line Art

Makes the Line Art layer current.

Colour Art

Makes the Colour Art layer current.

Underlay Art

Makes the Underlay Art layer current.

348

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Deformation Toolbar
T-RIG-007-009
The Deformation toolbar contains the various tools and options used to create a deformation rig. This toolbar isdisplayed in the default interface.
By default, the Deformation toolbar only contains the essential options. If you right-click on the toolbar and selectCustomize, you can add additional buttons.

Icon

Tool Name

Description
The Rigging tool is used to create a Bone deformation
chain. You also use it to set up the resting position.

Rigging Tool
To learn more about the Rigging tool's properties, see
Rigging Tool Properties on page 328.
Show Selected Manipulators and Hide All Others

The Show Selected Manipulators and Hide All Others
button hides all manipulators displayed in the Camera view.
Only the manipulators of the selected deformation node aredisplayed

Reset Current Keyframe

The Reset Current Keyframe copies the resting position,
the original setup of your skeleton before undergoing any
deformation, to your current frame. Once you have createda deformation chain, you can use the Rigging tool to adjust
the position and appearance of the rig to fit the element.
When the skeleton is in place, you can use the Reset
Current Keyframe button to reset the current frame position
to the resting position.
The Enable Deformations button allows you to display yourdrawings in their original state or with deformations while
creating additional drawings. Depending on the artwork youneed to create, you might need to refer to the other images
either deformed or in their original position.

Enable Deformations
NOTE: Disabling deformations is only a display mode.
Although drawings will not appear deformed in the
Camera view, even in Render View mode, they will still
be deformed in the rendered images.
Remove All Keyframes

The Remove All Keyframes option removes all keyframes349

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

on the selected deformation chain.
The Show All Controls button lets you visualize the resting
position in red (Setup mode) and the active position(Animation) in green at the same time

Show All Controls

350

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Display Toolbar
The Display toolbar lets you select the different Display nodes available in the node system.

Harmony Advanced doesn't allow you to add Display nodes. The display selection feature is only available for the
possible scenario that you need to use a specific Display node created by a Harmony Premium user.
When your scene does not have a Display node, it is automatically set to Display All which uses the Timeline viewordering and shows floating nodes from the Node view. You can also set your scene to use Display All using the
Display toolbar.

NOTE: If you try to add a peg or other transformation layer in the Timeline view without having a layer selected,
an error message will display. Make sure to change to Display All. The peg layer will be floating in the Nodeview and will not be visible in the Timeline view. The Timeline view shows only layers that are connected to theComposite node.
If you switch to Display All, you run the risk of not realizing when you have floating nodes that are not connected
to your composite. For this reason, it is not recommended to work in Display All mode.

How to access the Display toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Display.

351

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

Easy Flipping Toolbar
The Easy Flipping toolbar lets you rapidly flip through drawings in the Drawing view as is done with paper
drawings. In order for the features in this toolbar to work, you must be in the Drawing view.

How to access the Easy Flipping toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Easy Flipping.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Previous Drawing

Displays the previous drawing of your animation.

Next Drawing

Displays the next drawing of your animation.

SliderLets you flip forwards or backwards through yourdrawings by moving the slider.

Loop

Displays drawings in the first frame after you reachthe last frame of your animation.

Easy Flip

Automatically flips through the drawings based on
the FPS.

Preroll

Sets the number of drawings to be flipped throughbefore the starting drawing. The starting drawing isdetermined by the position of the red playhead in theTimeline view.

FPS

Sets the speed of playback in the units of frames per
second.

352

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Edit Toolbar
The Edit toolbar contains common operations such as Copy, Paste, Cut, Undo and Redo. These options can also
be found in the Edit menu.

How to access the Edit toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Edit.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Undo

Removes the last change made to your project.
Harmony supports multiple undo, so you can undochanges you made in the order you made them.

Redo

Redoes an operation you have undone. This commandis active only after you use the Undo command.

Cut

Removes selected objects. You can then paste theobject or its properties to another object.

Copy

Copies selected objects and properties.

Paste

Places an object you cut or copied into the location you
select in a view.

Create Symbol

Creates a symbol from selected drawing elements inthe Drawing or Camera view or a layer or cells in theTimeline view.

353

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

File Toolbar
The File toolbar contains the common file operations such as New, Save and Open. These options can also befound in the File menu.

How to access the File toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > File.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

New (Harmony Stand
Alone)Creates a new scene while closing any scenealready open. The New Scene dialog box opens,
asking for directory, name, and resolution
information.

Open

Displays the Open Scene dialog box where you canbrowse for a scene file. You can open a new scenefrom the current one and the previous scene willclose.

Save

Saves all changes made to the opened scene,drawings, palettes, and palette lists.

Save As

Saves the current file with a different name and at adifferent location.
Saves the current state of a scene as another scene.
The Save As window prompts you for a new nameand a different location for this scene before saving
it. This will create a complete scene directory for the
new scene.

NOTE: The scene name cannot exceed 23 characters.
Import Images

Imports bitmap images which you can choose tovectorize.

354

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Flip Toolbar
The Flip toolbar lets you determine the type of drawing to include in your flipping selection. You can flip through thekey, breakdown or in-between drawings individually, or view a combination.

How to access the Easy Flipping toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Easy Flipping.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Show Key Drawings

Displays key drawings when flipping through drawings.

Show Breakdown
Drawings

Displays breakdown drawings when flipping throughdrawings.

Show In-between
Drawings

Displays in-between drawings when flipping throughdrawings.

Show Retake Key
Drawings

Displays retake key drawings when flipping throughdrawings.

Show Retake Breakdown
Drawings

Displays breakdown retake drawings when flipping
through drawings.

Show Retake In-between
Drawings

Displays retake in-between drawings when flipping
through drawings.

355

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

Game Toolbar
The Game toolbar contains tools for setting anchors and props, as well as exporting to sprite sheets and Easel
JS.

How to access the Game toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Game.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Toggle Anchor

Adds the Anchor parameter to the selected layer.

Toggle Prop

Adds the Prop parameter to the selected layer.

Export to Sprite Sheets

Opens the Export to Sprite Sheets window where
you can export your animation as sprite sheets .

Export to Easel JS

Opens the Export to Easel JS window where you canexport your animation as Easel JS.

356

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Mark Drawing Toolbar
The Mark Drawing toolbar lets you identify drawings such as key, breakdown and in-between. The drawing
Identification feature can help the animator stay well organized and save time when identifying key, breakdown or inbetween drawings in the Xsheet and Timeline views.

How to access the Mark Drawing toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Mark Drawings.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Mark as Key Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a key drawing.

Mark as Breakdown
Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a breakdown
drawing.

Mark as In-between
Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as an in-between
drawing.

Mark as Retake Key
Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a key retake drawing.

Mark as Retake
Breakdown Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a breakdown retakedrawing.

Mark as Retake Inbetween Drawing

Identifies the selected drawing as a in-between retakedrawing.

357

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

Onion Skin Toolbar
The Onion Skin toolbar displays previous and subsequent drawings. When designing or animating, it is useful tosee previous drawings. By default, previous drawings appear in a shade of red and next drawings are displayed ingreen. In the Onion Skin toolbar, you can select the type of drawing to display.

NOTE: You can change the default onion skin display colours in the Preferences dialog box.

For tasks related to this toolbar, see .

How to access the Onion Skin toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Onion Skin.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Enable Onion Skin in Other Displays previous and next drawings in other layers
Elements
than the current one. In the Drawing view, use theEnable Onion Skin in Other Elements feature to see
the previous and next drawings of the layers visible
in Light Table mode.
Show Key Drawings

Displays all drawings marked as key drawings.

Show Breakdown
Drawings

Displays all drawings marked as breakdown
drawings.

Show In-between
Drawings

Displays all drawings marked as in-between
drawings.

Show Retake Key
Drawings

Displays all key drawings marked to be retaken.

Show Retake Breakdown
Drawings

Displays all breakdown drawings marked to beretaken.

Show Retake In-between
Drawings

Displays all in-between drawings marked to beretaken.

358

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Playback Toolbar
The Playback toolbar lets you play back animation and sound. Use it to scrub the sound to create your lip-sync, loop
the playback, navigate through frames, and change the playback range and speed.

Name

ButtonDescription
Plays and stops the animation.

Play

You can also select Play > Play Scene
Forward or Stop.
Creates a render of your scene to play back the
final result including the effects.

Render and Play

Repeatedly plays back your animationindefinitely.

Loop

You can also select Play > Loop.
Enables sound in the playback.
Sound
You can also select Play > Enable Sound.
Enables sound scrubbing in the playback.
Sound Scrubbing

You can also select Play > Enable Sound
Scrubbing.

Jog Frames

Lets you scroll through the playback’s frames.

Frame

Lets you move the playhead by entering a frame
number.

---Lets you change the start frame by entering a
new value in the Start field.
Start--You can also click on Start button to set the startframe at the current frame.
Lets you change the end frame by entering a newvalue in the Stop field.

Stop--You can also click on Stop button to set the end
frame at the current frame.

FPS

Lets you enter a new value to change the speedof the playback.

---

359

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

Scripting Toolbar
The Scripting toolbar lets you import and access scripts for automating actions and operations.

How to access the Scripting toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Scripting.
Icon

Tool Name

Description

Manage Scripts

Opens the Scripts Manager dialog box where you
can add scripts and functions to your Scripting
toolbar.

Stop Script

Stops the execution of a script launched from the
Scripting toolbar.

360Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Tool Presets Toolbar
The Tool Presets toolbar lets you create new tool presets and manage them.

How to access the Tool Presets toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Tool Presets.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

New Tool Preset

Creates a new tool preset from the current tool settings.

Manage Presets

Opens the Manage Tool Preset dialog box where you
can update, organize, and delete existing presets.

361

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

Tools Toolbar
The Tools toolbar contains all the main tools you need to work in Harmony. In the default workspace, this toolbar
located on the left-most side of the interface. A small triangle at the lower-right corner of a tool indicates additional
tools under the main tool. To access these tools, hold down the left mouse button until the additional tools appear,then select one.

You can display the Tools toolbar horizontally if you find it more efficient for your workflow. Be sure to restart
Harmony in order to see the new position of the Tools toolbar.
How to display the Tools toolbar as a flat (horizontal) toolbar
1. Do one of the following:ll

Select Edit > Preferences (Windows/Linux) or Harmony Advanced > Preferences (MacOS X).
Press Ctrl + U (Windows/Linux) or ⌘ + U (Mac OS X).

2. Select the General tab.
3. In the Options section, select the Flat Tool Toolbar option.

362

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

4. Click OK and restart Harmony.

Tool Name
Select

Icon

Description
Lets you select elements from the Camera and Drawing views.

CutterLets you cut a drawing area to move, copy, cut or delete it.

Reposition All
Drawings

Lets you reposition, scale, rotate or skew all drawing strokes on
every drawing included in a layer.

Contour Editor

Lets you add, remove or modify points on a vector line andcontrol them.

Pencil Editor

Lets you modify the thick and thin contours of a pencil line.

Smooth Editor

Lets you optimize contours and reduce the number of points on
a line.

Perspective

Lets you deform a drawing selection and alter its perspective.

Envelope

Lets you deform and warp part of a drawing using a gridenvelope and Bezier handles.

Edit
Gradient/Texture

Lets you modify the position of a gradient or texture colour
within a specific zone.

Brush

A pressure-sensitive tool for creating a contour shape with athick and thin line effect, as if created with a paint brush.

PencilA pressure-sensitive tool for drawing the final images, such as
character nodes, cut-out puppet and clean animation. Creates acentral vector shape.

Text

Lets you type text in your project using various fonts and text
attributes.

EraserA pressure-sensitive tool for precisely erasing parts of adrawing.

Paint

Lets you paint both empty and filled zones.
Ink

Lets you paint only the segment you clicked on between two
intersections to be painted.

Paint Unpainted

Lets you paint only empty zones. Lines and filled zones remainunchanged.

Repaint

Lets you paint zones except empty zones. Any zone that is not363

Chapter 6: Toolbars

Top Toolbars

painted remains intact.
Unpaint

Lets you unpaint empty and filled zones.

StrokeLets you draw stokes, connect line ends and flatten lines.

Close Gap

Lets you close small gaps in a drawing by creating small,invisible strokes between the two closest points.

Line

Lets you draw straight lines which you can then edit.
Rectangle

Lets you draw rectangles which you can then edit.

EllipseLets you draw ellipses which you can then edit.

Polyline

Lets you draw polylines lines which you can then edit.

Dropper

Lets you pick a colour directly from a drawing.

Drawing Pivot

Lets you set pivots on a characters, drawings and symbols.

Morphing

Lets you control a morphing sequence by placing different typesof hints to help Harmony morph the animation the way you want
it.

Hand

Lets you pan the Drawing or Camera view.
Zoom

Lets you zoom in and out of the Drawing or Camera view.

Rotate View

Lets you rotate the Drawing or Camera view just like with a realanimation disc. Can also be used in Perspective view.

Animate Mode

Automatically creates a keyframe on the drawing layer. Used toanimate layers over time.

Transform

Lets you create a global selection so you can reposition, scale,rotate and skew as one unit, which is useful for cut-out characters.

Inverse Kinematics

Lets you pull on a character's extremities, such as the hands
and feet, and have the rest of the body follow. Can be used on
any piece connected in a hierarchy.

Onion Skin

Displays the previous and next frames of an animation. Usefulwhen animating cut-out characters.

364

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Workspace Toolbar
The Workspace toolbar lets you load other workspaces. The first time you start Harmony, the default workspace isloaded. Other workspaces are available such as the Hand-Drawn Animation and Compositing workspaces; these
display different views and toolbars. You can access these workspaces and any you create, from the Windows
menu and the Workspace toolbar.

How to access the Workspace toolbar
1. Select Windows > Toolbars > Workspace.

Icon

Tool Name

Description

Workspace List

Allows you to select an existing workspace.

Workspace Manager

Opens the Workspace Manager where you canorganize, display, and remove workspace from your list.

Save Workspace

When the Automatically Save Workspace preference isdisabled, the Save Workspace button becomes available. This allows you to manually save your new workspace configuration.

365

Chapter 6: Toolbars

View Toolbars

View Toolbars
Harmony has a series of view specific toolbars that are only available in a given view. These toolbars can be
moved only within their view.
All view toolbars can be added, as long as the view is visible, through the top menu Windows > Toolbars >desired toolbar .
Timeline View Toolbar

367

Xsheet View Toolbar

368

366

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Timeline View Toolbar
The 3D Graph toolbar works in conjunction with the elements in the 3D Graph view.

Button Name

Description

Set Ease TypeCreate Empty Drawing
Duplicate Drawing
Insert Keyframe
Delete Keyframes
Set Motion Keyframe
Set Stop-Motion Keyframe
Go to Previous Keyframe
Go to Next Keyframe
Add Key Exposure
Delete Key Exposure
Centre On Selection
Set Ease for Multiple Parameters
Create Keyframes On

Opens the Create Keyframes On dialog box, where you can set theoptions to create a new keyframe every x number of frames.

Fill Empty Cells
Paste Mode: All Drawing Attributes
Paste Mode: Keyframes Only
Paste Mode: Exposures Only
Add Prefix or Suffix

How to access the Timeline view toolbar
You can add the Timeline view toolbar to the Timeline view by:l

Going to the top menu and selecting Windows > Toolbars > Timeline view.

lRight-clicking on the space at the top of the Timeline view and selecting Timeline view.

367

Chapter 6: Toolbars

View Toolbars

Xsheet View Toolbar
The Xsheet toolbar contains the common timing operations such as Add Column, Delete Column, Clone Column,
and so on. These options can also be found in the top menu.

368

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Chapter 7: Views
The Harmony interface is composed of different views, each one designed for a specific purpose. You can modify
the location of the views by adding a new view as a tab or as a window. You can also swap the location of a view.
When a view is active, a red rectangle appears around the view. Keyboard shortcuts and top menu options areassociated with the active view. If a menu option is greyed out, it means it does not apply to the layer, drawing orother type of selection or the option does not apply to the active view.
Camera View

370

Colour View

376

Drawing View

380

Function View

382

Integrated Help View

384

Layer Properties View

385

Library View

387

Message Log View

389

Model View

390

Perspective View

391

Script Editor View

393

Side View

395

Timeline View

397

Tool Properties View

404

Top View

405

Xsheet View

407

369

Chapter 7: Views

Camera View

Camera View
The Camera view is the centre of operations in Harmony. In this view, you will draw, paint, animate, create
animation paths and see your results. You can also move through your symbol’s hierarchy.
The Camera view has a top and bottom toolbar that you can use to navigate in the view, change the display
mode, or go back up your symbols hierarchy.

How to access the Camera view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Camera.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Ico- Sectionnbutton and select Camera.

Description

View
Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options that you can use in the Camera view to draw,
animate or set up the scene.

Editing
Stack

The Editing Stack menu displays the names of the symbols and their hierarchy when you are
editing a symbol. You can click on the different names to go back up to the different parent
symbols or the top/current project.

CameraView
Toolbar

The Camera View toolbar contains all the tools and options you can use in the Camera view todraw, animate or set up the scene. The toolbar can be displayed or hidden by right-clicking on it
and selecting or deselecting the Camera View toolbar—see Camera View Toolbar.

370

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Light
Table

When you have a drawing layer or drawing selected, the Light Table button button allows you tofade the colours of the other layers so you can see the current artwork better as you edit with adrawing tool. Note that the light table does not work when using a layer editing tool, such as theTransform tool.

Current When this button is enabled, the drawing that you are currently editing with a drawing tool is
Drawing temporarily displayed in front of all the other elements. The actual scene is not modified.
on Top

CameraMask

The Camera Mask button shows or hides Displays a black mask around the scene’s frame to
avoid seeing the unnecessary artwork. This option is handy when you're animating and setting
up the scene. It allows you to see your scene’s composition better.
You can also access this from the top menu by selecting View > Show > Camera Mask.

Safe
Area

The Safe Area button shows or hides Displays the TV safety zone and the centre of the camera
frame. The safe area adapts to the scene resolution, as well as the safety zone and frame’s
centre.
You can also access this feature from the top menu by selecting View > Show > Safe Area.

371

Chapter 7: Views

Camera View

BBox
When you select an object in the Camera view with the Transform tool, a bounding box always
Selectio appears around the object and the artwork is tinted in fuchsia, red or yellow. Enabling thisn Style option will only keep the bounding box and remove the colour tint.

Outline Drawings that are locked in the Timeline view (cannot be selected in the Camera view) are
Locked displayed as wireframes.
Drawing
s

Reset
View

The Reset View button resets any panning, zooming or rotation done in the Camera view andreturns the display to the initial settings. You can also press Shift + M.

Zoom
Menu

The Zoom menu lets you enlarge or reduce the Camera or Drawing view display.
To make the camera frame size always match the size of your view, select the Fit to View
option. Click the drop-down arrow and select a zoom level or press 1 and 2.

372

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

OpenGL The OpenGL View Mode button switches the Camera view to fast display, letting you see yourView
animation play in real time. The OpenGL display requires less memory. The final look of yourModeeffects is not shown in the OpenGL View Mode. You must switch to the Render View Mode to
see your effects.

RenderView
Mode

The Render View Mode button swithes the Camera view to a fully rendered display showing
the final image of the current frame. If a modification is done to your current frame or if you
move to a different frame, click the Update Preview button to update the display if yourpreview does not update automatically.The Render View Mode display lets you see the final
look of your frames including effects and antialiasing. You cannot play back your scene in
Render View Mode. To see your scene fully rendered and to play it back, you must press theRender and Play button in the Playback toolbar.

373

Chapter 7: Views

Matte
View
Mode

Camera View

The Matte View Mode button switches the Camera view to a matte display showing the alphachannel of the elements in your scene. The transparency level ranges from 0 to 100 percent.
Zero percent is completely transparent and represented by black and 100 percent is completely
opaque and represented by white. Everything in between these extremes has a transparency
level somewhere between 1 and 99 percent and is represented in various shades of grey.
l

Depth
View
Mode

To access the Matte View mode, click on the Render View button and select Matte
View from the drop-down menu.

The Depth View mode displays images in a relative white to black gradient scale. The object(s)closest to the camera are displayed in white and the object(s) furthest from the camera aredisplayed in black. If the position of the last object changes along the z-axis, that object will still
remain black, so long as it retains its position as the object the farthest back. It does not matter
where that object is in 3D space, it just matters what its position is relative to the other object inthe same space. The objects closest and farthest from the camera set the range of the white toblack scale. All the other objects fall somewhere in between.

l

To access the Depth View mode, click on the Render View button and select Depth
View from the drop-down menu.

Drawing The Drawing Name field displays the name of the selected drawing, as well as the layer
Namecontaining it. If the cell does not contain any drawing, an Empty Cell text is shown in thefield.

374

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Tool
Name

The Tool Name field displays the name of the selected tool. If you temporarily override adrawing tool using a keyboard shortcut, the tool’s name will be highlighted in red. You cantemporarily override a tool by holding its keyboard shortcut without the Alt key. For example,
the Select tool shortcut is Alt + S. If you hold down the S key, you will switch to the Select tool.
When you release the key, you will return to the tool you were using.

Frame
Number

The Frame Number field displays the number of the current frame.

Selected The colour swatch displays the currently selected colour in the Colour view.
Colour375

Chapter 7: Views

Colour View

Colour View
The Colour view is where you create colours and palettes and import existing palettes into your project. The
Colour view is also necessary for drawing, painting and creating colour styling.

How to access the Colour view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Colour.

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Colour.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the commands and options that you can use in
the Colour view to manage colours and palettes.

Show/Hide
The Show/Hide Palette List View button lets you display the Palette List view
Palette List View in the Colour view. This option is for the advanced user who wants to create
colour palettes for their props and characters.

376

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Add Palette

The Add Palette button lets you add a new palette to the bottom of yourpalette list.

Remove Palette

The Remove Palette button lets you delete the currently selected palette. If
the colour swatch is used in your project, zones painted with colour swatches
which have been deleted will turn red, easily identifying them so you can
repaint them with another colour swatch.

Link Palette

The Link Palette button lets you access other palettes created in the project
and link them to your scene.

Order Palette
List

The Up and Down arrows let you reorder the selected palette. When using
clone palettes (colour styles), the highest palette is the list will override its
clone located lower in the list.

Edit Palette
Mode

In Harmony Server, the Edit Palette Mode button lets you get the rights tomodify the palette. The palette files can be locked to avoid accidentally
modifying the palette.

Add Colour

The Add Colour button lets you add a new colour swatch to the bottom of yourcolour list.

Remove Colour

The Remove Colour button lets you delete the currently selected colour
swatches. If the colour swatch is used in your project, the Delete Colour
dialog box will appear asking you to confirm the operation. Click OK to
confirm the operation or Cancel to cancel it.

377

Chapter 7: Views

Colour View

Zones painted with colour swatches which have been deleted will turn red,easily identifying them so you can repaint them with another colour swatch.

Add Texture

The Add Texture button lets you add a bitmap colour swatch to your palette.
You can load photos and textures and paint your drawings with it. The bitmap
image must be a .tga or .psd file format.

Set Current
Brush Colour

The Set Current Brush Colour button let you set the currently selected colour
swatch as the colour used by the Brush tool. If you select a new colour in the
Colour view while using the Brush tool, the Set Current Brush Colour swatch
will be updated.

Set Current
Pencil Colour

The Set Current Pencil Colour button lets you set the currently selected colour
swatch as the colour used by the Pencil , Polyline , Ellipse , Rectangle andLine tools. If you select a new colour in the Colour view while using any ofthese tools, the Set Current Pencil Colour swatch will be updated.

Set Current Paint The Set Current Paint Colour button lets you set the currently selected colour
Colourswatch as the colour used by the Paint tool. If you select a new colour in the
Colour view while using the Paint tool, the Set Current Paint Colour swatch
will be updated.
Link/Unlink

The Link/Unlink Three Colours button lets you link the Set Current Brush

378

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Three Colours

Colour, Set Current Pencil Colour and Set Current Paint Colour swatches tothe currently selected colour swatches in the Colour view.

Colour Swatch
Name

Each colour swatch available in the Colour view can have its own name,making it easy to identify which colour is used to paint what part of yourcharacter or background.

Two colours can have the same name.
Colour Swatch

A colour swatch is a specific colour used to paint a certain zone of a characteror background. Colour palettes are composed of colour swatches. They canalso be called colour pots. When you paint a zone with a colour swatch, thezone is linked to the swatch. So if you update the swatch’s tint, the zone will
be updated along with it. This allows you to modify your animation colours
even after it is completely painted.

379

Chapter 7: Views

Drawing View

Drawing View
In Harmony, you can draw in the Drawing or Camera view. Although the two views are similar, when it comes todrawing, there are some differences.
Only the selected drawing is displayed by default in the Drawing view. You can use features, such as the lighttable to display the current drawing of all the enabled layers of your scene in washed-out colours, or the Onion
Skin to display the previous and next drawings of the currently selected drawing layer.

How to access the Drawing view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Drawing .

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Drawing.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options

380

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

that you can use in the Drawing view to draw,
animate and paint.
Drawing Area

This is the main space in the Drawing view. It iswhere you draw and where the drawings are
displayed.

Zoom Menu

The Zoom menu lets you enlarge or reduce theCamera or Drawing view display.
To make the camera frame size always match thesize of your view, select the Fit to View option. Clickthe drop-down arrow and select a zoom level or press
1 and 2.

Drawing NameThe Drawing Name field displays the name of theselected drawing, as well as the layer containing it. If
the cell does not contain any drawing, an Empty
Cell text is shown in the field.

Tool Name

The Tool Name field displays the name of theselected tool. If you temporarily override a drawing
tool using a keyboard shortcut, the tool’s name will
be highlighted in red. You can temporarily override atool by holding its keyboard shortcut without the Alt
key. For example, the Select tool shortcut is Alt + S.
If you hold down the S key, you will switch to theSelect tool. When you release the key, you will returnto the tool you were using.

Frame NumberThis field displays the current frame of the animation
you are working on.

Cursor Coordinates

This indicates the position of the your pointer in thedrawing area.

Colour Picker

The Colour Picker allows you to select a colour for
drawing.

381

Chapter 7: Views

Function View

Function View
The Function view lets you edit function curves and parameters. It contains a visual graph for adding, removing,and editing keyframes, as well as adjusting the velocity. The Function view allows you to display multiple
functions in the background as a reference.

How to access the Function view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Function.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Function.

How to display functions in the Function view
1. Open the Function view.
The Function view is blank until you select the layer containing the functions you want to display.
2. To display a function in the Function view, click on the layer containing the functions to adjust in theTimeline view.

382Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

3. To select the functions you want to edit, select them in the Function list.
Parameter

Description

Function List
When selecting a layer in the Timeline view, all the corresponding functions are
displayed (if any). Select the functions you want to see and edit, and hide theones you don't.

Display Toolbar

Allows you to modify how the editing area is displayed. You can hide the grid, disable the synchronization with the current frame, reset the zoom level and normalize the function display by stacking them one over the other to compare themregardless of their value range.

Current Frame

Displays the current scene frame.

Selected Keyframe Value

Displays the value of the selected keyframe.

Display Advanced Parameter
Values

Displays the Projection, Bias, Tension and Continuity parameters to adjust the
curve around the selected keyframe.

Keyframe, Velocity and Interpolation Options

This toolbar lets you add and delete keyframes, adjust the velocity curve, adjust
the segments to motion or stop-motion keyframes and set the velocity to create
steps instead of a constant progression.

Function Types

This toolbar lets you click on the different function types to enable or disable all
the listed functions of that type.

Value Scale

Displays the value range for the displayed editing area. It can be referenced toknow the value of a keyframe.

Selected Keyframe

The selected keyframe is displayed in red. When selected, the keyframe values
are displayed in the corresponding fields.

Bezier Handles

The Bezier handles let you adjust the ease in and ease out of each keyframe. The
more the handle is pulled out horizontally, the slower the animation will be. The
more the handle is pulled out vertically, the faster the animation will be.

Function Curve

The thin line going from keyframe to keyframe is the actual curve. The section ofa curve located between two keyframes is called a segment.

Frame Scale

The Frame Scale displays the frame range for the displayed editing area. It can bereferenced to know the current frame of a keyframe.

383

Chapter 7: Views

Integrated Help View

Integrated Help View
Use the Integrated Help when you are unsure about what a certain menu item is or the function of a specificpreference in the Preferences panel,
If you keep the Integrated Help window open for the entire duration of your work session, then you can use theforward and backward arrows to scroll through a history of the help information that you called up during yoursession.

How to access the Integrated Help view
1. Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Integrated Help.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

384

button and select Integrated Help.

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Layer Properties View
The Layer Properties editor or view lets you adjust the properties of a layer in the Timeline view The Layer Properties
can be viewed as a floating window or as a view (docked).
Each layer has its own set of properties that can be modified, including effect and peg layers. Display the Layer
Properties editor or view if you want to modify some of the layer’s properties, such as the name or the antialiasing
quality.

NOTE: To know more about the parameters displayed in the Layer Properties view, see Nodes.

How to access the Layer Properties view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Layer Properties.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Layer Properties.

385

Chapter 7: Views

Layer Properties View

How to access the Layer Properties editorlDouble-click on a layer in the Timeline viewlRight-click on a layer in the Timeline view and select Layer Properties.

l

Select a layer in the Timeline view and press Shift + E.

386

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Library View
The Library view is used to store elements such as animation, drawings, backgrounds and puppets to reuse indifferent projects. You can also use the Library view to create and store symbols.
To reuse an element from another project, you must create a template from your drawings. A template is a mini
scene that you import in other projects. A template has no link to the original scene. When you create a template, thefull content of your selection is copied in the template.
Additionally, the Library view's Drawing Substitution panel allows you to quickly change the current frame's
exposure to one of the existing drawings in a layer. This is especially useful for animating a cut-out character's
mouths, hands, eyelids and other such body parts which typically contain several drawings to choose from.

How to access the Library view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Library.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Library.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The Library menu lets you access commands related to
the Library view, importing .swf movies and Illustrator
files, add a new folder, and refresh the library’s content.

Preview Window

The Preview window lets you see the content of thecurrently selected template or symbol in the
Template/Symbol list.

387

Chapter 7: Views

Library View

Preview Playback

The Preview Playback button lets you play back thecontent of the selected template or symbol if it contains
more than one frame. Press the Play button to play backthe preview.

Library Folder List

The Library Folder List displays all the folders linked to
the Library view.

There are two default folders:llSymbols: This folder is the only folder containing
symbols. You can organize it by adding subfolders
inside.
Harmony Advanced Library: This is a default
folder found on the hard drive in your user documents. This folder can contain templates, but nosymbols.

You can link new library folders to the Library view andorganize them with subfolders.
Library Search tool

When working on a movie or series, you will probably end
up with many templates and symbols in your library.
Using the Search tool, you can quickly find the templates
and symbols in your folders.

Template/Symbol List

The Template/Symbol list displays the templates orsymbols contained in the selected library folder. You candisplay the templates by right-clicking the symbols’
thumbnails and selecting View > Thumbnails.

388

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Message Log View
The Message log view displays information gathered during a render task, such as which frames and at what timethey were each rendered. The view also contains a list of the colour recovery operations.

How to access the Message Log view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Message Log.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Message Log.

389

Chapter 7: Views

Model View

Model View
T-ANIMPA-004-004
Once you have a fully painted drawing, you can use it as a colour model and load it in the Model view. Thisdrawing can be used and loaded in any of your Harmony scenes.
Once a drawing is loaded in the Model view, you can use the Dropper
tool to select a colour from the modeland use it to paint in the Camera or Drawing view without having to pick the colour from the colour palette.

How to access the Model view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Model.

lFrom any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Model.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options
that you can use to manage models.

Model View Toolbar

The Model View toolbar contains all the tools andoptions you can use in the Model view to navigate
through and manage models.

390

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Perspective View
T-HFND-008-016
The Perspective view is used during scene setup. It allows you to see a multiplane scene’s orientation. The
Perspective view is similar to a 3D display, as it lets you rotate the scene through all possible angles to understandthe spacing between the elements. You can also position and rotate your layers and the camera inside the 3D
display to achieve some 3D setup and camera moves.

How to access the Perspective view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Perspective.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Perspective.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to work in the Perspective view.

Editing Stack

The Editing Stack menu displays the names of thesymbols and their hierarchy when you are editing asymbol. You can click on the different names to go backup to the different parent symbols or the top/current

391

Chapter 7: Views

Perspective View

project.
X Control

The red circle rotates the view on its X axis.

Y Control

The green circle rotates the view on its Y axis.

Z Control

The blue circle rotates the view on its Z axis.

GridThis is a perspective (3D) grid reference.

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain your orientation when navigating in the Perspective view.

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Reset View

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspective
view.

Reset Rotation

Resets the rotation of the Perspective view.

Zoom Menu

This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from the list.
Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available; you canalso select Fit To View to automatically use a zoom
level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer and drawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.

Colour Swatch

This field displays the currently selected colour in thepalette.

392

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Script Editor View
Qt Script provides access to many of the functions supported in the interface. With Qt Script, you can automate anumber of Harmony functions to speed the completion of various repetitive tasks. The Script Editor view allows you
to edit existing scripts and create new ones. Refer to the Scripting guide to learn more about scripting with Harmony.

How to access the Script Editor view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Script Editor.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

button and select Script Editor.

Parameter

Description

Script list

On the left side of the Script Editor view, all existing script files are listed and canbe modified in this view. The script format is JavaScript. Click on a file to display
its content in the Script Content window of the view.

Script content

On the right side of the Script Editor view, the contents of the selected script are
displayed and can be edited.

393

Chapter 7: Views

Script Editor View

Search toolbar

The Search toolbar allows you to search a string within the selected script
content. You can use the Previous and Next buttons to navigate through theresults.

VerifyThis function verifies the syntax of the currently displayed script and lists any
errors found.

Save

Once you are satisfied with the modifications made to the script, click Save
Changes to save the modifications.

394

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Side View
T-HFND-008-015
The Side view is used mainly for multiplane scenes and to position elements in 3D space. It allows you to see ascene’s stage from the side. This lets the camera cone and spacing between the elements to be seen.

How to access the Side view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Side.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Side.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to work in the Side view.

Thumbnails

A thumbnail of each drawing layer in the scene. The
order of the thumbnail images is based on eachelement’s FB position in the scene space. You can see
a representation of the FB position of each layer in thecamera cone.

Camera Cone

The camera cone represents the camera’s position andfield-of-view (FOV).

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain your orientation when navigating in the view.
395

Chapter 7: Views

Side View

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Reset View

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspectiveview.

Zoom Menu

This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from the list.
Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available; you canalso select Fit To View to automatically use a zoom
level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer and drawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.

Colour Swatch

This field displays the currently selected colour in thepalette.

396

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Timeline View
T-HFND-006-002
To set your animation timing, you will mostly work with the Timeline and Xsheet views. It's extremely useful to
become familiar with the Timeline view, how it works, and its interface.
The Timeline view is the main view used when adjusting the timing of drawings, adding keyframes and ordering
layers. The Timeline view displays layers, effects, sounds, keyframe values, scene length, layer names, drawings,
keyframes, timing, and frames.
The Timeline view allows you to read your timing from left to right. It represents the scene’s elements in theirsimplest form. You can also see the layers and their names, as well as the drawing’s exposure. The drawing name isdisplayed when you place your pointer over the drawing’s exposure.

How to access the Timeline view
Do one of the following:

397

Chapter 7: Views

Timeline Viewl

From the top menu, select Windows > Timeline.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Ico- Sectionnbutton and select Timeline.

Description

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options that you can use to manage models.

Model View
Toolbar

The Model View toolbar contains all the tools and options you can use in the Model view tonavigate through and manage models.

Enable/Disab The Enable/Disable All button lets you show or hide layers.
le AllWhen you deselect a layer in the Timeline view, the corresponding column is hidden in the
Xsheet view. When a column is hidden in the Xsheet view, the corresponding layer isdisabled in the Timeline view.
To disable a layer, click the layer's Enable/Disable All button or press D.

To enable a layer, click the layer's Enable/Disable All button or press A.

Solo

The Solo button lets you view drawing or sound layers in the Camera view. You can enable
this mode on multiple layers. When the Sole mode button is deselected, everything isvisible in the Camera view. When one or more layers are soloed, only those layers appear
in the Camera view.

Onion Skin

The Onion Skin button enables the Onion Skin option on a particular layer. If you want to
see the previous and next frames of a specific layer, go to the Timeline view and click theOnion Skin button for that particular layer. Blue arrows appear on both sides of the playhead. Drag the blue arrows to add more frames to the onion skin display.
To activate the general Onion Skin preview, in the Tools toolbar, click the Onion Skinbutton.

398

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Lock/Unlock
Layer

The Lock/Unlock Layer button lets you prevent the selection or editing of a layer in the
Camera view. To select some of the layers without selecting others, in the Timeline view,
lock the layers you do not want to select. When a layer is locked, its name is displayed inred.

In the top menu, there is a series of locking options. Select Animation > Lock > select oneof the following:l

Lock: Locks the currently selected element.

l

Unlock: Unlocks the currently selected element.

lLock All: Locks all the elements in the Camera view.

l

Unlock All: Unlocks all the elements in the Camera view.

lLock All Others: Locks all the elements in the Camera view except the currently
selected one.

You can display the locked drawings as outlines in the Camera view to quickly find out
which drawings are locked.

ChangeTrack Colour

The Change Track Colour button lets you change the colour of the exposed frames; thishelps you to quickly locate a layer in the Timeline view. Click the Change Track Colour button to open the Select Colour window and choose a new colour. You can modify the colour
for any type of layer, such as group, peg, drawing, and effects.

399

Chapter 7: Views

Timeline View

Add Layers

The Add Layers button lets you add new layers to the Timeline view. When you click the
Add Layers button, a menu appears displaying the layer types available. You can add
several different types of layers:lCameral

DeformationlDrawingl

Generator

l

Group

l

Transformationl

Effectsl

Sound

DeleteLayersThe Delete Layers button lets you delete the currently selected layers in the Timeline view.

Add Drawing
Layer

The Add Drawing Layer button lets you automatically add a new drawing layer to theTimeline view. By default, the layer is named Drawing.

Add Peg

The Add Peg button lets you add a peg layer to the timeline. If several layers are selected,
a peg is added and parented to each layer.

Expand/Colla The Expand/Collapse button is used to display the children layers of a parent layer. Once apselayer is parented to another layer, it is indented to the right and the Collapse/Expand
Children button appears on the parent layer allowing you to show or hide the child layer.

400Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Show/Hide
Functions

The Show/Hide Functions button lets you display the functions embedded in each layer.
The functions are the different coordinates and values used to record a layer’s parametersat each frame. This information is stored on the function curves using keyframes.

Parameters

The Parameters section lets you add, remove or modify a keyframe at the current frame.
You can show or hide the Parameters section by clicking the Show/Hide Parameters
button.

Add Keyframe

Adds a keyframe at the current frame.

Delete Keyframe

Removes an existing keyframe at the current frame.

Hand Cursor

Lets you change the current keyframe or drawing exposure. When you hover the cursor
over the value, the hand cursor appears. Drag left or right to change the value. Or doubleclick on the keyframe value and enter a new value.

Previous Key- Lets you navigate through the previous keyframes.
frame
Next KeyframeLets you navigate through the next keyframes.

Show Func-

Displays the Function menu where you can link a layer to an existing function or create a
401Chapter 7: Views

Timeline View

tion Menu

new function.

Keyframe

A black or red square is displayed in the Timeline view when a keyframe exists. You canselect these keyframes and drag them wherever you want on the timeline. You can also
copy, cut, and delete them.

NOTE: To delete a keyframe without deleting the drawing exposure, go to theTimeline view and select the keyframe to be deleted and then select Animation >Delete Keyframe from the top menu or press F7.

When a parent layer is collapsed and a child layer contains a keyframe, a white square will
be displayed.
Split

The Split button lets you split the Timeline view in two sections, allowing you to see twodifferent portions of the Timeline view. This way, if your scene length is very long, you can
see the beginning and the end at the same time.

Drawing
Exposure

In the Timeline view, when a drawing is exposed, it is represented as a grey block. If thedrawing is exposed for several frames, the block is extended. When a second drawing is
exposed, a new grey block is displayed.

The exposure’s colour can be changed. To pick a new colour, click the Change Track
Colour button in the corresponding layer.
View Modes

The View Modes button lets you streamline the process of working with elements in theTimeline view. There are three different view modes you can choose to work in. With eachmode you select, certain elements may or may not be visible in the Timeline view.
Depending on your workflow, this can be useful for quickly hiding elements when you want
to focus on specific ones. To select a view mode, use the drop-down menu in the bottomleft corner of the Timeline view.

Show/Hide
Additional
Links

The Show/Hide Additional Links button lets you display links associated with a layer. For
example, if you connect a mask to more than one effect such as a Tone and a Highlight,
you can see these connections in the Additional Links section.

402

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Zoom

The Zoom tool increases or reduces the width of the frames in the Timeline view. Move theslider right to increase the width or left to reduce it. You can also press 1 and 2. Reset thezoom by click the Reset Zoom button.

403

Chapter 7: Views

Tool Properties View

Tool Properties View
T-HFND-004-002
The Tool Properties view contains the most common options and operations related to the currently selected tool.
When you select a tool from the Tools toolbar, the Tool Properties view updates.
For example, if you choose the Select tool, the Tool Properties view will display the options and operations
related to it, such as Snap to Contour, Apply to All Drawings, Flip Horizontal, and Flatten.

NOTE: To learn more about the options appearing in the Tool Properties view, see Tools Properties on page249.

How to access the Tool Properties view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Tool Properties.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

404

button and select Tool Properties.

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Top View
T-HFND-008-014
The Top view is used mainly for multiplane scenes and to position elements in 3D space. It allows you to see thescene’s stage from above. This lets the camera cone and the spacing between the elements be seen.

How to access the Top view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Top.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Top.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options thatyou can use to work in the Side view.

Thumbnails

A thumbnail of each drawing layer in the scene. The
order of the thumbnail images is based on eachelement’s FB position in the scene space. You can see
a representation of the FB position of each layer in thecamera cone.

Camera Cone

The camera cone represents the camera’s position andfield-of-view (FOV).

Axis Reference Arrows

The axis reference arrows let you maintain your orientation when navigating in the view.

405

Chapter 7: Views

Top View

Show/Hide Camera

Shows or hides camera frame in the Perspective view.

Reset View

Resets the pan, rotation, and zoom of the Perspectiveview.

Zoom Menu

This field displays the current zoom level in the
Perspective view. You can use the Zoom level dropdown menu to select a specific zoom level from the list.
Zoom levels from 2.5% to 6400% are available; you canalso select Fit To View to automatically use a zoom
level that lets you see all your scene layers andinformation in the Perspective view at once.

Layer Name

This field displays the currently selected layer and drawing name.

Tool Name

This field displays the currently selected tool.

Frame NumberThis field displays the currently selected frame of youranimation.

Colour Swatch

This field displays the currently selected colour in thepalette.

406

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Xsheet View
T-HFND-006-003
The Xsheet view lets you read the timing vertically, displays the drawing layers as columns, and shows thedrawing’s name. You can also see the functions and keyframes of the motion paths in the Xsheet’s function
columns. The value of each keyframe is shown in the Xsheet view; these are displayed as black squares in theTimeline view. The Xsheet view contains more detail than the Timeline view, and is faster and easier to read.

How to access the Xsheet view
Do one of the following:l

From the top menu, select Windows > Xsheet.

l

From any of the other views, click the Add View

Icon

button and select Xsheet.

SectionDescription

View Menu

The View menu contains all the tools and options that you
can use to manage columns and timing.

View Toolbar

The view toolbar contains all the tools and options you canuse in the Xsheet view to manage columns and timing.

Xsheet Main Section

The Xsheet view has three sections. By default, only themain section is visible. It displays the drawing layers, also
known as drawing columns.

407

Chapter 7: Views

Xsheet View

When using advanced compositing and animation
techniques, unconnected functions (motion paths) also
appear in the main section. Unconnected functions meanthat some motion paths are not attached to any particularlayer.
When you reconnect functions to a layer, they are stillvisible in the main section.

Functions Section

The Functions section is used for more advanced
techniques. This section displays the functions (paths)
related to the selected layer in the Timeline view. By
default, the Functions section is hidden.
In the Xsheet view, click the Expand button located on theright side of the main section. Click on the same button tocollapse it. You can also use the Show Column List buttonin the Xsheet View toolbar. If you select a drawing column
in the main section of the Xsheet view, the function
columns will not be displayed. You must select the layerfrom the Timeline view.

408Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

Column List Section

The Column List section allows you to show and hidecolumns in the Xsheet view. When you hide a layer in the
Xsheet view, it is also disabled in the Timeline view.

You can use the Column List to hide individual columns or
hide an entire column type (drawing or function) from the
Xsheet view. By default, the Functions section is hidden.
In the Xsheet view, click the Expand button on the right sideof the main section to show the Functions section. Click on
the same button to collapse it. You can also use the Show
Column List
button in the Xsheet toolbar.
Go to the Xsheet view menu and select View > Show
Column List. Click the Expand button on the right side of
the Functions section to display the Column List section.

Column Header

Each column available in the Xsheet view has a header

409

Chapter 7: Views

Xsheet View

displaying the column’s name. The column’s name is thesame as the corresponding timeline layer. If you rename
one or the other, they will both be renamed.
A quick access menu is available when you right-click. Thismenu contains the command affecting an entire column
such as renaming, changing the default colour, or deleting acolumn.
The tooltip that appears when you hover at the top of each
Xsheet column shows the folder path to the source
drawings for that column.

In Harmony, the column header shows the layer’s name andthe name of the drawing folder to which it is linked. If thename of the layer is the same as the drawing folder, thedrawing folder’s name will not be displayed. To modify thename of the element folder independently from the column
and layer name, you must select the Advanced Element
Mode option preference in the Advanced tab of thePreferences dialog box.

Current Drawing

A drawing selected in dark red indicates that the drawing iscurrently displayed in the Drawing and Camera views. The
current drawing selection is not linked to the drawing
displayed in the Camera view since drawings from each
visible layer are displayed at once.

Current Frame

The darker frame appearing in the Xsheet view represents
the current frame.

Drawing Exposure

In the drawing columns, you can see the drawing names
and their exposure. You can use any alphanumeric symbol410

Harmony 14 Advanced - Reference Guide

to name your drawing. When a drawing is exposed overmore than one cell, a vertical black line is displayed toindicate the continuity of the exposure. When there is no
drawing in a cell, the cell will be blank.

Frame Numbers

On the left side of the Xsheet view, the frame numbers areshown indicating where you are. These read verticallyinstead of being displayed horizontally as they are in theTimeline view.
ll

To go to a particular frame, click the frame number.

To select an entire range of frames, click and drag aselection downwards.

Current Frame Display

At the bottom-right of the Xsheet view, you can see thecurrent frame number, as well as the column containing thedrawing currently displayed in the Drawing view.

Functions Column

The functions columns are displayed in the Functions
section of the Xsheet view. They represent the motion androtation you applied to a drawing layer.
A function column can also be related to an effect. Selecting
the effect layer shows you the corresponding function
column in the Xsheet view.

411

Chapter 7: Views

Xsheet View

The function columns display the position value or effectvalue on each cell. If there is a keyframe on a cell, a blacksquare is displayed. Holding the same value for several
frames displays a vertical black line.

Increase/Decrease
Exposure

You can quickly increase or decrease the exposure of theselected cell by clicking on the up and down arrows in the
Increase/Decrease Exposure field.

Overwrite/Insert Modes

The Overwrite/Insert button allows you to decide the way
the values are inserted into the Xsheet.

412